-------
Concentration of Peak height sample Concentration of
unknown (ng/L) = Peak height standard x standard
12.3 Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
figures. Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
used for concentrations above 99 #g/L, two. significant figures for
concentrations between 1-99 /*g/L, and 1 significant figure for lower
concentrations.
12.4 Calculate the total trihalomethane concentration by summing the four
individual trihalomethane concentrations in /ig/L.
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision for the
organohalides added to Ohio River water and carbon-filtered tap
water are presented in Table 2.(1) Method detection limits for
several of the listed analytes are also presented in Table 2.(1)
Some laboratories may not be able to achieve these detection limits
since results are dependent upon instrument sensitivity and matrix
effects.
13.2 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using drinking water
fortified with various organohalides at six concentrations between 8
and 505 /zg/L. Single operator precision, overall precision, and
method accuracy were found to be directly related to the
concentration of the analyte. Linear equations to describe these
relationships are presented in Table 3 (9).
14. REFERENCES
1. Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg, "The Determination of Halogenated
Chemicals in Water by the Purge and Trap Method," Method 502.1, EPA
600/4-81-059, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April,
1981.
2. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
"Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci . Techno!.. 15, 1426,
1981.
3. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
4. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards," (29-CFR-1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
5. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories." American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4th Edition, 1985.
23
-------
6.
7.
8.
9.
Kingsley, B.A., C. Gin, D.M. Coulson, and R.F. Thomas, "Gas
Chromatographic Analysis of Purgeable Halocarbon and Aromatic
Compounds in Drinking Water Using Two Detectors in Series, Water
Chiorination, Environmental Impact and Health Effects," Volume 4, Ann
Arbor Science.
Slater, R.W., Graves, R.L. and G.D. McKee, "A Comparison of ;
Preservation Techniques for Volatile Organic Compounds in Chlorinated
Tap Waters," U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg, "The Determination of Synthetic
Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
Column Gas Chromatography," U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
45268. ' • .
EPA Method Validation Study 23, Method 601 (Purgeable Halocarbons),
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
24
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR ORGANOHALIDES
Analvte
Chl oromethane
Bromomethane
Dichlorodifluoromethane
Vinyl chloride
Chloroethane
Methyl ene chloride
Tr i ch 1 or of 1 uqromet h ane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
Bromochl oromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
cis-1, 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
1, 2-Di chloroethane
Dibromomethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
Carbon tetrachloride
Bromodi chl oromethane
Di chl oroacetoni tri 1 e(c)
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,1-Dichloropropene
Tri chl oroethene
1 ,3-Di chl oropropane
Di bromochl oromethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
2-Chloroethyl ethyl ether CJ
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether(c)
Bromoform
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
Chi orocycl ohexane' '
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Pentachl oroethane
1-Chl orocycl ohexene(c)
Chlorobenzene
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
Bromobenzene
2-Chlorotoluene
bis-2-Chloroisopropyl ether
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Retention
Column 1
- r 1.50
2.17
2.62
2.67
3.33
5.25
7.18
7.93
8.48
9.30
10.1
10.1
10.7
11.4
11.6
12.6
13.0
13.7
14.7
14.9
15.1
15.8
16.2
16.5
16.5
17.4
17.6
18.0
19.2
19.4
21.3
21.4
21.6
21.7
21.7
22.4
24.2
26.0
27.1
32.1
32.2
34.0
34.9
35.45
(a) = Columns and conditions are described in Sect.
(b) = Not determined.
(c) = Compound not a method analyte
(d) = Pentachl oroethane apparently
analytical system.
•
Time (min)a
Column 2
5.28
7.05
(b)
5.28
8.68
10.1
(b)
7.72
12.7
12.6
9.38
12.1
12.1
15.4
14.9
13.1
11.1
14.6
(b)
16.6
(b)
13.1
(b)
16.6
18.1
18.9
(b)
(b)
19.2
21.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
15.0
(b)
19.9
18.8
(b)
(b)
22.0
(b)
22.4
23.9
22.3
6.3.3 and 6.3.4.
decomposes to tetrachl oroethene in the
25
-------
TABLE 2.
n,™ tABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION, AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
FOR VOLATILE HAL06ENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN MATER
Analyte
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chl orobenzene
Chlorocyclohexane
1-Chl orocycl ohexene
Chloroethane
2-Chloroethyl ethyl ether
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochl oromethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1,4-Di chl orobenzene
Dichlorodifluoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
l,2-Dichloroethene(b)
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Methyl ene chloride
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Trichlorofluoromethane
1, 2, 3-Trichl oropropane
Vinyl Chloride
Concen-
tration
(A9/L)
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
Average
Recovery
(%)
'93
,90
roo
95
90
88
93
93
93
95
93
85
95
93
100
95
95
90
103
95
110
88
88
95
98
88
85
93
95
90
93
95
94
90
100
110
Number
of
Samples
20
19
17
17
17
18
21
21
20
18
16
20
17
18
5
21
21
20
12
17
17
18
20
20
21
18
17
20
18
17
20
15
17
21
20
12
Relative
Standard
Deviation
(%)
12
Ji b
9 '5
*X • v
6.5
15.0 1
7 n
/ • v/
9 "?
^ • • w
18
A \J
7.5
8 5
w • «j
9 3
•? » wf
7 0
t • w
12 5
JL fm • W
8 0
\J • V
13
A -iJ
8 3
w » w
13
JLO
20
t_\/
6 0
w • V
7 0
/ • V
9 3
& • w
7.0
3.5
6.5
9.3
12.0
8 0
w • v
9 0
y * v
9 5
«x • \f
8.0
6 0
w • V
6 0
V • V
9.3
9.5
15
Method
Detection
Limit
(09/L)
i*\
\*i
(a\
\a/
0 003
v » Ww
0 05
V . VtJ
Onrio
. uuo
0(\(\K
. uuo
(a\
\&)
(a\
\4)
Onnft
. uuo
0 02
V » Uc»
Om
. Ul
/a\
v«;
Onno
. uuo
004.
. UH
^a^
va;
/a^
^d^
(a\
\*)
/a\
la;
/a^
\*)
n nn^
u . uuo
Onno
. UU£
Onn-s
. uuo
0.002
(a)
/a\
\d^
(a)
/a\
\4)
(n\
\d7
001
. Ul
0001
. VUJ.
0 00^
v . UUO
0007
. uu/
0001
«UU1
/a\
\*)
(a\
\<*/
0.01
(a) » Not determined.
(b) = Includes cis- and trans- isomers.
26
-------
TABLE 3. SINGLE ANALYST PRECISION, MULTI-LABORATORY PRECISION, AND ACCURACY
FOR VOLATILE HALOGENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER
Analvte
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chlqrobe.nzene
Chldroethane
Chloroform
Chl oromethane
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di bhl orobenzene
1,1-Di chl oroethane
1, 2-Di chl oroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1, 2-Di chl oropropane
Methyl ene Chloride
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
TrichToroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
Vinyl Chloride
Single Analyst
0.13X + 1.41
0.10X + 0.20
0.1 OX + 1.57
0.07X + 1.71
0.07X + 0.65
0.05X + 5.58
0.28X + 0.27
0.10X + 1.55
0.12X + 2.02
0.15X + 0.64
0.09X + 0.39
0.09X + 0.47
0.06X + 1.69
0.12X + 0.13
0.16X + 0.29
0.19X - 0.6.1
0.08X + 1.04
0.09X - 1.42
0.17X + 0.96
0.14X - 0.33
0.06X + 0.99
0.13X + 0.23
0.22X + 0.03
0.14X - 0.17
Multi -Laboratory
Precision
0.18X + 3.06
0.24X + 1.25
0.20X + 1.09
0.16X + 1.43
0.19X + 0.39
0.09X + 6.21
0.49X +1.51
0.23X + 0.91
0.17X + 2.26
0.24X + 1.48
0.15X + 0.39
0.18X + 1.13
0.18X + 1.21
0.31X - 0.71
0.24X + 0.95
0.27X - 0.10
0.17X + 2.43
0.20X + 1.65
0.25X + 0.58
0.27X - 0.76
0.19X + 0.69
0.32X - 0.57
0.30X + 0.64
0.32X + 0.07
Accuracy
As Mean _
Recovery (X)
l.OOC + 0.96
1.02C - 1.81
l.OOC - 2.20
l.OOC - 1.39
1.08C - 1.97
0.90C + 3.44
0.91C - 0.99
0.98C + 2.89
0.91C + 1.12
0.91C - 0.13
0.91C + 0.26
0.93C - 2.04
1.03C - 0.41
1.03C - 1.16
0.98C - 1.02
0.98C + 1.19
0.97C - 1.50
0.92C - 0.82
0.96C + 0.35
0.92C + 0.02
0.84C + 0.83
0.92C - 0.10
0.92C + 1.21
1.06C - 1.86
X = Mean recovery, in
C = True value for the concentration, in
27
-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
TRAP
EXIT K IN.
0.0.
KIN.
0. D. EXIT
0, 0.
INLET H IN.
0.0.
10MM GLASS FRIT
MEDIUM POROSITY
SAMPLE INLET
|-»-2-WAY SYWNGE VALVE
-17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NIEDLE
V^fiMM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
1/16 IN. O.D.
W-INLET ^/STAINLESS STEEL
13X MOUSCULAR
SIEVE PURGE
GASRLTER
PURGE GAS
aow
CONTROL
FIGURE 1. PURGING DEVICE
28
-------
PACKING PROCEDURE
CONSTRUCTION
(SUSS
WOOL
ACTIVATED, ,,
CHARCOAL7.N
6RADE15 , ,,
SIUCA GEL7'7'
TENAX
3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL'
1CM
5MM
7««./FOOT
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
SOLID _
(DOUBLE LAYER)
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
SOLID
(SINGLE LAYER)
SOB-
TRAP INLET
LD
COMPRESSION
'FITTING NUT
AND FERRULES
THERMOCOUPLE/
CONTROLLER
SENSOR
rBrtPERAlTJRE
CONTROL
AND
PYROMETER
^ / TUBING 2SCU
0.105 IN. I.D.
0.125 IN. 0.0.
STAINLESS STEEL
FIGURE 2. TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
DESORB CAPABILITY
29
-------
3N3ZN380H01HOia-fr
3WH130a01HOVH131-2 1 'I *
7 '
3NVH130H01HDVH131-J'l'l'l
3NVH130HOWIO-Z 'L
3N3dOUdOU01K)ia-C 'I -
T
3NVm30801HDIUl -
3N3H13U01H3IQ -Z'l -si 3
t/5
O
CQ
LU
CO
UU
a:
GL
u.
o
z:
o
a:
o
oo
ui
o:
30
-------
METHOD 502.2 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY PURGE AND TRAP
CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH PHOTOIONIZATION
AND ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY DETECTORS IN SERIES
Revision 2.0
R. W. Slater, Jr. and J. S. Ho - Method 502.2, Revision 1.0 (1986)
J. S. Ho - Method 502.2, Revision 2.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
31
-------
METHOD 502.2
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY PURGE AND TRAP
CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH PHOTOIONIZATION
AND ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY DETECTORS IN SERIES
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1
This is a general purpose method for the identification and
simultaneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
finished drinking water, raw source water, or drinking water in any
treatment stage (1-3). The method is applicable to a'wide range of
organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
and trap procedures. The following compounds can be determined by
this method.
Analvte
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochloromethane
Bromodi chloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chloromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochloromethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1,2-Dichlorobenzene
1,3-Di chlorobenzene
1,4-Di chlorobenzene
Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
ci s-1,2-Di chloroethene
trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
1,2-Di chloropropane
Chemical Abstract Services
Registry Number
71-43-2
• 108-86-1
74-97-5
75-27-4
75-25-2
74-83-9
104-51-8
135-98-8
98-06-6
56-23-5
108-90-7
75-00-3
67-66-3:
74^-87-3
95^49-8*
106-43-4
124-48-1
96-12-8
106-93-4
74-95-3
95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
75-71-8
75-34-3
107-06-2
75-35-4
156-59-4
156-60-5
78-87-5
32
-------
1,3-Dichloropropane 142-28-9
2,2-Dichloropropane 590-20-7
1,1-Dichloropropene 563-58-6
cis-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-01-5
trans-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-02-6
Ethyl benzene 100-41-4
Hexachlorobutadi ene 87-68-3
Isopropy1 benzene 98-82-8
4-Isopropyltoluene 99-87-6
Methylene chloride 75-09-2
Naphthalene • . , j. 91-20-3
Propylbenzene 103-65-1
. Styrene 100-42-5
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane 630-20-6
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5,
Tetrachloroethene 127-18-4
Toluene 108-88-3
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene 87-61-6
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1
1,1,1-Trichloroethane 71-55-6
1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5
Trichloroethene 79-01-6
Trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4
1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4
1,2,4-Trimethyl benzene 95-63-6
1,3,5-Trimethyl benzene 108-67-8
Vinyl chloride 75-01-4
o-Xylene 95-47-6
m-Xylene 108-38-3
p-Xylene 106-42-3
1.2 This method is applicable to the determination of total
trihalomethanes and otfter volatile synthetic compounds as required
by drinking water regulations of 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part
141. Method detection limits (MDLs) (4) are compound and instrument
dependent and vary from approximately 0.01-3.0 jttg/L. The applicable
concentration range of this method is also compound and instrument
dependent and is approximately 0.02 to 200 /zg/L. Analytes that are
inefficiently purged from water will not be detected when present at
low concentrations, but they can be measured with acceptable
accuracy and precision when present in sufficient amounts.
1.3 Two of the three isomeric xylenes may not be resolved on the
capillary column, and if not, must be reported as isomeric pairs.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Highly volatile organic compounds with low water solubility are
extracted (purged) from the sample matrix by bubbling an inert gas
through a 5 ml aqueous sample. Purged sample components are trapped
in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials. When purging is
complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with helium to
33
-------
desorb trapped sample components onto a capillary gas chromatography
(GC) column. The column is temperature programmed to separate the
method analytes which are then detected with a photoionization
detector (PID) and a halogen specific detector placed in series.
2.2 Tentative identifications are confirmed by analyzing standards under
the same conditions used for samples and comparing resultant GC
retention times. Additional confirmatory information can be gained
by comparing the relative response from the two detectors. Each
identified component is measured by relating the response produced
tor that compound to the response produced by a compound that is
used as an internal standard. For absolute confirmation, a gas
chromatography/mass spectrometry(GC/MS) determination according to
method 524.1 or method 524.2 is recommended.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Laboratory-duplicates (LD1 and LD2) - Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) - An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates '
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
34
-------
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) -- An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) —'An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
35
-------
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
sorbent trap. The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (iPTFE) plastic
tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
components in the purging device should be avoided since such
materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in
the trap during the purge operation. Analyses of "laboratory reagent
blanks (Sect. 10.3) provide information about the presence of
contaminants. When potential interfering peaks are noted in
laboratory reagent blanks, the analyst should change the purge gas
source and regenerate the molecular sieve purge gas filter.
Subtracting blank values from sample results is not permitted.
Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
organic compounds. A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
reagent water. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.
Special precautions must be taken to analyze for methylene chloride.
The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
background levels will result. Since methylene chloride will
permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed from stainless
steel or copper tubing. Laboratory clothing worn by the analyst
should be clean since clothing previously exposed to methylene
chloride fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
contribute to sample contamination.
When traps containing combinations of silica gel and coconut
charcoal are used, residual water from previous analyses collects in
the trap and can be randomly released into the analytical column.
To minimize the possibility of this occurring, the trap is
reconditioned after each use as described in Sect. 11.4.
5. SAFETY
5.1
The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals used 'in this method has
not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
this method. Additional references to laboratory safety are
available (5-7) for the information of the analyst.
36
-------
5 2 The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon
tetrachlori de, 1,4-di chlorobenzene 1,2-dichlorethane,
hexachlorobutadi ene, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane,
1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloroform, 1,2-dibromoethane
tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene, and vinyl chloride. Pure
standard materials and stock standard solutions of these compounds
should be handled in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas
respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high
concentrations of these toxic compounds.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6 1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials each equipped
with a PTFE-faced silicone septum . Prior to use wash vials and
septa with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water A low
the vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105 C
oven for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to
be free of organics.
fi 9 PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM - The purge and trap system consists of three
separate peces of equipment: purging device trap, and desorber.
Interns are commercially available from several sources that meet
all of the following specifications.
621 The all glass purging device (Figure 1) must be designed to
accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
Gaseous volumes above the sample must be kept to a minimum
«15 ml) to eliminate dead volume effects. A glass tnt
should be installed at the base of the sample chamber so that
the purge gas passes through the water column as finely
divided bubbles with a diameter of <3 mm at the origin.
Needle spargers may be used, however, the purge gas must be
introduced at a point <5 mm from the base of the water
column.
622 The trap (Figure 2) must be at least 25 cm long and have an
inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. Starting from the
inlet, the trap must contain the following amounts of
adsorbents: 1/3 of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer, 1/3 of
silica gel, and 1/3 of coconut charcoal. It is recommended
that 1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing be inserted at
the inlet to extend the life of the trap. If it is not
necessary to analyze for dichlorodifluoromethane, the
charcoal can be eliminated and the polymer increased to fill
2/3 of the trap. If only compounds boiling above 35 C are to
be analyzed, both the silica gel and charcoal can be
eliminated and the polymer increased to fill the entire trap.
lefore initial use/the trap should be conditioned overnight
at 180°C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least
20 mL/min. Vent the trap effluent to the room, not to.the
analytical column. Prior to daily use, the trap should be
37
-------
conditioned for 10 min at 180°C with backflushing. The trao
may be vented to the analytical column during dai y P
conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
temperature program prior to analysis of samples.
6.2.3 The use of the methyl silicone coated packing is recommended
D?otectir?hat0r^ lhe +P3C k1ng Serves a d""l PurposeTded'
?K5 thl 9rf the. adjorbent from aerosols, and also of insuring
that the adsorbent is fully enclosed within the heated zone
of the trap thus eliminating potential cold spots.
ai thelrapfnllt ^^ fl1aSS W°01 may be Used as a
til r-Ure) " be Capable °f
0-
?. : The Polymer section of the trap should
n n hlgher $han 2PO°C or the life expectancy of the
SSL? ]1 decrease' Tl"ap ^ilure is characterized by a
pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
the trap during purging or by poor bromofoVm sensitiJi^es.
6.3 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY SYSTEM
6.3.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
be equipped with variable-constant differentia flow
controllers so that the column flow rate will reialS constant
throughout desorption and temperature program operation The
column oven may need to be cooled to <10'C (Sect 6 3 3)
therefore, a subambient oven controller may be required.'
6*3'2
9™Phy Columns. Any gas chromatography
mnt . performance specifications of this
method may be used. Separations of the calibration mixture
must be equivalent or better than those described; in this
?J?6 Uf fU C°1UmnS have been identified: column 1
3'3) and column 2 (^ct. 6.3.4) both provide
6 3S5eParwhl°hnShf°rhSlXtJ! °^a»^ compounds! Column 3
m^hAH^o*1 has been demonstrated satisfactory for
method 524.2, may also be used.
6.3.3 Column 1- 60m long x 0.75mm ID VOCOL (Supelco Inc
wide-bore capillary column with 1.5 Am film thickness or
tTr1^ ,?? fl°W rate of helium easier gls?s adjusted
to about 6 ml/mm. The column temperature Is held for 8 min
at 10 C, then programmed to 180°C at 4°C/min, and held until
ODLfnePdeCw?dhCt°i;POUndiS haV? eluted" A samP^ ch?oSogr m
obtained with this column is presented in Figure 3
lifted1?!! TaMp IhatT?ay be ani1ciPated with this column are
listed in Table 1. It was used to develop the method
performance statements in Sect. 13.
6.3.4 Column 2 - 105m long x 0.53mm ID, RTX-502 2 (0 I
Corporation/RESTEK Corporation) mega-bore capiilary column,
38
-------
with 3.0 urn film thickness, or equivalent. The flow rate of
helium carrier gas is adjusted to about 8 mL/rmn. The column
temperature is held for 10 min at 35°C, then programmed to
200°C at 4°C/min, and held until all expected compounds have
eluted. A sample chromatogram obtained with this column is
presented in Figure 4. Retention times that may be
anticipated with this column are listed in Table 3. It was
used to develop the method performance statements in Sect.
13.
635 Column 3 - 30 m long x 0.53 mm ID DB-62 mega-bore (J&W
Scientific, Inc.) column with 3 pm film thickness.
6.3.6
6.3.7
A series configuration of a high temperature photoionization
detector(PID) equipped with 10.0 eV (nominal) lamp and
electroconductivity detector(ELCD) is required. This allows
to simultaneously analyze volatile organic compounds (VOC)
that are aromatic or unsaturated by photoionization detector
and organohalide by an electrolytic conductivity detector.
A Tracer 703 photoionization detector and a Tracer Hall model
700-A detector connected in series with a short piece of
uncoated capillary tube, 0.32 mm ID was used to develop the
single laboratory method performance data described in
Sect.13. The system and operating conditions used to collect
these data are as follows:
Column:
The purge-and-trap Unit:
PID detector base temperature:
Reactor tube:
Reactor temperature:
Reactor base temperature:
Electrolyte: 100% n-propyl alcohol
Electrolyte flow rate:
Reaction gas:
Carrier gas plus make-up gas:
Column 1 (Sect.6.3.3)
Tekmar LSC-2
250°c
Nickel 1/16 in. OD
810 °C
250°C
0.8 mL/min
Hydrogen at 40 mL/min
Helium at 30 mL/min
6 3 8 An O.I. Model 4430 photoionization detector mounting together
with the model 4420 electrolytic conductivity detector (ELCD)
as a dual detector set was used to develop the single
laboratory method performance data for column 2 described in
Sect.13. The system and the operating conditions used to
collect these data are as follows:
Column:
The purge-and-trap unit:
Reactor tube:
Reactor temperature:
Reactor base temperature:
Electrolyte: 100 % n-propyl alcohol
Column 2 (Sect.6.3.4)
O.I. 4460A
Nickel 1/16 in. OD
& .02in.ID
950°C
250°C
39
-------
Electrolyte flow rate:
Reaction gas:
Carrier gas plus make-up gas:
0.050 mL/min
Hydrogen at 100 mL/min
Helium at 30 mL/min
6.4 SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES
6.4.1 Two 5-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip.
6.4.2 Three 2-way syringe valves with Luer ends.
6.4.3 One 25-AtL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).
6.4.4 Micro syringes - 10, 100 #L.
6.4.5 Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off valve.
6.5 MISCELLANEOUS
6.5.1 Standard solution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
PTFE-lined screw caps.
7- REAGENT AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 TRAP PACKING MATERIALS
7.1.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).
7.1.2 Methyl silicone packing (optional) - OV-1 (3%) on
Chromosorb-W, 60/80 mesh or equivalent.
7.1.3 Silica gel - 35/60 mesh, Davison, grade 15 or equivalent.
7.1.4 c°conut charcoal - Prepare from Barnebey Cheney, CA-580-26
lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26 mesh screen.
7.2 REAGENTS
7.2.1 Ascorbic acid - ACS Reagent grade, granular.
7.2.2 Sodium thiosulfate - ACS Reagent grade, granular.
?'2'3 S°CuJ?rlC acid/1+J) - Carefully add a measured volume of
cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.
7.2.4 Reagent water - It should be demonstrated to be free of
analytes Prepare reagent water by passing tap water through
a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of activated carbon by
using a water purification system, or by boilinq distilled
water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with Inert gas while
40
-------
the water temperature is held at 90°C. Store in clean,
narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw caps.
7.2.5 Methanol - demonstrated to be free of analytes.
7.2.6 Vinyl chloride - 99.9% pure vinyl chloride is available from
Ideal Gas Products, Inc., Edison, New Jersey and from
Matheson, East Rutherford, New Jersey. Certified mixtures of
vinyl chloride in nitrogen at 1.0 and 10.0 ppm (v/v) are
available from several sources.
7.3 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
the following procedures:
7.3.1 Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand,
unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
surfaces have dried. Weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
7.3.2 If the analyte is a liquid at room temperature, use a 100-/iL
syringe and immediately add two or more drops of reference
standard to the flask. Be sure that the reference standard
falls directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck
of the flask. If the analyte is a gas at room temperature,
fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
5.0-mL mark, lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol
meniscus, and slowly inject the standard into the neck area
of the flask. The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.
7.3.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
flask several times. Calculate the concentration in
micrograms per micro!iter from the net gain in weight. When
compound purity is certified at 96% or greater, the weight
can be used without correction to calculate the concentration
of the stock standard.
7.3.4 Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped with
PTFE-lined screw caps. Methanol solutions prepared from
liquid analytes are stable for at least four weeks when
stored at 4°C. Methanol solutions prepared from gaseous
analytes are not stable for more than one week when stored at
<0°C; at room temperature, they must be discarded after one
day. Storage time may be extended only if the analyte proves
their validity by analyzing quality control samples.
7.4 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTION - Use stock standard solutions to
prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain the
analytes in methanol. The primary dilution standards should be
prepared at concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare
aqueous calibration standard solutions (Sect. 9.1) that will bracket
the working concentration range. Store the primary dilution
41
-------
7.5
standard solutions with minimal headspace and check frequently for
signs of deterioration or evaporation, especially just before
preparing calibration standard solutions from them. Stbrage times
described for stock standard solutions in Sect. 7.3.4 also apply to
primary dilution standard solutions.
INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION - Prepare a fortified solution containing
l-chloro-2-fluorobenze or fluorobenzene and 2-bromo-l-chloropropane
in methanol using the procedures described in Sect. 7.3 and 7.4. It
is recommended that the primary dilution standard be prepared at a
concentration of 5 /jg/mL of each internal standard compound. The
addition of 10 #L of such a standard to 5.0 mL of sample or
calibration standard would be equivalent to 10 /*g/L.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION
8.1.1 Collect all samples in duplicate. If samples contain
residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
acid (or 3 mg of sodium thiosulfate) to the sample bottle
before filling. Fill sample bottles to overflowing, but take
care not to flush out the rapidly dissolving ascorbic acid
(or sodium thiosulfate). No air bubbles should pass through
the sample as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in the
sample when the bottle is sealed. Adjust the pH of the
duplicate samples to <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1
HC1 for each 20 mL of sample volume. Seal the sample
bottles, PFTE-face down, and shake vigorously for 1 min.
8.1.2 When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.
8.1.3 When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.
8.1.4
The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
and maintained at that temperature until analysis. Field
samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
at the laboratory.
42
-------
8.2 SAMPLE STORAGE
8.2.1 Store samples at 4°C until analysis. The sample storage area
must be free of organic solvent vapors.
8.2.2 Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection. Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
8.3 FIELD REAGENT BLANKS
8.3.1 Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
from the same general sample site at approximately the same
time. At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
filled sample bottles. Wherever a set of samples is shipped
and stored, it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.
8.3.2 Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
(or sodium thiosulfate) and HC1 to blanks (Sect. 8.1.1).
9. CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION
9.1 PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
9.1.1 The number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on
the calibration range desired. A minimum of three CAL
solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
in concentration. For a factor of 50 use at least four
standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
One calibration standard should contain each analyte of
concern at a concentration 2 to 10 times greater than the
method detection limit (Table 2 and 4) for that compound.
The other CAL standards should contain each analyte of
concern at concentrations that define the range of the sample
analyte concentrations. Every CAL solution contains the
internal standard at same concentration (10 /ig/L).
9.1.2 To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot of
reagent water in a volumetric container or sample syringe.
Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard
into the water. Remove the needle as quickly as possible
after injection. Accurate calibration standards can be
prepared by injecting 20 fil of the primary dilution standards
to 25 mL or more of reagent water using the syringe described
in section 6.4.3. Aqueous standards are not stable in
volumetric container and should be discarded after one hour
43
-------
unless transferred to sample bottle and sealed immediately as
described in Sect. 8.1.2.
9.2 CALIBRATION
9.2.1 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11 and tabulate
peak height or area response versus the concentration in the
standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of
response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant
over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation),
linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average
ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a
calibration curve.
9.2.2 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of one or
more calibration standards. If the response for any analyte
varies from the predicted response by more than ± 20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve or use a single point calibration standard as described
in Sect. 9.2.3.'
9.2.3 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
primary dilution standards in methanol. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response close (± 20%) to that of the unknowns.
9.2.4 As a second alternative to a calibration curve, internal
standard calibration techniques may be used. The
organohalides recommended for this purpose are: l-chloro-2-
fluorobenze or 2-bromo-l-chloropropane and fluorobenzene.
The internal standard is added to the sample just before
purging. Check the validity of the internal standard
calibration factors daily by analyzing a calibration
standard. Since the calculated concentrations can be
strongly biased by inaccurate detector response measurements
for the internal standard or by coelution of an unknown, it
is required that the area measurement of the internal
standard of each sample be within ± 3 standard deviations of
those obtained from calibration standards. If they do not,
then internal standards can not be used.
9.3 CALIBRATION FOR VINYL CHLORIDE USING A CERTIFIED GASEOUS MIXTURE
(OPTIONAL)
9.3.1 Fill the purging device with 5.0 mL of reagent water or
aqueous calibration standard, and add internal standards.
44
-------
9.3.2 Start to purge the aqueous mixture (Sect. 7.2.6). Inject a
known volume (between 100 and 2000 /zL) of the calibration gas
(at room temperature) directly into the purging device with a
gas tight syringe. Slowly inject the gaseous sample through
the aqueous sample inlet needle. After completion, inject 2
ml of clean room air to sweep the gases from the inlet needle
into the purging device. Inject the gaseous standard before
five min of the 11-min purge time have elapsed.
9.3.3 Determine the aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
chloride standard injected in /tg/L, according to the
equation:
S = 0.51 (C) (V) Equation 1
where: S = Aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
chloride standard in Mg/L;
C = Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v);
V = Volume of standard injected in millilHer
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
blanks. The laboratory must maintain records to document the
quality of the data generated. Additional quality control practices
are recommended.
10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background. Before any samples
are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent
the determination of any analyte of concern. Sources of background
contamination are glassware, purge gas, sorbents, and equipment.
Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
before proceeding with the next section. In general background from
method analytes should be below the method detection limit.
10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision. Analyze
four to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of 0.1-5
/jg/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for guidance on
appropriate concentrations).
10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
quality control sample to reagent water. If a quality
control sample containing the method analytes is not
available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
standards may be used. Also add the appropriate amounts of
internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
45
-------
in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
of all replicates over a period of several days.
10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
procedures described in (4).
10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
RSD should be <20%. Some analytes, particularly the early
eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight
compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
other analytes. The method detection limits must be
sufficient to detect analytes at the regulatory levels. If
these criteria are not met for an analyte; take remedial
action and repeat the measurements for that analyte to
demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
analyzed.
10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
as a function of time. Charting of surrogate recoveries is
an especially valuable activity since these are present in
every sample and the analytical results will form a
significant record of data quality.
10.4 Laboratory reagent blanks. With each batch of samples processed as
a group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
determine the background system contamination.
10.5 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work shift
analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each '
analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10 3 If
more than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for
every 20 samples. Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to
evaluate the accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether
the method detection limits can be obtained. If acceptable accuracy
and method detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be
located and corrected before further samples are analyzed. Add
these results to the on-going control charts to document data
quality.
10.6 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
analyzed. The results of these analyses will help define
contamination resulting from field sampling and transportation
activities. An acceptable FRB may replace the LRB.
46
-------
10.7 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory
measurements. Add these results to the on-going control charts to
document data quality.
10.8 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
and correct the problem source.
10.9 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is
used with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and ground
water. Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
(LFM) is not required. It is recommended that sample matrix effects
be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in 10.8.
10.10 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into other
parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to
potential problems.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 INITIAL CONDITIONS
11.1.1 Recommended chromatographic conditions are summarized in
Sect. 6.3. Other columns or element specific detectors may
be used if the requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.
11.1.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.2.
11.1.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to
40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device and
open the syringe valve on the purging device.
11.2 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING
11.2.1 To generate accurate data, samples and calibration standards
must be analyzed under identical conditions. Remove the
plungers from two 5-mL syringes and attach a closed syringe
valve to each. Warm the sample to room temperature, open the
sample (or standard) bottle, and carefully pour the sample
into one of the syringe barrels to just short of overflowing.
Replace the syringe plunger, invert the syringe, and compress
the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air
while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Add 10 /iL of
the internal calibration standard to the sample through the
syringe valve. Close the valve. Fill the second syringe in
an identical manner from the same sample bottle. Reserve
this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.
11.2.2 Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the
purging device. Be sure that the trap is cooler than 25°C,
47
-------
then open the sample syringe valve and inject the sample into
the purging chamber. Close both valves and initiate purging.
Purge the sample for 11.0 ± 0.1 min at ambient temperature.
11.3 SAMPLE DESORPTION - After the 11-min purge, couple the trap to the
chromatograph by switching the purge and trap system to the desorb
mode, initiate the temperature program sequence of the gas
chromatograph and start data acquisition. Introduce the trapped
materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180°C
while backflushing the trap with an appropriate inert gas flow for
4.0 ± 0.1 min. While the extracted sample is being introduced into
the gas chromatograph, empty the purging device using the sample
syringe and wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.
11.4 TRAP RECONDITIONING - After desorbing the sample for four min,
recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
purge mode. Maintain the trap temperature at 180°C. After
approximately seven min, turn off the trap heater and open the
syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap
is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Identify each analyte in the sample chromatogram by comparing the
retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated by
the calibration standards, the LFB and other fortified quality
control samples. If the retention time of the suspect peak agrees
within ± 3 standard deviations of the retention times of those
generated by known standards (Table 1 and 3) then the identification
may be considered as positive. If the suspect peak falls outside
this range or coelutes with other compounds (Table 1 and 3), then
the sample should be reanalyzed. When applicable, determine the
relative response of the alternate detector to the analyte. The
relative response should agree to within 20% of the relative
response determined from standards.
12.2 Xylenes and other structural isomers can be explicitly identified
only if they have sufficiently different GC retention times.
Acceptable resolution is achieved if the height of the valley
between two isomer peaks is less than 25% of the sum of the two peak
heights. Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric
pairs.
12.3 When both detectors respond to an analyte, quantitation is usually
performed on the detector which exhibits the greater response.
However, in cases where greater specificity or precision would
result, the analyst may choose the alternate detector.
12.4 Determine the concentration of the unknowns by using the calibration
curve or by comparing the peak height or area of the unknowns to the
peak height or area of the standards as follows:
48
-------
Concentration of unknown (fig/I) = (Peak height sample/Peak height
standard) x Concentration of standard
12.5 Calculations should utilize all available digits of precision, but
final reported concentrations should be rounded to an appropriate
number of significant figures(one digit of uncertainty). Experience
indicates that three significant figures may be used for
concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
concentrations between 1 to 99 jtg/L, and 1 significant figure for
lower concentrations.
12.6 Calculate the total trihalomethane concentrations by summing the
four individual trihalomethane concentrations in M9/L.
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 This method was tested in a single laboratory using reagent water
fortified at 10 /jg/L (1). Single laboratory precision and accuracy
data for each detector are presented for the methpd analytes in
Tables 2 and 4.
13.2 Method detection limits for these analytes have been calculated from
data collected by fortifying reagent water at 0.1 /wj/L.(l). These
data are presented in Tables 2 and 4.
14. REFERENCES
1. Ho, J.S., A Sequential Analysis for Volatile Organics in Water by
Purge and Trap Capillary Column Gas Chromatograph with Photoionization
and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors in Series, Journal of
Chromatographic Science 27(2) 91-98, February 1989.
2. Kingsley, B.A., Gin, C., Coulson, D.M., and Thomas, R.F., Gas
Chromatographic Analysis of Purgeable Halocarbon and Aromatic
Compounds in Drinking Water Using Two Detectors in Series, Water
Chlorination, Environmental Impact and Health Effects, Volume 4, Ann
Arbor Science.
3. Bellar, T.A., and J.J. Lichtenberg. The Determination of Halogenated
Chemicals in Water by the Purge and Trap Method, Method 502.1, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support
Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April, 1981.
4. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, Environ. Sci . Techno!., 15, 1426,
1981.
5. Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens, Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
49
-------
6.
7.
8.
9:
OSHA Safety and Health Standards, (29 CFR 1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories, American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4th Edition, 1985.
Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg, The Determination of Synthetic
Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
Column Gas Chromatography, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio,
45268.
Slater, R.W., Graves, R.L. and McKee, G.D., "A Comparison of
Preservation Techniques for Volatile Organic Compounds in Chlorinated
Tap Waters," U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
50
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
ON PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR (PID) AND ELECTROLYTIC
CONDUCTIVITY DETECTOR (ELCD) FOR COLUMN 1
Ana1vte(b)
Retention Time (min)a
PID ELCD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
Bromomethan
Chloroethane
Tri chl orofl uoromethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
Methyl ene Chloride
trans-l,2-Dichldroethene
1,1-Di chloroethane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
ci s- 1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
Bromochl oromethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1-Di chl oropropene
Carbon Tetrachloride
Benzene
1,2-Dichloroethane
Tri chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Dibromomethane
Ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Toluene
Trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
1,1, 2-Tr i chl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
Di bromochl oromethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Chlorobenzene
Ethyl benzene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
o-Xylene
Styrene
I sopropyl benzene
Bromoform
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
n-Propyl benzene
-(c)
9.88
-
-
_
6.14
-
19.30
-
-
23.11
-
-
-
25.21
-
26.10
-
27.99
-
-
-
31.38
31.95
33.01
-
33.88
-
-
-
36.56
36.72
-
36.98
36.98
38.39
38.57
39.58
-
-
-
40.87
8.47
9.47
9.93
11.95
12.37
13.49
16.18
18.39
19.33
20.99
22.88
23.14
23.64
24.16
24.77
25.24
25.47
-
26.27
28.02
28.66
29.43
29.59
31.41
• -
33.04
33.21
33.90
34.00
34.73
35.34
36.59
-
36.80
-
-
-
-
-
39.75
40.35
40.81
-
51
-------
TABLE 1 (CONTINUED)
Ana1vte(b)
Internal Standards
Fluorobenzene
2-Bromo-l-chloropropaned
Retention Time (min)a
PIP ELCD
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Bromobenzene
1,3, 5-Tri methyl benzene
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
tert-Butyl benzene
1,2, 4-Tr i methyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
p-Isopropyl to! uene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
n-Butyl benzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-Chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Naphthalene
1,2, 3-Tri chl orobenzene
40.99
41.41
41.41
41.60
42.71
42.92
43.31
43.81
44.08
44.43
45.20
45.71
-
51.43
51.92
52.38
53.34
41.03
-
41.45
41.63
-
-
-
44.11
44.47
-
45.74
48.57
51.46
51.96
-
53.37
26.84
33.08
a. Column and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.3.
b. Number refers to peaks in Figure 502.2-1.
c. - Dash indicates detector does not respond.
d. Interferes with trans-l,3-dichloropropene and
1,1,2-trichloroethane on the column. Use with care.
52
-------
•o s-
•r- (U
•o o
0) 0)
0:0
SSSvo-H So^SSSSo coco CMS oSSSSSoooSo
1 ddd^-J ' ' ' dddddddwddoldddddddddddd
^OWCMOO
csicooivocn
,
' co co co cO w CM co 3 co CM «> -H * CM «> in ro CM a
i- o a
i Cn O Cn III
CM CM VO •-«
OO O O
• CM
o o
ir> cvi i—i
poo
«« , , , ,^r- -r- • • -22 • • • '5dd • • '^-- •
CO .
(O O
o o
CM
o o o o
^- r- po o
i • • • i •
««r CM CM 1-1
zo
• CM in
o o o
:oo
i i i
a o
i i i i
*-« IO i—I
• • •
CM r-t CM
I I I
O) S- •
en o>.
cr> en
en en i i
. 01
I O <
CO O
i ty\ t o
O i—i
I II
CM"* CO
i o o o i
CM
oo co
i o • en i
i—i z:
I I
a>
C .
OO
0)0 C N C U
O) E S- Q)CUCCU«S
COO C N 0) JO &-
O) S- r- W C -Q i— 4J
IM o-c s jc a> r— >» a>
SJE-" otui—••-> s
^O-O4-E>>3CQ C
O O O O O 4-> CQ I O
EEEEE3l-i->-Q
OOOOOOQOt-S-
J_ S- S- S- S- I 0> +^ O
i—I i—I O 4-» i—I •—I CM
53
-------
13
•r—
O
=1
•O
O
°
^£
4->
r—
0
S-
*4^
O
Ci)
Cu
»••»
s
i
M C
fc" 0
•Z* *r"
Si «
•r~
* O
CM T-
LU 4J
eg j=
M3C Pun
S-
4J
O
g>
4->
O>
O
C5
•*->
CO
4>>
Q
_l
o
• C
13 0
OO +*
r-I*>
CU CU
ceo
>,
cu s-
o> cu
s- o
cu o
> cu
*t OS
_l
3E
* e
•o o
•f<>3 •p*
"*
r— >
O CD
C£O
>l
O) O>
2 0
o u
> CD
*3C O£
*^*
^,
••
•M
**_«
4^*1
^^
^+
•"••n.
c
^
SM>
1^"*
"*x
•M
§
^M
t**
•>~
_J
o
a
V*
cu
>
^~
c
«£
CM CM CM i— l 1-4 ^- CO CO CO • i— 1 CO
o o o ooo 000000*1-
o o o ooo ooozooo
co co en cooom t-4 t-i co *o vo in co
CO 00 CM CM (O CM CO CM CO in CO CO CM
co oo »^ en en i~- oo CM «*• en 10 vo en
oicni i en i i icncncnicnooocncncn
•—• i— 1 f— 4 t— 1
CM t—i 10 in i— i 10 •— 1 1— i in i— < « CM CM
o o Q o o ooo oooo o
O O O O O OOO OO3EO O
00
in •* in en «*• CMOCO oo oo oo CM r*~
co t— i en o CM «o CM r~4 i-i o r-H CM o
co T-I en co oo CM co «ef i-icntoi* o
oocncncnioooi loenooi 101 i
"—< i"-4 f— 1 t— < r— 1 f— « r- 1 «—t <— 1
CU CU
C C
(O 03
jc jc eo eo cu eu
+J 4-> C C CO CO CC
eoeu co co c c 03 03
CO CO OO N rsl 03 03 J= CX
C C CU CU S- S- C CJ=J= 4-> O
CO CU C"O O O CO CO CO •*->-»-> O) S-
O- •r-eUeUT- r— r— C J3 JD CO CO E CL
0 -OCCtS- CO JCJCCO O O O O CO O O
Q. 4->NOr— CO OS 03 4-> OOOOCUOO
0 CU =3 C 4-> J= N S-S-CU r—i—r— r-JC Sr—
OCUOJQ>> CCU CO CO &- O O O O CO <4- O
r—ISIS-r— Q. CO CO JD 1— 1— O .r-.r-.r-.i-OO"!-
JCCO>)Oer— i— | I r— S_ J_ i_ S- S- S- S-
O COr— O.S- CO 03 >>COCMCMJC CUh- I— 1— h- O OH-
r~ -O JC O Q-r— JC O. C *• " O C 1 1 I 1 r— r— 1
O r— O J- O >>•!-» O CUf-4CM 03 CUCO^i-HCMJCJCCO
I «^^ (9 CL VJ «CT ^C ^B ^M •* •* ^_ ^3 »*»»•»•* ^J ^J **
i-4 JC X 0 »-« 4-> C3.Q. >>i-l r-i4Jr-CMCMr-4r-4.r-.r- CM
-4-> CO V) 1 CO 03 I 4J ». ^ CO O » « ^ ^ S- i- »
r-4 LU Or •-< O.SI "Z. C)r-*• en
m o •— j o
en en o en
o en o en
1—4 t— 4
•r-
S-
0
JC CO CO CO
u e c c
cu co eo
^_ ^^ ^^ ^^ ,
•r- 1 1 1
> 0 E Q.
cu
'S.'oS
5 *
V) CO
c c
CU-r-
eu >>
C/) ***>
E TD •
O CO O
^" "r— d*
gg
•o C s-
CO CO O
.r- eu
ET3 CU
eu cu cu
4-> S- N
Q) Ol C
•g
CU •* 0
% SH 3
eu r—
CO > Ll_
c o
O O "
•r_ cu CU
4-> ce s-
03 Q>
*> eu
eu 4-> v>
*X3 n5 03
S- C "O
03 03 C
"O 03
C JC 4->
03 U M
4"^ O3
CO COi—
03
0>«4_ C
> O S-
•r- CO
4-> — 1 +J
03^ — . e
r— C7>>— l
2* .
OT3
•O r-4 O
C JC
03 4-> 4->
03 CU
2-n E
d) A?
Z.^-2
CO M- 03
>-r- T3
O 4-> C
0 S- 03
CO 0 4J
o: u- co
03
O
O
__1
LU
S-
o
(4-
CO
C
03
O.
O
s.
Q.
O
O
o
r— 4
O
1
CO
1
CM
•
•o
o
0.
CO
CO
s-
4->
o
CO
cu
o
o
4J
u
CO
cu
o
JD
V
Jfj
1
^
•
"O
cu
c
•r—
i_
cu
4->
cu
•o
4->
o
c
It
*
a
•
u
54
-------
TABLE 3. RETENTION TIMES FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS ON
PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR (PID) AND ELECTROLYTIC
CONDUCTIVITY DETECTOR(ELCD) FOR COLUMN 2
Retention Time (min)a
and Rel. Std. Dev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
. 31
32
33
• 34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Anal vteb
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
BromomethanE
Chloroethane
Tri chl orofl uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
Methyl ene Chloride
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1,1-01 chloroethane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
Bromochl oromethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Carbon Tetrachloride
1,2-Dichloroethane
Benzene
Tri chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Dibromomethane
Ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Toluene
Trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
1 , 1 , 2-Tri chl oroethane
1, 3-Di chl oropropane
Tetrachl oroethene
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromoethane
Chlorobenzene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Ethyl benzene
m-Xylene
p-Xylene
o-Xylene
Styrene
I sopropyl benzene
Bromoform
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
n-Propyl benzene
Bromobenzene
PID
-(c)
8.57
-
-
-
14.46
-
17.61
-
-
21.52
-
_
-
24.07
_
-
25.06
27.99
-
-
-
30.40
31.58
32.11
-
-
33.85
-
-
36.76
36.92
37.19
37.19
38.77
38.90
40.04
-
-
-
41.51
41.73
RSD
0.06
0.08
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
ELCD
7.36
8.09
8.58
10.39
10.74
11.85
14.47
16.46
17.62
19.25
21.36
21.52
22.08
22.69
23.53
24.08
24.47
24.95
_
27.15
27.73
28.57
28.79
30.41
-
32.13
32.69
33.57
33.86
34.58
35.29
36.87
36.87
-
-
-
-
.
-
40.19
40.64
41.18
-
41.75
RSD
0.06
0.06
0.08
0.06
0.05
0.07
0.07
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.01
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
55
-------
TABLE 3 (CONTINUED)
Analvte1
PIP
Retention Time (min)£
and Rel. Std. Dev.
BSD ELCD
45 1, 3, 5-Tri methyl benzene
46 2-Chlorotoluene
47 4-Chlorotoluene
48 tert-Butyl benzene
49 1, 2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
50 sec-Butyl benzene
51 p- I sopropyl toluene
52 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
53 1,4-Dichlorobenzene
54 n-Butyl benzene
55 1,2-Dichlorobenzene
56 l,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane
57 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
58 Hexachlorobutadiene
59 Naphthalene
60 1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
Internal Standards
42.08
42.20
42.36
43.40
43.55
44.19
44.69
45.08
45.48
46.22
46.88
53.26
53.86
54.45
55.54
l-Chloro-2-Fluorobenzene 37.55
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
-
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
42.21
42.36
_
_
_
_
45.09
45.48
46.89
49.84
53.26
53.87
55.54
37.56
•*+"*
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
a. Column and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.3.4.
b. Number refers to peaks in Figure 502.2-2.
c. - Dash indicates detector does not respond.
56
-------
CM
O —I
Ul O
0°.
U
•o
c o
o +->
O . o •<*• r«» «* en co co * m m co CM •
.-H O--I O I-H O O «-i O t-< O O CMO t-i .-I O O O CMO O O O O O O O
oooo o
I I I
ozoooooooooooooooooooo;
•o o
+J T-
CO •** :
eo;
•-^ >
(DO)
o: Q
CO S- —
O> CO
CM in IO O «*• •* CM CM CM CO CO CO CM O CO tn O CM CM CM CO CO CO CO lf> 00 CO CM
I Ill .......................
S- O D
CD O ~~
> 0)^-
_>UVtOCOI^
•—en en en en en i i
en Cn O) Cn O) Cn Cn en
O) Cn Cn en CIS Cn CO
(• CO CO IO CM CO CM CO CM PO O CO CO
_,0 O 0000 00 000 i-«00
o ol * • i i i i • • • i >iii >.iiii >..iii ...iii
S3 o o ooo o oo ooo ooo
CO
>-i Z
O i-4
UI
01 V>
OL O
II
3 O
U
O O
•o o
4J-I-
c
o
•fM
•!->
to s-
N O
"c "o
O CD
O
JC
a.
(X) -)->
« *~
* 'P** ^C
I— > —
a> a>
a: o
>>
o> a> — i
s- o c
a> o a
IO l-H
• « i
f— 1 r-H
r^ oo i
en en
««!• •— < i— '
III . . .
CM CM CM
1 1 1 IT) (O CO
en en en
f—I VO ^f '
III ••III! •
CO i—I r—t '
CM r*. oo
iii •••ill
CM i-l i-H
co i co i i i «*> i»o i i i i i-» i-» IN. r i icncncni i i
^> en en en en en
O _J
00 t-H
55
LU O
>-i O
CO U.
a>
a>
a>
c
a>
N
C
+->
a>
£
o
s-
o
0)
> i
fa
c JD o
r— to
JC S JC
O C -4-5 .
i- O CO i
i <«- £
i O O
O)
Q)
•o
•r-
CO S.
CO C O
C CO i—
CO N J=
N C (J
C CO tO
O) JD S-
JD r— 4->
r— >> 0>
>>4-> +•>
• •!-> 3
t 3 CO C
'CO I O
CO
CO
o o
s- s-
CO CO
i- i.
CO CO
o> Q> *o
> 4J O
CO
C CO
CO C
N 10
C JC
CO -M
JD CO '
22
o o
r— r™- i
J= JC ,
<_) O
C C
0> CO
3 3
i— r—
O O
+-> 4->
O O
S- i-
o o
O O
I I
CM ^-
O)
(O
Q.
O
Q.
O CO
S. C
o to co
r—JC C
JC 4J rt>
U CO JC
0)
CO
I
O CD
S- O
§0 E
r— O
O JC S.
i. O JD
JD O-i-
O O I
I S- CM
CM JD -
0)
O)
N
CO CO
C JD
O
CO r—
O U
E "r™
OO
S. I
JD CM
0> 0) 4->
C C CO
CO CO E
N N O
Q) CO
O O
O O
JC JC
U U
'•r— "f™
O O
I I
CO ?*•
0)
CO CO
C JC
CO 4->
JC CO
o> co eo -t-> o
C CO i-
Ci> O O
JC S-!—
+J O JC
Or— O
O JC-r-
i. O O
O T- I
i— O CM
o to to
S- JC JC
O 4-> 4J
3 0) CO
i— O O
t4- S- S-
-r- O O
Q »—t T—« I—I
O J= JC
S- O O
|oo
U r-H CM
O »—i i—«
O CM i—I
I
to
I I C
CO nj
•r- S_
CO CO CO
c c c
O9 fO A3
O. O. O.
ooo
s- s- s-
o. o. o.
ooo
S- i- S-
o o o
JC JC JC
U U U
i—i co O O O
CM CO CM
•—I I-H CM
57
-------
(O
__
<^^H
F9
g
»-«
O
o
*M*
«*•
^JT
l&J
•
<••!
CO
g
£>
•/•"
•r"
^^
o
s
•a
§
o
u
•r*
id
"o
S.
•*•*
U
V
r—
UJ
t=
0
*r~
4->
m
N
•r-
r*
O
•I—
o
o
JC
CX,
J-
0
•«->
s
4->
ft\
0
S-
o
4-i
U
•!->
O>
O
_J
£
• c
•o o
frt
•V
r^*>
0) O)
cca
>,
0) S-
cna>
2 0
Q) CJ
a> a>
aid
>*
a> s-
cn Q)
2 0
0) O
< €
2!,
_j
2
"^
2
8
x~»
_j
o
S3
0)
•|j>
^
^~
tO
c
CM CO
O O
O O
tO O
CM CM
i-» co
in to
o o
o o
F-l tO
CM •— 1
to co
en en
Q)
C
0)
CX
a> o
c s_
(U CX
CX O
o s-
s- o
CXr—
O JC
S- U
O-i-
r— Q
JC 1
O CO
•r— •*
Q r-t
I I
i—> V>
•»«r—
f—1 (_>
O in i-H >CMCM tOOOi— l^tO^-CM
•-i O O OOO O O O O O CO O
o o o zoo o o o o o o o
<• co f-< CM oo en co m to to CM o o
i-H CM CO CM CM •— 1 CM CM CM i-H •— 1 tO CM
§co o r>« co to to en co r^. o
i i i en c3 en i en CM en en en CM CD
Cn CM i-H > r~i . i— 4
tO^-CMCMCM CM COO •* CM in tO CO
OOOOO O O fH OOOO O
OOQOO 000 0,000 0
r-. CM «o ^- o r-i co en to co co o r—
I— 1 I— 1 CM i— 1 CM CM i— 1 i— 1 •— ll-HCSJCO i-H
otoOLor**io lor-^io r^oomx^ r^
O% O) O) O) O) 1 O) O> O> 1 1 O) O^ O> O) 1 I 0) 1 1
O) 0) Q>
c c c
O fltf <0
ex jc jc a> a> a>o>
o -»j>-4-> C c: a> O
s- a> c -o ooa> a) +j a) s_
O -i— O) O) -i— r— r— C jQj3a> E CX
r— •OC3S- O) JCJCO) O O O O OJ O O
jc a oil— o c o o j= &_ &. s- s- c i- s-
O *4J* M O ^~ 0) ttS nS 4J> O O O O C) O O
•|-0>=JC4->JC N S-S-O) i— i— r— r— JC 3 i—
OCJQCUr— OOJC 4->4->O JC JC JC JC +J i— JC
i a> o jo >i ca> a>a>s- o o o o »OCr— r- I 1 r— S-S.S.&.S.L.S.
•— I 0>r— CXI. (1) CO >>0)CMCMJC O) 1— H- J— h— O O 1—
1 JO JC O CXr— JCCXC «-»UC:i 1 1 1 i— i— 1
VI i— U t- O >>••-> O OJf-HCM rt OCO'S-rHCMJCjCCO
c>>(acxbojcjcs.s- - »&.=> - - « »uo »
« JC X O •— i •»-» CXCi. >>i-H i— i+Jr— CMCMt-H»— l-r-'r-CM
v- 4-> a> «/> i a> « i .+-> >«a)o «««.>t-s- »
1— UJ Z >-H CX3E Z CC^i-H^Hh- t— ^Hf-Hi-Hf-iJ— r-r-i
1
CM
o
o
o
CM
s
0)
c
Oi
N
c
0)
JO
^~
^.
^
*i
O)
E
1—
1
•a-
CM
I-H
w— »
1*111
_* III
1. 1 1 1
• 1 1 1
CM
i en i i i
CO i-l CM CM CM
OOOOO
OOOOO
ID I-H I-H r-HJ CM
i-H I-H rH I-H O
co m co co oo
en en en en en
0)
c
0)
N
C
a>
r"~
>^ Q)
jC *O
4J -i-
Q) t-
E O
>— 0 C C C
i a» a> a>
U> p— r— i— r—
•« 2>- ^k ^^ ^^
co e x >< x
*••- i i i
fH» 0 E CX
•o
a>
•r—
-U
,0
>
0)
§"
(/*
V?
c
a>
V)
^
2
<4-
•o
a>
c:
0)
•o
o
s_
0)
CO
C
•r-
t$
•fW
^
•^*
>^>
(O
"a!
s-
•o
c
CO
O)
•rw
s-
Q^
>
o
U
QM
•
(0
•
•§
.f
O
E
•o
s-
.j^J
0)
•o
G)
(U
X
CX)
a>
•r-
S.
O
U
O)
Q£
*
Oi
>,
tit
C
(O
JC
U
0)
•
•o
c
o
CX ••
co -a
01 0)
s- c
,^j c:
o s.:
C O)
M at
a> -a
0
•O •!->
o
s- c
o
+-> II
U
O) •
-M O
0) •
a z
» V
.0 U
58
-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
HAP
KM.
0. 0. EXIT
BIT X IN.
0.0.
14MM 0. 0.
Mint IN.
0.0.
; INLET
-•-LlAY SYRINGE VALVE
^-17CM. M GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
I. 0. 0. RUBBER S9TU1
1/11 IN. 0.0.
STAINLESS STEEL
10UM GLASS FUT
MEDIUM POROSITY
131 MOLECULAR
SIEVE PURGE
GAS FILTER
PURGE GAS
FLOW
CONTROL
FIGURE 1. PURGING DEVICE
59
-------
PAOQNG PHOCSXItt
CONSTRUCTION
7A/POOT
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
0.
STAINLESS STEEL
FIGURE 2. TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
OESORB CAPABILITY
60
-------
Pi
g
o
I
H
1
-------
8-
8-
8-
- »>*
I
o
I
1
6
I
O
-------
METHOD 503.1. VOLATILE AROMATIC AND UNSATURATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER
BY PURGE AND TRAP GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
Revision 2.0
T. A. Bellar - Method 503.1, Revision 1.0 (1986)
T. A. Bellar - Method 503.1, Revision 2.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
63
-------
METHOD 503.1
VOLATILE AROMATIC AND UNSATURATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER
BY PURGE AND TRAP GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1
1.2
This method is applicable for the determination of various volatile
aromatic and unsaturated compounds in finished drinking water, raw
source water, or drinking water in any treatment stage (1,2). The
following compounds can be determined by this method:
Analvte
Benzene
Bromobenzene
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Chlorobenzene
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
1,2-Di chlorobenzene
1,3-Di chlorobenzene
1,4-Di chlorobenzene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachlorobutadi ene
Isopropylbenzene
4-Isopropyltoluene
Naphthalene
n-Propylbenzene
Styrene
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1,2,3-Tr i chlorobenzene
1,2,4-Tri chlorobenzene
Trichloroethene
1,2,4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene
o-Xylene
m-Xylene
p-Xylene
Chemical Abstract Service
Registry Number
i-
1-43-2
108-86-1
104-51-8
135-98-8
98-06-6
108-90-7
95-49-8
106-43-4
95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
100-41-4
87-68-3
98-82-8
99-87-6
91-20-3
103-65-1
100-42-5
127-18-4
108-88-3
87-61-6
120-82-1
79-01-6
95-63-6
108-67-8
95-47-6
108-38-3
106-42-3
Single laboratory accuracy and precision data show that this
procedure is useful for the detection and measurement of
multi-component mixtures in finished water and raw source water at
concentrations between 0.05 and 0.5 #g/L. Individual aromatic
compounds can be measured at concentrations up to 1500 #g/L.
Determination of complex mixtures containing partially resolved
64
-------
compounds may be hampered by concentration differences larger than a
factor of 10.
1.3 This method is recommended for use only by analysts experienced in
the measurement of purgeable organics at the low /xg/L level or by
experienced technicians under the close supervision of a qualified
analyst.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Highly volatile organic compounds with low water solubility are
extracted (purged) from a 5-mL sample by bubbling an inert gas
through the aqueous sample. Purged sample components are trapped in
a tube containing a suitable sorbent material. When purging is
complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with an inert
gas to desorb trapped sample components onto a gas chromatography
(GC) column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to
separate the method analytes which are then detected with a
photoionization detector.
2.2 A second chromatographic column is described that can be used to
help confirm GC identifications or resolve coeluting compounds.
Analyses may be performed by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry
(GC/MS) according to Method 524.1 or Method 524.2.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes that are components of the same solution. The internal
standard must be an analyte that is not a sample component.
3.2 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.3 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) -- Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.4 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents and internal standards that are used
with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if method analytes
or other interferences are present in the laboratory environment,
the reagents, or the apparatus.
65
-------
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservationand all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of one or
more compounds used to evaluate the performance of the instrument
system with respect to a defined set of method criteria.
Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) -- An aliquot of an -
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the .analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
Stock standard solution --. A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.10 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.11 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.12 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is generated from a source of reagents different
than those used to prepare the primary dilution standards and the
calibration standard and is used to check laboratory performance.
3.9
66
-------
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
sorbent trap. The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
components in the purging device should be avoided since such
materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in
the trap during the purge operation. Analyses of laboratory reagent
blanks (Sect. 10.4) provide information about the presence of
contaminants. When potential interfering peaks are noted in
laboratory reagent blanks, the analyst should change the purge gas
source and regenerate the molecular sieve purge gas filter.
Subtracting blank values from sample results is not permitted.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
organic compounds. A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
reagent water. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.
4.3 Water will cause a broad negative baseline deflection in the
retention area of Benzene. The method provides for a dry purge
period to prevent this problem.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method has
not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
this method. Additional references to laboratory safety are
available (3-5) for the information of the analyst.
5.2 The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene,
1,4-dichlorobenzene, hexachlorobutadiene, tetrachloroethene, and
trichloroethene. Pure standard materials and stock standard
solutions of these compounds should be handled in a hood. A
NIOSH/MESA approved respirator should be worn when the analyst
handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075
or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
(Pierce #12722 or equivalent). Prior to use, wash vials and septa
67
-------
with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water. Allow the
vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C
oven for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to
be free of organic solvent vapors.
6.2 PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM - The purge and trap system consists of three
separate pieces of equipment: purging device, trap, and desorber.
Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet
all of the following specifications.
6.2.1 The all glass purging device (Figure 1) must be designed to
accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
Gaseous volumes above the sample must be kept to a minimum
(<15 ml) to eliminate dead volume effects. A glass frit
should be installed at the base of the sample chamber so the
purge gas passes through the water column as finely divided
bubbles with a diameter of <3 mm at the origin. Needle
spargers may be used, however, the purge gas must be
introduced at a point $5 mm from the base of the water
column. ,
6.2.2 The trap (Figure 2) must be at least 25'cm long and have an
inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. It is recommended that
1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing be added at the
inlet end to prolong the life of the trap. Add a sufficient
amount of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer to fill the trap.
Before initial use, the trap should be conditioned overnight
at 180°C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least
20 mL/min. Vent the trap effluent to the room, not to the
analytical column. Prior to daily use, the trap should be
conditioned for 10 minutes at 180°C with backflushing. The
trap may be vented to the analytical column during daily
conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
temperature program prior to analysis of samples.
6.2.3 The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable;6f'ra>i'dTy heating
the trap to 180°C. the trap should not be heated higher than
200°C or the life expectancy of the trap will decrease. Trap
failure is characterized by a pressure drop in excess of 3
pounds per square inch across the trap during purging.
6.3 GAS CHROMATQGRAPHY SYSTEM
6.3.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
throughout desorption and the temperature*program.
6.3.2 Two gas chromatography columns are recommended. Column 1
(Sect. 6.3.3) is a highly efficient column that provides
outstanding separations for a wide variety of organic
compounds. Column 1 should be used as the primary analytical
68
-------
column unless routinely occurring analytes are not adequately
/resolved. Column 2 (Sect. 6.3.4) is recommended for use as
an alternate column. Retention times for the listed analytes
on the two columns are presented in Table 1.
633 Column 1 - 1.5 to 2.5 m x 0.085 in ID #304 stainless steel or
' ' •* • glass, packed with 5% SP-1200 and 1.75% Bentone 34 on
Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. The flow rate of
the helium carrier gas must be established at 30 mL/min.
With this column, modification to the column ID and carrier
qas flow rate will adversely, affect resolution. The column
temperature is held at 50°C for 2 min,then programmed at
. - - 3°C/min to 110°C and held at 110°C until all compounds have
eluted. When not in use, maintain the column at 110 C.
Condition new SP-1200/Bentone columns with carrier gas flow
at 120°C for several days before connecting to the detector.
A sample chromatogram obtained with Column 1 is presented in
. . • Figure 3.
,6.3.4 Column 2 - 1.5 to 2.5 m long x 0.085 in ID #304 stainless
steel or glass, packed with 5% l,2,3-tris(2-cyanoethoxy)
propane on Chromosorb W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent,. The flow
rate of the helium carrier gas must be established at 30
mL/min. The column temperature is programmed to hold at 40 C
for 2 min, increase to 100°C at 2°C/min, and hold at 100 C
until all expected compounds have eluted. A sample
chromatogram obtained with Column 2 is presented in Figure 4.
' i
6 3 5 A high temperature photoionization detector equipped with a
10.2 eV (nominal) lamp is required (HNU Systems, Inc., Model
PI-51-02 or equivalent). Departures from the required flow
rate of 30 mL/min will adversely effect method detection
limits or precision.
6.4 SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES ,
6.4.1 Two 5-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip.
6,4.2, Three 2-way syringe valves .with Luer ends.
6 43 One 25-/JL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).
6.4.4 Micro syringes - 10, 100 /iL.
6.5 MISCELLANEOUS.
6.5.1 Standardsolution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
PTFE-lined screw caps.
69
-------
7. REAGENT AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 TRAP PACKING MATERIALS
7.1.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).
7.1.2 Methyl silicone packing - OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb-W, 60/80
mesh or equivalent.
7.2 COLUMN PACKING MATERIALS
7.2.1 5% SP-1200/1.75% Bentone 34 on 100/120 mesh Supelcoport or
equivalent.
7.2.2 5% l,2,3-tris(2-cyanoethoxy) propane on 60/80 mesh Chromosorb
W or equivalent.
7.3 REAGENTS
7.3.1 Methanol - demonstrated to be free of analytes.
7.3.2 Reagent water demonstrated to be free of analytes - Prepare
reagent water by passing tap water through a filter bed
containing about 0.5 kg of activated carbon, by using a water
purification system, or by boiling distilled water for 15 min
followed by a 1-h purge with inert gas while the water
temperature is held at 90°C. Store in clean, narrow-mouth
bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw caps.
7.3.3 Ascorbic acid or sodium thiosulfate - ACS Reagent grade,
granular.
7.3.4 Hydrochloric acid (1+1) - Carefully add measured volume of
cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.
7.4 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
the following procedures:
7.4.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand,
unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
surfaces have dried. Weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
7.4.2 Using a 100-pL syringe, immediately add two or more drops of
reference standard to the flask. Be sure that the reference
standard falls directly into the alcohol without contacting
the neck of the flask.
7.4.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
flask several times. Calculate the concentration in
70
-------
micrograms per micro!iter from the net gain in weight. When
compound purity is certified at 96% or greater, the weight
can be used without correction to calculate the concentration
of the stock standard.
7.4.4 Store stock standard solutions at 4°C in 15-mL bottles
equipped with PTFE-lined screw caps. Methanol solutions are
stable for at least four weeks when stored at 4°C. Storage
times may be extended only if the analyst proves their
validity by analyzing quality control samples.
7..5 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS - Use standard stock solutions to prepare
primary dilution standard solutions that contain the analytes in
methanol. The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous
calibration solutions (Sect. 9.1) that will bracket the working
concentration range. Store the primary dilution standard solutions
with minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
calibration solutions from them. Storage times described for stock
standards also apply to primary dilution standard solutions.
7.6 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE - Prepare or obtain from a certified source a
methyl alcohol solution at a concentration of 1.00 /xg/mL for the
regulated volatile organic contaminants and the unregulated
contaminants of interest. It will be necessary to prepare more than
one solution and to increase the concentration of some of the
contaminants proportional to the instrument detection limits if all
of the analytes in Sect. 1.1 are being measured by this method. The
concentrate should be prepared from a source of stock standards
different than those used for Sect. 7.5.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION
8.1.1 Collect all samples in duplicate. If samples contain
residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
acid (or 3 mg sodium thiosulfate) to the sample bottle before
filling. Fill sample bottles to overflowing, but take care
not to flush out the rapidly dissolving ascorbic acid (or
sodium thiosulfate). No air bubbles should pass through the
sample as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in the sample
when the bottle is sealed. Adjust the pH of the duplicate
samples to <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1 HC1 for
each 20 mL of sample volume. Seal the sample bottles,
PFTE-face down, and shake vigorously for 1 min.
8.1.2 When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
71
-------
8.1.3
8.1.4
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.
When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.
The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
and maintained at that temperature until analysis. Field
samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
at the laboratory.
8.2 SAMPLE STORAGE
. 8.2.1 Store samples at 4°C until analysis. The sample storage area
must be free of organic solvent vapors.
8.2.2 Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection. Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
8.3 FIELD REAGENT BLANKS
8.3.1 Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
from the same general sample site at approximately the same
time. At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
filled sample bottles. Wherever a set of samples is shipped
and stored, it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.
8.3.2 Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
(or sodium thiosulfate) and HC1 to blanks (Sect. 8.1.1).
9. CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION
9.1 PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
9.1.1 Calibration standards containing mixtures of analytes that
are at least 80 percent resolved are prepared as needed. The
number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on the
resolution requirement and calibration range desired. A
minimum of three CAL solutions is required to calibrate a
range of a factor of 20 in concentration. For a factor of 50
use at least four standards, and for a factor of 100 at least
five standards. The lowest level calibration standard should
contain analytes at a concentration two to ten times the MDL
(Table 2) for that compound. The other CAL standards should
72
-------
contain each analyte of concern at concentrations that define
the range of the sample analyte concentrations.
9.1.2 To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot of
reagent water in a volumetric container. Use a microsyringe
and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard into the water.
Remove the needle as quickly as possible after injection.
Accurate calibration standards are prepared by adding 20 #L
of the primary dilution standard to 25 ml or more of reagent
water using the syringe described in Sect. 6.4.3. Aqueous
standards are not stable and should be discarded after one
hour unless preserved, sealed and stored as described in
Sect. 8.2.
9.2 CALIBRATION
9.2.1 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11 and tabulate
peak height or area response versus the concentration in the
standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of
response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant
over the working range (<10 % relative standard deviation),
linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average
ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a
calibration curve.
9.2.2 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of one or
more calibration standards. If the response for any analyte
varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve for that analyte or use a single point calibration
standard as described in Sect. 9.2.3.
9.2.3 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
primary dilution standards in methanol. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response close (<±20%) to that of the unknowns. Do not use
less than 20 /zL of the primary dilution standard to produce a
single point calibration standard in reagent water.
9.2.4 As a second alternative to a calibration curve, internal
standard calibration techniques may be used.
a,a,a-Trifluorotoluene is recommended as an internal standard
for this method. The internal standard is added to the
sample just before purging. Check the validity of the
internal standard calibration factors daily by analyzing a
calibration standard. Since the calculated concentrations
73
-------
9.3
can be strongly biased by inaccurate detector response
measurements for the internal standard or by coelution of an
unknown, it is required that the area measurement of the
internal standard for each sample be within ±3 standard
deviations of those obtained from calibration standards. If
they do not then internal standards can not be used.
INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of field
blanks, standards, duplicate samples, and the quality control
sample.
9.3.1 All of the peaks contained in the standard chromatograms must
be sharp and symmetrical. Peak tailing significantly in
excess of that shown in the method chromatograms (Figures 6
and 7) must be corrected. If only the compounds eluting
before ethyl benzene give random responses or unusually wide
peak widths, are poorly resolved, or are missing, the problem
is usually traceable to the trap/desorber. If negative peaks
appear early in the chromatogram, increase the dry purge time
to 5 min.
9.3.2 Check the precision between laboratory replicates. A
properly operating system should perform with a relative
standard deviation of less than 10%. Poor precision is
generally traceable to pneumatic leaks, especially around the
sample purger or to an improperly adjusted lamp intensity
power. Monitor the retention times for each method analyte
using data generated from calibration standards. If
individual retention times vary by more than 10% over an 8-h
period or do not fall within 10% of an established norm, the
source of retention data variance must be corrected before
acceptable data can be generated.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
blanks. The laboratory must maintain records to document the
quality of the data generated. Additional quality control practices
are recommended.
10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background. Before any samples
are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent
the determination of any analyte of concern. Sources of background
contamination are glassware, purge gas, sorbants, and equipment.
Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
before proceeding with the next section. In general background from
method analytes should be below the method detection limit.
74
-------
10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision. Analyze
four to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of 0.1-5
ug/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for guidance on
appropriate concentrations).
10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
quality control sample to reagent water. If a quality
control sample containing the method analytes is not
available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
standards may be used. Also add the appropriate amounts of
internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
of all replicates over a period of several days.
10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
procedures described in (8).
10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
RSD should be <20%. Some analytes, particularly the early
eluting gases and late elutjng higher molecular weight
compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
other analytes. The method detection limits must be
sufficient to detect analytes at the regulatory levels. If
these criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial
action and repeat the measurements for that analyte to
demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
analyzed.
10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
as a function of time. Charting of surrogate recoveries is
an especially valuable activity since these are present in
every sample and the analytical results will form a
significant record of data quality.
10.4 Laboratory reagent blanks. With each batch of samples processed as
a group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
determine the background system contamination.
10.5 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work shift,
analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3. If more
than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for every
75
-------
20 samples. Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to evaluate the
accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether the method
detection limits can be obtained. If acceptable accuracy and method
detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be located and
corrected before further samples are analyzed. Add these results to
the on-going control charts to document data quality.
10.6 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
analyzed. The results of these analyses will help define
contamination resulting from field sampling and transportation
activities. An acceptable FRB may replace the LRB.
10.7 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory
measurements. Add these results to the on-going control charts to
document data quality.
10.8 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
and correct the problem source.
10.9 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is
used with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and ground
water. Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
(LFM) is not required. It is recommended that sample matrix effects
be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in 10.8.
10,10 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into other
parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to
potential problems.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 INITIAL CONDITIONS
11.1.1 Recommended chromatographic conditions are summarized in
Sect. 6.3. Other packed or capillary (open tubular) columns
may be used if the requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.
11.1.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.2.
11.1.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40
mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device and open
the syringe valve on the purging device.
11.2 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING
11.2.1 To generate accurate data, samples and aqueous standards must
be analyzed under identical conditions. Remove the plungers
from two 5-mL syringes and attach a closed syringe valve to
each. Warm the sample to room temperature, open the sample
76
-------
(or standard) bottle, and carefully pour the sample into one
of the syringe barrels to just short of overflowing. Replace
the syringe plunger, invert the syringe, and compress the
sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air
while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 ml. If applicable,
add the internal calibration standard to the sample through
the syringe valve. Close the valve. Fill the second syringe
in an identical manner from the same sample bottle. Reserve
this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.
11.2.2 Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the
purging device. Open the sample syringe valve and inject the
sample into the purging chamber. Close both valves and
initiate purging. Purge the sample for 11.0 ±0.1 min at
ambient temperature.
11.3 TRAP DRY AND SAMPLE DESORPTION - After the 11-min purge, completely
dry the trap for at least 4 min by adjusting the purge and trap
system to the dry purge position or by temporarily replacing the
purge device with a clean, dry unit while maintaining purge gas flow.
Empty the purging device using the sample syringe and wash the
chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water. After the 4-min dry
purge, attach the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and
trap system to the desorb mode and initiate the temperature program
sequence of the gas chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials
to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180°C while back-
flushing the trap with an inert gas at 30 mL/min for 4.0 ± 0.1 min.
The transfer is complete after approximately four min.
11,4 TRAP RECONDITIONING - After desorbing the sample for four min,
recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
purge mode. Wait 15 s, then close the syringe valve on the purging
device to begin gas flow through the trap. Maintain the trap
temperature at 180°C. After approximately seven min, turn off the
trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through
the trap. When the trap is cool (< 30°C), the next sample can be
analyzed.
12. CALCULATIONS
. 12.1 Identify each analyte in the sample chromatogram by comparing the
retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated by
the calibration standards, the LFB and other fortified quality
control samples. If the retention time of the suspect peak agrees
within ±3 standard deviations of those generated by knowns then the
identification may be considered as positive. If the suspect peak
falls outside this range or coelutes with other compounds (Table 1),
then the sample should be reanalyzed according to Sect. 2.2.
12.2 Determine the concentration of the unknowns by using the calibration
curve or by comparing the peak height or area of the unknowns to the
peak height or area of the standards as follows:
Cone, of unknown (/jg/L) = (Peak height sample/Peak height std.) x
Cone, of standard. (
-------
12.3 Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
figures. Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
used for concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
concentrations between 1-99 /*g/L, and 1 significant figure for lower
concentrations.
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision for most
of the analytes added to Ohio River water and chlorinated drinking
water are presented in Table 2 (2).
13.2 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using drinking water
fortified with various method analytes at six concentrations between
2.2 and 600 jttg/L. Single operator precision, overall precision, and
method accuracy were found to be directly related to the
concentration of the analyte. Linear equations to describe these
relationships are presented in Table 3 (9).
13.3 Multilaboratory studies have been conducted by the Quality Assurance
Research Division of EMSL-Cincinnati to evaluate the performance of
various laboratories. Accuracy and precision data applicable to this
method for several purgeable aromatics in reagent water are presented
in Table 4 (10).
14. REFERENCES
1. Bellar, T.A. and J.J.Lichtenberg, The Analysis of Aromatic Chemicals
in Water by the Purge and Trap Method, Method 503.1, EPA 600/4-81-057,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April, 1981.
2. Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg, The Determination of Volatile
Aromatic Compounds in Drinking Water and Raw Source Water, unpublished
report, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 1982.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens, Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
OSHA Safety and Health Standards. (29 CFR 1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories, American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4rd Edition, 1985.
Slater, R.W., Graves, R.L. and McKee, G.D., "A Comparison of
Preservation Techniques for Volatile Organic Compounds in Chlorinated
Tap Waters," U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
78
-------
7. T. A. Bellar and J. J. Lichtenberg, The Determination of Synthetic
Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
Column Gas Chromatography, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
45268.
8. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, Environ. Sci. Technol., 15, 1426,
1981.
9. EPA Method Validation Study 24, Method 602 (Purgeable Aromatics), U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support
Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
10. Analytical Methods and Monitoring Issues Associated with Volatile
Organics in Drinking Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Office of Drinking Water, Washington, D.C., June 1984.
79
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Retention Time (min)
Analvte
Benzene
Trichloroethene
a,a,a-Trifluorotoluene(a)
Toluene
Tetrachl oroethene
Ethyl benzene
1-Chlorocyclohexene (b)
p-Xyl ene
Chlorobenzene
m-Xyl ene
o-Xyl ene
I sopropyl benzene
Styrene
1 , 4-Bromof 1 uorobenzene (b)
n-Propyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Bromobenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
4-Isopropyl to! uene
1 , 2 , 4-Tri methyl benzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
1 ,3-Di chl orobenzene
n-Butyl benzene
Cyclopropyl benzene (b)
2,3-Benzofuran (b)
1,2-Di chl orobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
Naphthalene
1 , 2 , 3-Tri chl orobenzene
Col 1
3.32
3.85
4.93
5.40
6.71
10.10
10.6
10.8
11.5
11.5
12.3
12.8
13.9
14.2
14.7
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.7
17.1
17.4
18.2
18.2
19.2
20.2
20.2
20.2
22.0
23.8
27.5
32.1
42.4
43.9
Col 2
2.75
2.37
2.80
4.25
2.80
6.25
5.75
6.72
8.02
6.27
8.58
7.58
11.5
12.3
8.63
9.92
11.4
13.5
9.92
10.2
11.4
12.5
16.3
15.0
12.8
24.3
19.4
16.9
25.6
38.3
30.3
(a) - Recommended internal standard (Sect. 8.1.6).
(b) » Not a method analyte.
80
-------
o
I— I
!•_•
lie
O Ul Z
1-4 _J 1— 1
«/» 1-1
*-n— v>
0 O
0.
•OCSC
>- o o
o u. o
2 oo o
=»l— 1-«
t^ 3C ^C
^C ^"* C3
^J Qg
>- o
oe z
^™ !•_! l^
«ff ^__. !__.
^2 ^_) ^c
o ui S
^C Ul I*"*
•— i C2 ^C
CO
Ul O Z
-JO =3
Z H- Q
I-IUJZ
(/) SC <
.
CM
Ul
mJ
CO
4^
H-
c
o
•O -i- 4-> •—
O •»->•>- —I
J= 0 £-.
"cu+j'Ij §
_E CU v.
c
CO -O O
> J-T-
•r- «O +J^-
nt C" ••— • N»-.
•O ^_, ™t~~ ^**
"oj •*-> o>
o: oo Q
^k
Q> S.
D)0>
t. o a^
CO O —
> CO
^^ _^
(/
S- CU
CU r—
J3 4- O
E^k ^
o c
3 (O
Z CO
1 C
CO •—
U +* CU "--
Cf^ *^ ^
*%* *^ ^1
o s- cu 3
<_> 4J _l —
^
>
n—
f^
c
CM (£>•«*• oo oo i •— i CM ^-i in co •<*• oo ICMCO ir-*«3-mvoi--coincMOoin
C7^ C71 C7I CT) P^ CO O) 00 Ot O^ OO CO CD OO t^« O% O) O> CO
t— I
coo»r>.f«~r».CT>CT> if~.oocj>cni^.C3i^. ivor>~ io»coobooo>coi~~oii~-ii~-«i>«
OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OO OOOOOOOOOOO
-j-in-t-^f*a-inin inminin^in^- m *&• m«3-mmmin«*-in«d-*d-«*-
OOOOOOO 1 O C3 O O C3 C3 O 1 OO 1 OOOOOOOOOC9O
"o"
<^"% *•*••* '
JD O) CU CU CO CO
— c c c c c
CO CO CU CU CU
CU CO CO CU CO NN-tNN
C CCCCO) C C i— C C
CU CO CUCUCU 0) C CU CO O) O CU CU
CUC X NINN -r- CO CU C JDJ3 +-> JD ^2
CCU COCUCUCCC -CCS CU CU OOCUOi — r—
CO CO N J=CCCUCUCU tO CU i— C J= S- S- C i- >> >>
CMCCOOa)COJ3-Q^ -UNO CU -»-> OOCUOJ=J=
CUCUCCUCi — 33OOOCUZ3C-1-J N CU i — i— JC 3 •*->•!->
CNCUJSCUUr— i— S-i-S-C-QCUF— CUC O JZX!-4->i — CO CO
CUC-Qi— NI>>OOOOOCUO-C>>>CCU S_ O O CU "4- E E
NCUr— >>CO4->-»->r — i— i — N S- r— QL CU JQ O *r- •.— O -i— -i— -i—
CXI >»•»-> CUOOO^=^=J=CO>>Oi— r— r— S-S-S-S-i-S-COCUCU
COCUi— -t->3^ii-i-S-U>CUJ=CU|— h-OI— t— 1— CCC
CJ3 >, =1 03 O O O O-i-"---J3J= O 0.^= CXCUCIIr— 1 1 ICUCOCU
CO 0 +-> CO 1 S_r— i— r— OQQi— OS-0-»->OCOe«CUCO-J-^=<3-J-mi— •— i—
IM E 3 i-»->oj=.c^: i i i >i>>•>>>
coca o s-i — tjt_><_>cMco'a-J= x o •— > Q.Q- >>4->i — CMCM-I- CSCMCOXXX
CU S- 1 CO CO ^= 1 1 1 ^^--t->CUooirO|4J.«S- •>•>•.) 1 1
coco c «/>.«->o— icM*d-i-n-n-iuj:E»-H*3-z coot— i— i-ii-Hi— e^-ii-n E o a.
•
5-
CU
+J
M
CU
0
s-
3
o
>
^
(O
s-
•o ?"
c
(O CM
^ o>
CU
ITS +->
& u
CU
D> 00
C»^ -M
^ ^
•^ "O
g* 5-
"Z -5
•o c
(O
CU +->
•o v>
_3 •
r— CU i—
c >, c
••-i— S-
(0 CU
•O C •!->
CU J= CU
+J TD
M CU C
CU E CO
U E
'£ rt o
-4-> •»-> O
fO O CO
a=:z c£.
H H U
^•^^^^^^•^k
(O J3 U
v^ >•—••»»•
81
-------
u_
i.
§S
< 5
is
-z
2g
1-4 _
o J5
Q;
§~
>1
o5
a"
G£ y
t
II
^P |jj
^ —1
*J P
cs 5
5 o
c/> ^
CO
Ul
CO
=jz: o
u u
O CO O)
c
r— O
nS co
^ *p»
0) U
> 0)
Oe
>•
Q.
CO
(O O
C •!-
O
i— CO
C Q>
«/>
O)
^,
^«
(fl
c
in CM *a- I-H to I-H r-.
00 i-l ««»• CM CM Tt- r-l
0000000
o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o
r-« to oo co en oo to
r-l CO CM CO CO tO r-l
i— < O O O O O O
"*"
X X XX X X X
CM to co tn in o I-H
CM r-l r-< r-l r-4 CM CM
O O O O 0 0 0
tO CM CM CO O» 00 00
O i— 1 •* CO CO r- 1 r- 1
o o o o o o o
1 ++++++
X X X X X X X
r— 1 O O CO CT O O
r-H i— 1 I— 1 O O i— 1 t— 1
O O O 0 0 0 0
0) 0) 0)
c c c
0)0)0)
N N Nl
C C C
O) O) O)
o> .a .0 .a
C 0 O 0 0)
O» S- S- J- C
N O O O (U
C r— i— r— N
0) -C -C JC C
o) -o u o o o> a>
C O T- «r- «i— JD C
cu s- a o o r— a>
N O 1 1 1 >> =3
C I — CM CO ^- .C r—
a> jc « « »4-> o
CQ O r-i i— I i— 1 UJ h-
I
{=
o
4-*
's- '
£=
0)
u
0
^^ o
— . a>
O-C
=».•<-»
S-
>> 0
$-<*-
Q)
> O)
O =3
Q) n3
s- >
C O)
(O 3
0) S-
H II
X 0
82
-------
11
n
ui p
|i
i|
|i
si
go
5
g^i
1-4
;!
is
^
UI
1
0) i-*
cn a)
s. o &e
0) o x_
> O)
0) "O O
£&'£**
*J "O .—
CO O) C C —I
o»s- a> o --
tO Z3 U M— C
S- > C 4J 53
Q) lO O f0 ^*
> 0)0 S-
(O
fl
o £
c
J3 S-
15
Z rt
1 C
CO *~
CO-r-i— —I
C (0 > C
O S- O) 53
O H->— 1 «—
(
H
r-
<
1
«
00 C^ ^^ 00 ^O 00 '^ CM
cn o o co cn cn o o
1— 1 I— 1 !-« 1— 1
O CO
tO 00 "* 00 CM i— I !•*» CO
oo <— i to o to CM to in
»~l t-( i— 1 ^ i-< CM
CM m
cn O r-» CM oo •-< co to
O> «* •— 1 CO CM •-«
cn ca oo t-i in r^. to oo
O CM
•— < o co •— i ^ to oo m
^^'^» oo co *""* ^^ co m
cn * ft •* CM i— i
in in
r-~ co
toco
r-400
CO r-l
en in
CM to
h-. i-i
in <
c
O)
Nl
C
0)
JO
0
S-
0
.c
0
-r-
0
1
CM
i— i
cn o
f-H
00 •-«
CM cn
CM CM
into
to «-i
in in
to r-.
00 CO
to •-•
0)
c
o>
Nl
c
'si
1—
1
^"
•»
CM
f-H
83
-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
TRAP
-EXIT K IN.
0. D.
H-14MM 0. D.
INLET K IN.
0.0.
KIN. _
0. D. EXIT
SAMPLE INLET
2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
~10MM. 0. D.
INLET
% IN. 0. D.
1/16 IN. 0.0.
/STAINLESS ST
1QMM GLASS FRIT
MEDIUM POROSITY
131 MOLECULAR
SIEVE PURGE
GAS FILTER
PURGE GAS
FLO*
CONTROL
FIGURE 1. PURGING DEVICE
84
-------
PACKING PROCEDURE
GLASS
WOOL
TENAX 23CM
3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL
1CM
>•
CONSTRUCTION
COMPRESSION FITTING
"NUT AND FERRULES
14FT.7A/FOOT RESISTANCE
"WIRE WRAPPED SOLID
THERMOCOUPLE/
CONTROLLER.
SENSOR
TRAP INLET
aECTRONIC
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
AND
PYROMETER
TUBING 25CM.
>0.105 IN. I.D.
0.125 IN. O.D.
STAINLESS STEEL
FIGURE 2. TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
DESORB CAPABILITY
85
-------
INSZNllOU01M9IIUfri,
•NffTVMJUMVN*
K
M
'H
to
Id
I
3
M
fe
asNOdsau snvos *nry
86
-------
COLUMN: 5% 1.2.3-TRIS (2-CYANOETHOXY)
PROPANE ON CHROMOSOR8—W
PROGRAM: 40*C«2minutM 2*C/min. to 100«C
DETECTOR: PHOTOIONI2ATJON
SAMPLE: 2.0*«/1 STANDARD MIXTURE
8 12 16
RENTENT10N TIME.minutM
2O
24
FIGURE 4. CHROMATOGRAM OF TEST MIXTURE
87
-------
-------
METHOD 504. 1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB) AND 1.2-DIBROMO-3-CHLOROPROPANE
(DBCP) IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHRONATOGRAPHY
Revision 2.0
T. W. Winfield - Method 504, Revision 1.0 (1986)
T. W. Winfield - Method 504, Revision 2.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
89
-------
METHOD 504
1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB) AND 1.2-DIBROMO-3-CHLOROPROPANE (DBCP)
IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1
This method (1-4) is applicable to the determination of the
following compounds in finished drinking water and groundwater:
Analvte
1,2-Dibromoethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-Chloropropane
Chemical Abstract Services
Registry Number
106-93-4
96-12-8
1.2
1.3
For compounds other than the above mentioned analytes, or for other
sample sources, the analyst must demonstrate the usefulness of the
method by collecting precision and accuracy data on actual samples
(5) and provide qualitative confirmation of results by gas
chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) (6).
The experimentally determined method detection limits (MDL) (7) for
EDB and DBCP were calculated to be 0.01 /jg/L. The method has been
shown to be useful for these analytes over a concentration range
from approximately 0.03 to 200 /zg/L. Actual detection limits are
highly dependent upon the characteristics of the gas chromatographic
system used.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Thirty-five ml of sample are extracted with 2 ml of hexane. Two #L
of the extract are then injected into a gas chromatograph equipped
with a linearized electron capture detector for separation and
analysis. Aqueous calibration standards are extracted and analyzed
in an identical manner as the samples in order to compensate for
possible extraction losses.
2.2 The extraction and analysis time is 30 to 50 min per sample
depending upon the analytical conditions chosen.
2.3 Confirmatory evidence can be obtained using a dissimilar column.
When component concentrations are sufficiently high, Method 524.1 or
524.2 may be employed for improved specificity.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
90
-------
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.2 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) -- Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.3 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.4 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.5 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
3.6 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.7 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.8 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
91
-------
3.9 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.10 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.11 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Impurities contained in the extracting solvent usually account for
the majority of the analytical problems. Solvent blanks should be
analyzed on each new bottle of solvent before use. Indirect daily
checks on the extracting solvent are obtained by monitoring the
reagent water blanks (Sect. 7.3.4). Whenever an interference is
noted in the reagent water blank, the analyst should reanalyze the
extracting solvent. Low level interferences generally can be
removed by distillation or column chromatography (4). WARNING:
When a solvent is purified, stabilizers put into the solvent by the
manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified, preservatives put into
the solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially making
' the shelf-life short. However, it is generally more economical to
obtain a new source of solvent. Interference-free solvent is
defined as a solvent containing less than 0.1 ng/L individual
analyte interference. Protect interference-free solvents by storing
in an area known to be free of organochlorine solvents.
4.2 This liquid/liquid extraction technique efficiently extracts a wide
boiling range of non-polar organic compounds and, in addition,
extracts polar organic components of the sample with varying
efficiencies.
4.3 Current column technology suffers from the fact that EDB at low
concentrations may be masked by very high levels of
dibromochloromethane (DBCM), a common disinfection by-product of
chlorinated drinking waters.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity and carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method
has not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
92
-------
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
this method. Additional references to laboratory safety are
available (7-9) for the information of the analyst.
5.2 EDB and DBCP have been tentatively classified as known or suspected
human or mammalian carcinogens. Pure standard materials and stock
standard solutions of these compounds should be handled in a hood or
glovebox. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn
when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic
compounds.
5.3 WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers put into the
solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the
solvent hazardous.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075 or
equivalent) each equipped with a size 24 cap with a flat, disc-like
PTFE-faced polyethelene film/foam extrusion (Fisher #02-883-3F or
equivalent). Individual vials shown to contain at least 40.0 ml can
be calibrated at the 35.0 ml mark so that volumetric, rather than
gravimetric, measurements of sample volumes can be performed. Prior
to use, wash vials and septa with detergent and rinse with tap and
distilled water. Allow the vials and septa to air dry at room
temperature, place in a 105°C oven for one hr, then remove and allow
to cool in an area known to be free of organic solvent vapors.
6.2 VIALS, auto sampler, screw cap with PTFE-faced septa, 1.8 mL, Varian
#96-000099-00 or equivalent.
6.3 MICRO SYRINGES - 10 and 100 /iL.
6.4 MICRO SYRINGE - 25 juL with a 2-inch by 0.006-inch needle - Hamilton
#702N or equivalent. -
6.5 PIPETTES - 2.0 and 5.0 mL transfer.
6.6 STANDARD SOLUTION STORAGE CONTAINERS - 15-mL bottles with PTFE-lined
screw caps.
6.7 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY SYSTEM
6.7.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
be equipped with a linearized electron capture detector and a
capillary column split!ess injector at 200°C.
6..7.2 Two gas chromatography columns are recommended. Column A
(Sect. 6.7.3) is a highly efficient column that provides
separations for EDB and DBCP without interferences from
93
-------
trihalomethanes (Sect. 4.4). Column A should be used as the
primary analytical column unless routinely occurring analytes
are not adequately resolved. Column B (Sect. 6.7.4) is
recommended for use as a confirmatory column when GC/MS
confirmation is not viable. Retention times for EDB and DBCP
on these columns are presented in Table 1.
6.7.3 Column A - 0.32 mm ID x 30M long fused silica capillary with
dimethyl silicone mixed phase (Durawax-DX3, 0.25 jum film, or
equivalent). The linear velocity of the helium carrier gas
should be about 25 cm/sec at 100°C and 7 psi column head
pressure. The column temperature is programmed to hold at
40°C for 4 min, to increase to 190°C at 8°C/min, and hold at
190°C for 25 min or until all expected compounds have eluted.
(See Figure 1 for a sample chromatogram.)
6.7.4 Column B (alternative column) - 0.32mm ID x 30M long fused
silica capillary with methyl polysiloxane phase (DB-1, 1.0 /on
film, or equivalent). The linear velocity of the helium
carrier gas should be about 25 cm/sec at 100°C. The column
temperature is programmed to hold at 40°C for 4 min, to
increase to 270°C at 10°C/min, and hold at 270°C for 10 min
or until all expected compounds have eluted.
6.7.5 Column C (alternative column, wide bore) — 0.53 mm ID x 30 M
long, 2.0 pi film thickness, Rtx-Volatiles (part #10902),
dimethyl diphenyl polysiloxane, bonded phase. The hydrogen
carrier gas flow is about 80 cm/sec linear velocity, measured
at 50°C with about 11.5 psi column head pressure. The oven
temperature is programmed to hold at 200°C until all expected
compounds have eluted. Injector temperature: 250°C.
Detector temperature: 250°C. NOTE: The above parameters
were obtained by Restek Corporation during preliminary
attempts to improve the separation of EDB and DBCM.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 REAGENTS
7.1.1 Hexane extraction solvent - UV Grade, Burdick and Jackson
#216 or equivalent.
7.1.2 Methyl alcohol - ACS Reagent Grade, demonstrated to be free
of analytes.
7.1.3 Sodium chloride, NaCl - ACS Reagent Grade - For pretreatment
before use, pulverize a batch of NaCl and place in a muffle
furnace at room temperature. Increase the temperature to
400°C for 30 min. Place in a bottle and cap.
7.1.4 Sodium thiosulfate, Na^O,, ACS Reagent Grade — For
preparation of solution (0.04 g/mL), mix 1 g of Na2S203 with
94
-------
reagent water and bring to 25-mL volume in a volumetric
flask.
7.2 STANDARD MATERIALS
7.2.1 1,2-Dibromoethane - 99%, available from Aldrich Chemical
Company.
7.2.2 l,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane - 99%, available from USEPA,
EMSL-QARD, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
7.3 REAGENT WATER - Reagent water is defined as water free of
interference when employed in the procedure described herein.
7.3.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a
filter bed containing activated carbon. Change the activated
carbon when there is evidence that volatile organic compounds
are breaking through the carbon.
r
7.3.2 A Millipore Super-Q Water System or its equivalent may be
used to generate deionized reagent water.
7.3.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for
15 min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at
90°C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water
at 100 mL/min for 1 hr. While still hot, transfer the water
to a narrow mouth screw cap bottle with a Teflon seal.
7.3.4 Test reagent water each day it is used by analyzing it
according to Sect. 11.
7.4 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
the following procedures:
7.4.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand,
unstoppered, for about 10 min and weigh to the nearest 0.1
mg.
7.4.2 Use a 100-#L syringe and immediately add two or more drops of
standard material to the flask. Be sure that the standard
material falls directly into the alcohol without contacting
the neck of the flask.
7.4.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
flask several times. Calculate the concentration in
micrograms per microliter from the net gain in weight.
7.4.4 Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped with
PTFE-lined screw caps. Methanol solutions prepared from
95
-------
liquid analytes are stable for at least four weeks when
stored at 4°C.
7.5 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTIONS — Use stock standard solutions
to prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain both
analytes in methanol. The primary dilution standards should be
prepared at concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare
aqueous calibration standards (Sect. 9.1.1) that will bracket the
working concentration range. Store the primary dilution standard
solutions with minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
calibration standards. The storage time described for stock
standard solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also applies to primary dilution
standard solutions.
7.6 LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK (LFB) SAMPLE CONCENTRATE (0.25 /Jg/mL) —
Prepare a LFB sample concentrate of 0.25 fig/ml of each analyte from
the stock standard solutions prepared in Sect. 7.4.
7.7 MDL CHECK SAMPLE CONCENTRATE (0.02 fig/ml) — Dilute 2 mL of LFB
sample concentrate (Sect. 7.6) to 25 mL with methanol.
8« SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION
8.1.1 Replicate field reagent blanks (FRB) must be handled along
with each sample set, which is composed of the samples
collected from the same general sampling site at
approximately the same time. At the laboratory, fill a
minimum of two sample bottles with reagent water, seal, and
ship to the sampling site along with sample bottles.
Wherever a set of samples is shipped and stored, it must be
accompanied by the FRB. '.','.
8.1.2 Collect all samples in 40-mL bottles into which 3 nig of
sodium thiosulfate crystals have been added to the empty
bottles just prior to shipping to the sampling site.
Alternately, 75 /zL of freshly prepared sodium thiosulfate
solution (0.04 g/mL may be added to empty 40-mL bottles just
prior to sample collection.
8.1.3 When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect samples from the flowing stream.
8.1.4 When sampling from a well, fill a wide-mouth bottle or beaker
with sample, and carefully fill 40-mL sample bottles.
96
-------
8.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION
8.2.1 The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
and maintained at that temperature until analysis. Field
samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
sufficient ice to insure that they will be <4°C on arrival at
the laboratory.
8.2.2 The addition of sodium thiosulfate as a dechlorinating agent
and/or acidification to pH 2 with 1:1 HC1, common
preservative procedures for purgeable compounds, have been
shown to have no effect on EDB or DBCP (See Table 3).
Nonetheless, sodium thiosulfate must be added to avoid the
possibility of reactions which may occur between residual
chlorine and indeterminant contaminants present in some
solvents, yielding compounds which may subsequently interfere
with the analysis.. The presence of sodium thiosulfate will
arrest the formation of DBCM (See Sect. 4.3). Also, samples
should be acidified to avoid the possibility of microbial
degradation which may periodically affect these analytes
contained in other groundwater matrices.
8.3 SAMPLE STORAGE
8.3.1 Store samples and field reagent blanks together at 4°C until
analysis. The sample storage area must be free of organic
solvent vapors.
8.3.2 Analyze all samples within 28 days of collection. Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
9. CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION
9.1 CALIBRATION
9.1.1 At least three calibration standards are needed; five are
recommended. One should contain EDB and DBCP at a
concentration near to but greater than the method detection
limit (Table 1) for each compound; the other two should be at
concentrations that bracket the range expected in samples.
For example, if the MDL is 0.01 p.g/1, and a sample expected
to contain approximately 0.10 #g/L is to be analyzed, aqueous
standards should be prepared at concentrations of 0.02 Mg/L,
0.10 #g/L, and 0.20
9.1.2 To prepare a calibration standard (CAL), add an appropriate
volume of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot
of reagent water in a volumetric flask. If less than 20 ill
of an alcoholic standard is added to the reagent water, poor
precision may result. Use a 25-M- micro syringe and rapidly
97
-------
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.2
inject the alcoholic standard into the expanded area of the
filled volumetric flask. Remove the needle as quickly as
possible after injection. Mix by inverting the flask several
times. Discard the contents contained in the neck of the
flask. Aqueous standards should be prepared fresh and
extracted immediately after preparation unless sealed and
stored without headspace as described in Sect. 8.
Each day, analyze each calibration standard according to
Sect. 11 and tabulate peak height or area response versus the
concentration in the standard. The results can be used to
prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
Alternatively, if the ratio of concentration to response
(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
(<20% relative standard deviation), linearity through the
origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration
factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standard solutions. The single point
calibration standard should be prepared at a concentration
that produces a response close to that of the unknowns, i.e.,
no more than 20% deviation between response of standard and
response of sample.
INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of reagent
water blanks, standards, and the QC check standard (Sect. 10.3).
9.2.1 Significant peak tailing in excess of that shown for the
target compounds in the method chromatogram (Figure 1) must
be corrected. Tailing problems are generally traceable to
active sites on the GC column, improper column installation,
or the operation of the detector.
9.2.2 Check the precision between replicate analyses. A properly
operating system should perform with an average relative
standard deviation of less than 10%: Poor precision is
generally traceable to pneumatic leaks, especially at the
injection port.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10
.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a
formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this
program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory detection
limits capability and an ongoing analysis of laboratory performance
check solutions (LPC), laboratory reagent blanks (LRB), laboratory
fortified blanks (LFB), laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM),
and quality control samples (QCS) to evaluate and document data
quality. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established
98
-------
performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet
the performance characteristics of the method.
10.1.1 The analyst must make an initial determination of the method
detection limits and demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable precision with this method. This is established
as described in Sect. 10.2.
10.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromato-
graphy, the analyst is permitted certain options to improve
the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time
such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is
required to repeat the procedure in Sect. 10.2.
10.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a laboratory reagent blank
(LRB) and a field reagent blank, if applicable (Sect. 8.1.1),
to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system
are under control before any samples are analyzed.
10.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through
the analyses of laboratory fortified blanks (LFB)-that the
operation of the measurement system is in control. This
procedure is described in Sect. 10.3. The frequency of the
LFB analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed.
10.1.5 On a weekly basis, the laboratory should demonstrate the
ability to analyze low level samples. The procedure for low
level LFB samples is described in Sect. 10.4.
10.2 To establish the ability to achieve low detection limits and
generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst should
perform the following operations:
10.2.1 Prepare four to seven samples at 0.02 /ig/L by fortifying
35 ill of the MDL check sample concentrate (Sect. 7.7) into
35-mL aliquots of reagent water in 40-mL bottles. Cap and
mix well.
10.2.2 Analyze the well-mixed MDL check samples according to the
method beginning in Sect. 11.
10.2.3 Calculate the average concentration found (X) in /*g/L, and
the standard deviation of the concentrations(s) in #g/L, for
each analyte. Then, calculate the MDL for each analyte.
10.2.4 For each analyte, X should be between 80% and 120% of the
true value. Additionally, the calculated MDL should meet
data quality objectives. If both analytes meet these
criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis
of actual samples can begin. If either analyte fails to meet
the data quality objectives on the basis of high variability,
correct the source of the problem and repeat the test. It is
99
-------
recommended that the laboratory repeat the MDL determination
on a regular basis. CAUTION: No attempts to establish low
detection limits should be made before instrument
optimization and adequate conditioning of both the column and
the GC system. Conditioning includes the processing of LFB
and LFM samples containing moderate concentration levels of
EDB and DBCP.
10.3 The laboratory must demonstrate on a frequency equivalent to 10% of
the sample load that the measurement system is in control by
analyzing an LFB of both analytes at 0.25 /zg/L concentration level.
10.3.1 Prepare an, LFB sample (0.25 /ig/L) by adding 35 /tL of LFB
concentrate (Sect. 7.6) to 35 mL of reagent'water in a 40-mL
bottle.
10.3.2 Immediately analyze the LFB sample according to Sect. 11 and
calculate the recovery for each analyte. The recovery should
be between 60% and 140% of the expected value.
10.3.3 If the recovery for either analyte falls outside the
designated range, the analyte fails the acceptance criteria.
A second LFB containing each analyte that failed must be
analyzed. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general
problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate
and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test.
10.4 On a weekly basis, the laboratory should demonstrate the ability to
analyze low level samples.
10.4.1 Prepare an MDL check sample (0.02 /jg/L) as outlined in Sect.
10.2.1 and immediately analyze according to the method in
Sect. 11.
10.4.2 The instrument response must indicate that the laboratory's
MDL is distinguishable from instrument background signal. If
not, correct the problem and repeat the MDL test in Sect.
10.2.
10.4.3 For each analyte, the recovery must be between 60% and 140%
of the expected value.
10.4.4 When either analyte fails the test, the analyst should repeat
the test for that analyte. Repeated failure, however, will
confirm a general problem with the measurement system or
faulty samples and/or standards. If this occurs, locate and
correct the source of the problem and repeat the test.
10.5 At least quarterly, a quality control sample from an external source
should be analyzed. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
and correct the problem source.
100
-------
10 6 At least once in every 20 samples, fortify an aliquot of a randomly
selected routine sample with a.known amount (see Sect. 4.3). me
added concentration should not be less than the background
concentration of the sample selected for fortification. To simplify
these checks, it would be convenient to use LFM concentrations ~10X
MDL. Over time, recovery should be evaluated on fortified samples
from all routine sources.
10 7 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this method. The specific
oractices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the
laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements.
Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference
materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation
studies.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 SAMPLE PREPARATION
11.1.1 Remove samples and standards from storage and allow them to
reach room temperature.
11 1 2 For samples and field reagent blanks, contained in 40-mL
bottles, remove the container cap. Discard a 5-mL volume
using a 5-mL transfer pipette or 10-mL graduated cylinder.
Replace the container cap and weigh the container with
contents to the nearest O.lg and record this weight for
subsequent sample volume determination (Sect. 11.3).
11 1 3 For calibration standards, laboratory fortified blanks and
laboratory reagent blanks, measure a 35-mL volume using a
50-mL graduated cylinder and transfer it to a 40-mL sample
container.
11.2 MICROEXTRACTION AND ANALYSIS
11.2.1 Remove the container cap and add 6 g NaCl (Sect. 7.1.3) to
the sample.
11.2.2 Recap the sample container and dissolve the NaCl by shaking
by hand for about 20 sec.
11.2.3 Remove the cap and, using a transfer pipette, add 2.0 mL of
hexane. Recap and shake vigorously by hand for 1 min. Allow
the water and hexane phases to separate. (If stored at this
stage, keep the container upside down.)
11 2.4 Remove the cap and carefully transfer 0.5 mL of the hexane
layer into an autoinjector using a disposable glass pipette.
101
-------
11.2.5 Transfer the remaining hexane phase, being careful not to
include any of the water phase, into a second autoinjector
vial. Reserve this second vial at 4°C for a reanalysis if
necessary. J
11.2.6 Transfer the first sample vial to an autoinjector set up to
inject 2.0 jil portions into the gas chromatograph for
analysis. Alternatively, 2 /iL portions of samples, blanks
and standards may be manually injected, although an
autoinjector is recommended.
11.3 DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE VOLUME
11.3.1 For samples and field blanks, remove the cap from the sample
container. K
11.3.2 Discard the remaining sample/hexane mixture. Shake off the
. remaining few drops using short, brisk wrist movements.
11.3.3 Reweigh the empty container with original cap and calculate
the net weight of sample by difference to the nearest 0.1 g
This net weight (in g) is equivalent to the volume of water
(in mL) extracted. (Sect. 12.3)
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Identify EDB and DBCP in the sample chromatogram by comparing the
retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated by
the calibration standards and the laboratory control standard.
12.2 Use single point calibrations (Sect. 9.1.4) or use the calibration
curve or calibration factor (Sect. 9.1.3) to directly calculate the
unconnected concentration (Cf) of each analyte in the sample (e.g.,
calibration factor x response).
12.3 Calculate the sample volume (V ) as equal to the net sample weight-
Vs = gross weight (Sect. 11.l.i) - bottle tare (Sect. 11.3.3).
12.4 Calculate the corrected sample concentration as-
Concentration, /jg/L = C- x 35
vs
12.5 Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
figures. Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
used for concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
concentrations een !~" m/l' and l significant figure for lower
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory and interlaboratory accuracy and precision at
several concentrations in three waters are presented in Tables 2 and
4 (l). The method detection limits are presented in Table 1.
13.2 In a preservation study extending over a 4-week period, the average
percent recoveries and relative standard deviations presented in
102
-------
Table 3 were observed for reagent water (acidified), tap water and
groundwater (1). The results for acidified and non-acidified
samples were not significantly different.
14. REFERENCES
1 Winfield, T.W., J.E. Longbottom, R.L. Graves and A.L. Cohen,
"Analysis of Organohalide Pesticides and Commerical PCB Products in
Drinking Water by Microextraction and Gas Chromatography," U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems
Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio.
2 Glaze, W.W., Lin, C.C., "Optimization of Liquid-Liquid Extraction
Methods for Analysis of Organics in Water," EPA-600/S4-83-052,
January 1984.
3. Henderson, J.E., Peyton, G.R. and Glaze, W.H.(1976). In
Identification and Analysis of Organic Pollutants in Water (L.H.
Keith ed.), pp. 105-111. Ann Arbor Sci. Publ., Ann Arbor, Michigan.
4. Richard, J.J., G.A. Junk, "Liquid Extraction for Rapid Determination
of Halomethanes in Water," Journal AWWA, 69, 62, January 1977.
5. Handbook for Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater
Laboratories, EPA-600/4-79-019, U. S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory - Cincinnati,
Ohio 45268, March 1979.
6. Budde, W.L., J.W. Eichelberger, "Organic Analyses Using Gas
Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry," Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor,
Michigan 1979.
7. Glaser, J.A. D.L. Forest, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
"Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environmental Science and
Technology, 15, 1426 (1981).
8. "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens", Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
9. OSHA Safety and Health Standards,(29CFR1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
10. Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4th Edition, 1985.
103
-------
TABLE 1. CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
FOR 1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB) AND 1,2-DIBROMO-S-CHLOROPROPANE (DBCP)
Analvte
Retention Time. Min MDL. ua/L
Column A Column B Column C*
EDB
DBCP
9.5
17.3
8.9
15.-0
4.1
12.8
0.01
0.01
* The MDL experimentally observed by Resteck Corporation during
preliminary optimization was 0.3
104
-------
TABLE 2. SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY AND PRECISION
FOR EDB AND DBCP IN TAP WATER
Analvte
Number
of
Samples
Concen-
tration
(ua/l}
Average
Accuracy
m
Relative
Standard
Deviation
m
EDB 7 0.03 114 9.5
7 0.24 98 11.8
7 50.0 95 4.7
DBCP 7 0.03 90 11.4
7 0.24 102 8.3
7 50.0 94 4.8
105
-------
TABLE 3. ACCURACY AND PRECISION AT 2.0 /ig/L OVER A 4-WEEK STUDY PERIOD
Analvte
EDB
DBCP
Matrix1
RW-A
GW
GW-A
TW
TW-A
RW-A
GW
GW-A
TW
TW-A
Average
Number
of Samel es
16
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Relative
Accuracy
(% Recovery^
104
101
96
93
93
105
105
101
95
94
Std. Dev.
(%)
4.7
2.5
4.7
6.3
6.1
8.2
6.2
8.4
10.1
6.9
Matrix Identities
RW-A = Reagent water at pH 2
GW - Groundwater, ambient pH
GW-A « Groundwater at pH 2
TW = Tap water, ambient pH
TW-A - Tap water at pH 2.
106
-------
Column: FuMd silica capillary
Liquid Fhaaa: Ourawax«DX3
Film Thicknasr 0.2Sj*n
Column Oimansions: 30 M • 0.317 mm ID
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2i 2S
Tlmo(Min)
Figuro 1. Extract of rogentwatar tpiked at 0.114 j/g/L with EDB «nd DBCP.
107
-------
-------
METHOD 505. ANALYSIS OF OR6ANOHALIDE PESTICIDES AND
COMMERCIAL POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB) PRODUCTS
IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMAT06RAPHY
Revision 2.0
T. W. Winfield - Method 505, Revision 1.0 (1986)
T. W. Winfield - Method 505, Revision 2.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
109
-------
METHOD 505
ANALYSIS OF OR6ANOHALIDE PESTICIDES AND COMMERCIAL POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL
(PCB) PRODUCTS IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1
1.2
This method (1,2,3) is applicable to the determination of the
following analytes in finished drinking water, drinking water during
intermediate stages of treatment, and the raw source water:
Analvte
Alachlor
Aldrin
Atrazine
Chlordane
alpha-Chlorodane
gamma-Chlorodane
Dieldrin
Endrin
Heptachlor
Heptachlor Epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorocyclopentadi ene
Lindane
Methoxychlor
cis-Nonachlor
trans-Nonachlor
Simazine
Toxaphene
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Chemical Abstract Service
Registry Number
5972-
309-
1912-
57-
5103-
5103-
60-
72-
76-
1024-
118-
77-
58-
72-
-60-8
-00-2
-24-9
-74-9
-71-9
•74-2
•57-1
•20-8
•44-8
57-3
•74-1
74-4
89-9
43-5
39765-80-5
122-34-9
8001-35-2
12674-11-2
11104-28-2
11141-16-5
53469-21-9
12672-29-6
11097-69-1
11096-82-5
For compounds other than the above mentioned analytes or for other
sample sources, the analyst must demonstrate the applicability of the
method by collecting precision and accuracy data on fortified samples
(i.e., groundwater, tap water) (4) and provide qualitative"confirma-
tion of results by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (5),
or by GC analysis using dissimilar columns.
1.3 Method detection limits (MDL) (6) for the above organohalides and
Aroclors have been experimentally determined (Sect. 13.1). Actual
detection limits are highly dependent upon the characteristics of the
gas chromatographic system used (e.g. column type, age, and proper
conditioning; detector condition; and injector mode and condition).
110
-------
1.4 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of gas
chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in
Sect. 11.
1.5 Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, i.e., analytes
which have very similar retention times, cannot be individually
identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
sample unless an alternative technique for identification and
quantitation is used (Sect. 11.4).
1.6 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all
of the analytes above, analyte identifications should be confirmed by
at least one additional qualitative technique.
1.7 Degradation of Endrin, caused by active sites in the injection port
and GC columns, may occur. This is not as much a problem with new
capillary columns as with packed columns. However, high'boil ing
sample residue in capillary columns will create the same problem after
injection of sample extracts.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Thirty-five ml of sample are extracted with 2 ml of hexane. Two n\. of
the extract are then injected into a gas chromatograph equipped with a
linearized electron capture detector for separation and analysis.
Aqueous calibration standards are extracted and analyzed in an
identical manner in order to compensate for possible extraction
losses.
2.2 The extraction and analysis time is 30 to 50 min per sample depending
upon the analytes and the analytical conditions chosen. (See Sect.
6.9.)
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample collection,
preservation, or storage procedures.
3.2 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures. Analyses
of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated with sample
collection, preservation and storage, as well as with laboratory
procedures.
3.3 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that is
treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
111
-------
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates that
are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if method
analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.4 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage, preservation
and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB is to determine
if method analytes or other interferences are present in the field
environment.
3.5 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to evaluate
the performance of the instrument system with respect to a defined set
of method criteria.
3.6 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.7 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an environ-
mental sample to which known quantities of the method analytes are
added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly like a sample,
and its purpose is to determine whether the sample matrix contributes
bias to the analytical results. The background concentrations of the
analytes in the sample matrix must be determined in a separate aliquot
and the measured values in the LFM corrected for background concentra-
tions.
3.8 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a single
certified standard that is a method analyte, or a concentrated
solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory with an
assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are used to
prepare primary dilution standards.
3.9 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.10 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are used
to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.11 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible solvent
112
-------
which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental samples. The
QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory, and is used
to check laboratory performance with externally prepared test
materi al s.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead to
discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All
reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free from
interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.
4.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned (2). Clean all glass-
ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
the last solvent used in it. Follow by washing with hot water
and detergent and thorough rinsing wih tap and reagent water.
Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at 400°C for 1
hr. Do not heat volumetric ware. Thermally stable materials
might not be eliminated by this treatment. Thorough rinsing
with acetone may be substituted for the heating. After drying
and cooling, seal and store glassware in a clean environment to
prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants. Store
inverted or capped with aluminum foil.
4.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize
interference problems. Purification of solvents by distilla-
tion in all-glass systems may be required. WARNING: When a
solvent is purified, stabilizers put into the solvent by the
manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified, preservatives put
into the solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a sample
containing relatively high concentrations of analytes. Between-sample
rinsing of the sample syringe and associated equipment with hexane can
minimize sample cross contamination. After analysis of a sample
containing high concentrations of analytes, one or more injections of
hexane should be made to ensure that accurate values are obtained for
the next sample.
4.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are coextract-
ed from the sample. Also, note that all the analytes listed in the
scope and application section are not resolved from each other on any
one column, i.e., one anlayte of interest may be an interferent for
another analyte of interest. The extent of matrix interferences will
vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the water
sampled. Cleanup of sample extracts may be necessary. Positive
identifications should be confirmed (Sect. 11.4).
113
-------
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
It is important -that samples and working standards be contained in the
same solvent. The solvent for working standards must be the same as
the final solvent used in sample preparation. If this is not the
case, chromatographic comparability of standards to sample may be
affected.
Caution must be taken in the determination of endrin since it has been
reported that the splitless injector may cause endrin degradation (7).
The analyst should be alerted to this possible interference resulting
in an erratic response for endrin.
Variable amounts of pesticides and commercial PCB products from
aqueous solutions adhere to glass surfaces. It is recommended that
sample transfers and glass surface contacts be minimized.
Aldrin, hexachlorocyclopentadiene and methoxychlor are rapidly
oxidized by chlorine. Dechlorination with sodium thiosulfate at time
of collection will retard further oxidation of these compounds.
WARNING: An interfering, erratic peak has been observed within the
retention window of heptachlor during many analyses of reagent, tap,
and groundwater. It appears to be related to di butyl phthalate;
however, the specific source has not yet been definitively determined.
The observed magnitude and character of this peak randomly varies in
numerical value from successive injections made from the same vial.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity and carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method have
not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in this
method. Additional references to laboratory safety are available
(8-10) for the information of the analyst.
5.2 The following organohalides have been tentatively classified as known
or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: aldrin, commercial PCB
products, chlordane, dieldrin, heptachlor, hexachlorobenzene, and
toxaphene. Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
these compounds should be handled in a hood or glovebox.
5.3 WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers put into the solvent
by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075 or
equivalent) each equipped with a size 24 cap with a flat, disc-like
TFE facing backed with a polyethylene film/foam extrusion (Fisher
#02-883-3F or equivalent). Prior to use, wash vials and septa with
114
-------
detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water. Allow the vials and
septa to air dry at room temperature, place the vials in a 400°C oven
for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to be
free of organics.
6.2 VIALS - auto sampler, screw cap with septa, 1.8 ml, Varian
#96-000099-00 or equivalent or any other autosampler vials not
requiring more than 1.8 ml sample volumes.
6.3 AUTO SAMPLER - Hewlett-Packard 7671A, or equivalent.
6.4 MICRO SYRINGES - 10 and 100 /zL.
6.5 MICRO SYRINGE - 25 til with a 2-inch by 0.006-inch needle - Hamilton
702N or equivalent.
6.6 PIPETTES - 2.0 and 5.0 mL transfer.
6.7 VOLUMETRIC FLASKS - 10 and 100 mL, glass stoppered.
6.8 STANDARD SOLUTION STORAGE CONTAINERS - 15-mL bottles with PTFE-lined
screw caps.
6.9 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
programmable GC suitable and split/split!ess injector for use with
capillary columns and all required accessories including syringes,
analytical columns, gases, a linearized electron capture detector and
stripchart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak
areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for method analytes
using the columns and analytical conditions described below.
6.9.1 Three gas chromatographic columns are recommended. Column 1
(Sect. 6.9.2) should be used as the primary analytical column
unless routinely occurring analytes are not adequately
resolved. Validation data presented in this method were
obtained using this column. Columns 2 and 3 are recommended
for use as confirmatory columns when GC/MS confirmation is not
available. Alternative columns may be used in accordance with
the provisions described in Sect. 10.3.
6.9.2 Column 1 (Primary Column) - 0.32 mm ID x 30 M long fused silica
capillary with chemically bonded methyl polysiloxane phase
(DB-1, 1.0 urn film, or equivalent). Helium carrier gas flow is
about 25 cm/sec linear velocity, .measured at 180° with 9 psi
column head pressure. The oven temperature is programmed from
180°C to 260°C at 4°C/min and held at 260°C until all expected
compounds have eluted. Injector temperature: 200°C.
Splitless Mode: 0.5 min. Detector temperature: 290°C.
Sample chromatograms for selected pesticides are presented in
Figures 1 and 2. Chromatograms of the Aroclors, toxaphene, and
technical chlordane are presented in Figures 3 through 11.
115
-------
6.9.3 Column 2 (alternative column 1) - 0.32mm ID x 30 M long fused
silica capillary with a 1:1 mixed phase of dimethyl silicone
and polyethylene glycol (Durawax-DX3, 0.25/jm film, or
equivalent). Helium carrier gas flow is about 25 cm/sec linear
velocity and oven temperature is programmed from 100°C to 210°C
at 8°C/irrin, and held at 210°C until all expected compounds have
eluted. Then the post temperature is programmed to 240°C at
8°C/min for 5 min.
6.9.4 Column 3 (alternative column 2) - 0.32mm ID x 25 M long fused
silica capillary with chemically bonded 50:50 Methyl-Phenyl
silicone (OV-17, 1.5/zm film thickness, or equivalent). Helium
carrier gas flow is about 40 cm/sec linear velocity and oven
temperature is programmed from 100°C to 260°C at 4°C/min and
held at 260°C until all expected compounds have eluted.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING: When a solvent is purified
stabilizers put into the solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives put into the solvent by the manufacturer are
removed thus potentially making the shelf-life short.
7.1 REAGENTS
7.1.1 Hexane extraction solvent - UV Grade, Burdick and Jackson #216
or equivalent.
7.1.2 Methyl alcohol - ACS Reagent Grade, demonstrated to be free of
analytes.
7.1.3 Sodium chloride, NaCl - ACS Reagent Grade - For pretreatment
before use, pulverize a batch of NaCl and place in a muffle
furnace at room temperature. Increase the temperature to 400°C
and hold for 30 min. Place in a bottle and cap.
, 7.1.4 Sodium thiosulfate, Na?S203, ACS Reagent Grade—For preparation
of solution (0.04 g/mL), mix 1 g of Na2S203 with reagent water
and bring to 25-mL volume in a volumetric flask.
7.2 REAGENT WATER - Reagent water is defined as water free of interference
when employed in the procedure described herein.
7.2.1 A Millipore Super-Q Water System or its equivalent may be used
to generate deionized reagent water.
7.2.2 Test reagent water each day it is used by analyzing it
according to Sect. 11.
7.3 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be obtained as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using the
following procedures:
116
-------
7.3.1 Prepare stock standard solutions (5000 /jg/mL) by accurately
weighing about 0.0500 g of pure material. Dissolve the
material in methanol and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the
analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater,
the weight can be used without correction to calculate the
concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared
stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
7.3.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed
screw-cap bottles. Store at 4°C and protect from light. Stock
standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of
degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing
calibration standards from them.
7.3.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or
sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
7.4 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTIONS — Use stock standard solutions to
prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain the analytes
in methanol. The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous calibra-
tion standards (Sect. 9.1.1) that will bracket the working concentra-
tion range. Store the primary dilution standard solutions with
minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of deterioration or
evaporation, especially just before preparing calibration standards.
The storage time described for stock standard solutions in Sect. 7.3.3
also applies to primary dilution standard solutions.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION
8.1.1 Collect all samples in 40-mL bottles into which 3 mg of sodium
thiosulfate crystals have been added to the empty bottles just
prior to shipping to the sampling site. Alternately, 75 #L of
freshly prepared sodium thiosulfate solution (0.04 g/mL) may be
added to empty 40-mL bottles just prior to sample collection.
8.1.2 When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect samples from the flowing stream.
8.1.3 When sampling from a well, fill a wide-mouth bottle or beaker
with sample, and carefully fill 40-mL sample bottles.
8.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION
8.2.1 The samples must be chilled to 4°C at the time of collection
and maintained at that temperature until the analyst is
117
-------
prepared for the extraction process. Field samples that will
not be received at the laboratory on the day of collection must
be packaged for shipment with sufficient ice to insure that
they will be maintained at 4°C until arrival at the laboratory.
8.3 SAMPLE STORAGE
8.3.1 Store samples and extracts at 4°C until extraction and
analysis.
8.3.2 Extract all samples as soon as possible after collection.
Results of holding time studies suggest that all analytes with
the possible exception of heptachlor were adequately stable for
14 days when stored under these conditions. In general,
heptachlor showed inconsistent results. If heptachlor is to be
determined, samples should be extracted within 7 days of
collection. Analyte stability may be affected by the matrix;
therefore, the analyst should verify that the preservation
technique is applicable to the samples under study.
9. CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION
9.1 Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.9. WARNING: Endrin is easily degraded in the injection port
if the injection port or front of the column is dirty. This is the
result of buildup of high boiling residue from sample injection.
Check for degradation problems by injecting a mid-level standard
containing only endrin. Look for the degradation products of endrin
(endrin ketone and endrin aldehyde). If degradation of endrin exceeds
20%, take corrective action before proceeding with calibration.
Calculate percent breakdown as follows:
Total endrin degradation peak area fendrin aldehyde + endrin ketone) xlOO
Total endrin peak area (endrin + endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)
9.2 At least three calibration standards are needed; five are
recommended. One should contain analytes at a concentration near
but greater than the method detection limit for each compound; the
other two should be at concentrations that bracket the range
expected in samples. For example> if the MDL is 0.01 ng/L, and a
sample expected to contain approximately 0.10 /zg/L is to be
analyzed, aqueous standards should be prepared at concentrations of
0.02 /zg/L, 0.10 /zg/L, and 0.20 pg/L.
9.2.1 To prepare a calibration standard (CAL), add an appropriate
volume of a secondary dilution standard to a 35-mL aliquot of
reagent water in a 40-mL bottle. Do not add less than 20 /iL
of an alcoholic standard to the reagent water. Use a 25-/iL
micro syringe and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard into
the middle point of the water volume. Remove the needle as
quickly as possible after injection. Mix by inverting and
118
-------
shaking the capped bottle several times. Aqueous standards
must be prepared fresh daily.
9.2.2 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, prepare,
extract, and analyze each calibration standard beginning with
Sect. 11.2 and tabulate peak height or area response versus
the concentration in the standard. The results are to be
used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound by
plotting the peak height or area response versus the concen-
tration. Alternatively, if the ratio of concentration to
response (calibration factor) is a constant over the working
range (20% RSD or less), linearity to the origin can be
assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
used in place of a calibration curve.
9.2.3 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of one or
more calibration standards. If the response for an analyte
varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve or use a single point calibration standard as described
in Sect. 9.2.4.
9.2.4 Single point calibration is an acceptable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standard solutions. The single point
calibration standard should be prepared at a concentration
that produces a response close (±20% or less) to that of the
unknowns. Do not use less than 20 jil of the secondary
dilution standard solution to produce a single point
calibration standard in reagent water.
9.3 INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of
laboratory reagent blanks (LRB), (CAL), laboratory duplicate samples
(LD1 and LD2), and the laboratory performance check solution (LPC)
(Sect. 10.6).
9.3.1 Significant peak tailing in excess of that shown for the
target compounds in the method chromatograms (Figures 1-11)
must be corrected. Tailing problems are generally traceable
to active sites on the GC column, improper column installa-
tion, or operation of the detector.
9.3.2 Check the precision between replicate analyses. Poor
precision is generally traceable to pneumatic leaks,
especially at the injection port. If the GC system is
apparently performing acceptably but with decreased
sensitivity, it may be necessary to generate a new curve or
set of calibration factors to verify the decreased responses
before searching for the source of the problem.
119
-------
9.3.3 Observed relative area responses of endrin (See 4.5) must
meet the following general criteria:
9.3.3.1 The breakdown of endrin into its aldo and keto forms
must be adequately consistent during a period in
which a series of analyses is made. Equivalent
relative amounts of breakdown should be demonstrated
in the LRB, LPC, LFB, CAL and QCS. Consistent break-
down resulting in these analyses would suggest that
the breakdown occurred in the instrument system and
that the methodology is in control.
9.3.3.2 Analyses of laboratory fortified matrix (LFM) samples
must also be adequately consistent after corrections
for potential background concentrations are made.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
of laboratory capability, analysis of laboratory reagent blanks
(LRB), laboratory fortified blanks (LFB), laboratory fortified
sample matrix (LFM), and quality control samples (QCS).
10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks. Before processing any samples, the
analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent interfer-
ences are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or
reagents are changed, an LRB must be analyzed. If within the reten-
tion time window of any analyte the LRB produces a peak that would
prevent the determination of that analyte, determine the source of
contamination and eliminate the interference before processing
samples.
10.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability
10.3.1 Select a representative concentration (about 10 times MDL or
at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level, whichever is
lower) for each analyte. Prepare a primary dilution standard
solution (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times
selected concentration. With a syringe, add 35 #L of the
concentrate to each of at least four 35-mL aliquots of
reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to proce-
dures beginning in Sect. 11.
10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value should for at least three
out of four consecutively analyzed samples fall in the.range
of R±30% (or within R±3SR if broader) using the values for R
and SR for reagent water in Table 2. For those compounds
that meet the acceptance criteria, performance is considered
acceptable and sample analysis may begin. For those com-
pounds that fail these criteria, initial demonstration
procedures should be repeated.
120
-------
10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
with it. It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
experience with this method the quality of data will improve
beyond those required here.
10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions, or
detectors to improve separations or lower analytical costs. Each
time such method modifications are made, the analyst must repeat the
procedures in Sect. 10.3.
10.5 Assessing Laboratory Performance - Laboratory Fortified Blank (LFB)
10.5.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory fortified
blank (LFB) per sample set (all samples extracted within a
24-h period). If the sample set contains more than 20
samples, analyze one LFB for every 20 samples. The fortify-
.ing concentration of each analyte in the LFB sample should be
1.0 times MDL or the MCL, whichever is less. Calculate
accuracy as percent recovery (X,-). If the recovery of any
analyte falls outside the control limits (see Sect. 10.5.2),
that analyte is judged out of control, and the source of the
problem should be identified and resolved before continuing
analyses. ,
10.5.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
analyses, the laboratory may assess laboratory performance
against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that are derived
from the data in Table 2. When sufficient internal perfor-
mance data becomes available, develop control limits from the
mean percent recovery (X) and standard deviation (S) of the
percent recovery. These data are used to establish upper and
lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = X + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT = X - 3S
After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new control
limits should be calculated using only the most recent 20-30
data points.
10.5.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically determine
and document its detection limit capabilities for analytes of
interest. CAUTION: No attempts to establish low detection
limits should be made before instrument optimization and
adequate conditioning of both the column and the GC system.
Conditioning includes the processing of LFB and LFM samples
containing moderate concentration levels of these analytes.
121
-------
10.5.4 At least each quarter the laboratory should analyze quality
control samples (QCS) (if available). If criteria provided
with the QCS are not met, corrective action should be taken
and documented.
10.6 Assessing Analyte Recovery - Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix
(LFM)
10.6.1 The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum of
10% of the routine samples or one LFM per set, whichever is
greater. The fortified concentration should not be less than
the background concentration of the sample selected for
fortification. Ideally the LFM concentration should be the
same as that used for the LFB (Sect. 10.5). Periodically,
samples from all routine sample sources should be fortified.
10.6.2 Calculate the percent recovery (R,-) for each analyte,
corrected for background concentrations measured in the
unfortified sample, and compare these values to the control
limits established in Sect. 10.5.2 from the analyses of LFBs.
10.6.3 If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.5), the recovery
problem encountered with the dosed sample is judged to be
matrix related, not system related. The result for that
analyte in the unfortified sample is labeled suspect/matrix
to inform the data user that the results are suspect due to
matrix effects.
10.7 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
use with this method. The specific practices that are most produc-
tive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the
samples. For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements
or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 SAMPLE PREPARATION
11.1.1 Remove samples from storage and allow them to equilibrate to
room temperature.
11.1.2 Remove the container caps. Withdraw and discard a 5-mL
volume using a 10-mL graduated cylinder. Replace the
container caps and weigh the containers with contents to the
nearest 0.1 g and record these weights for subsequent sample
volume determinations (Sect. 11.3).
122
-------
11.2 EXTRACTION AND ANALYSIS
11.2.1 Remove the container cap of each sample, and add 6 g NaCl
(Sect. 7.1.3) to the sample bottle. Using a transfer or
automatic dispensing pipet, add 2.0 ml of hexane. Recap and
shake vigorously by hand for 1 min. Invert the bottle and
allow the water and hexane phases to separate.
11.2.2 Remove the cap and carefully transfer approximately 0.5 ml of
hexane layer into an autosampler vial using a disposable
glass pipet.
11.2.3 Transfer the remaining hexane phase, being careful not to
include any of the water phase, into a second autosampler
vial. Reserve this second vial at 4°C for an immediate
reanalysis if necessary.
11.2.4 Transfer the first sample vial to an autosampler set up to
inject 1-2 fil portions into the gas chromatograph for
analysis (See Sect. 6.9 for GC conditions). Alternately, 1-2
ml portions of samples, blanks, and standards may be manually
injected, although an autosampler is strongly recommended.
11.3 DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE VOLUME IN BOTTLES NOT CALIBRATED
11.3.1 Discard the remaining sample/hexane mixture from the sample
bottle. Shake off the remaining few drops using short, brisk
wrist movements.
11.3.2 Reweigh the empty container with original cap and calculate
the net weight of sample by difference to the nearest 0.1 g
(Sect. 11.1.2 minus Sect. 11.3.2). This net weight (in
grams) is equivalent to the volume (in mL) of water extracted
(Sect. 12.3). By alternately using 40-mL bottles precali-
brated at 35-mL levels, the gravimetric steps can be omitted,
thus increasing the speed and ease of this extraction
process.
11.4 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES
11.4.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram. If
the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds, within
limits, to the retention time of a standard compound, then
identifiction is considered positive.
11.4.2 The width of the retention time window used to make identifi-
cations should be based upon measurements of actual retention
time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three
times the standard deviation of a retention time can be used
to calculate a suggested window size for a compound.
123
-------
However, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily
in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.4.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample compo-
nents are not resolved chromatographically. When peaks
obviously represent more than one sample componenet (i.e.,
broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between two or more
maxima), or any time doubt exists over the identification of
a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate alternative techniques
to help confirm peak identification need be employed. For
example, more positive identification may be made by the use
of an alternative detector which operates on a
chemical/physical principle different from that originally
used, e.g., mass spectrometry, or the use of a second
chromatography column. Suggested alternative columns are
described in Sect. 6.9.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Identify the organohalides in the sample chromatogram by comparing
the retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated
by the calibration standards and the laboratory fortified blanks.
Identify the multicomponent compounds using all peaks that are
characteristic of the specific compound from chromatograms generated
with individual standards. Select the most sensitive and
reproducible peaks to obtain a sum for calculation purposes (See
Table 1).
12.2 Use the single point calibration (Sect. 9.2.4) or use the calibra-
tion curve or calibration factor (Sect. 9.2.3) to directly calculate
the unconnected concentration (Ci) of each analyte in the sample
(e.g., calibration factor x response).
12.3 Calculate the sample volume (Vs) as equal to the net sample weight:
Vs - gross weight (Sect. 11.1.2) - bottle tare (Sect. 11.3.2).
12.4 Calculate the corrected sample concentration as:
Concentration,
pg/L = 35XC,-!
(Vs)
12.5 Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
figures. Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
used for concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
concentrations between 1-99 /tg/L, and 1 significant figure for lower
concentrations.
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision at
several concentrations in reagent, ground, and tap water matrices
124
-------
are presented in Table 2.(11). These results were obtained from
data generated with a DB-1 column.
13.2 This method has been tested by 10 laboratories using reagent water
and groundwater fortified at three concentration levels. Single
operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were
found to be directly related to the concentration of the analyte and
virtually independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to
describe the relationships are presented in Table 3.(12).
14. REFERENCES
1. Glaze, W.W., Lin, C.C., Optimization of Liquid-Liquid Extraction
Methods for Analysis of Organics in Water, EPA-600/S4-83-052, January
1984.
2. Henderson, J.E., Peyton, 6.R. and Glaze, W.H. (1976). In
"Identification and Analysis of Organic Pollutants in Water" (L.H.
Keith ed.), pp. 105-111. Ann Arbor Sci. Publ., Ann Arbor, Michigan.
3. Richard, J.J., Junk, G.A., "Liquid Extraction for Rapid Determination
of Halomethanes in Water," Journal AWWA, 69, 62, January 1977.
4. "Handbook for Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater
Laboratories," EPA-600/4-79-019, U. S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
Ohio, 45268, March 1979.
5. Budde, W.L., Eichelberger, J.W., "Organic Analyses Using Gas
Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry," Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor,
Michigan 1979.
6. Glaser, J.A. et a!., "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environmental
Science and Technology, 15, 1426 (1981).
7. Bellar, T.A., Stemmer, P., Lichtenberg, J.J., "Evaluation of
Capillary Systems for the Analysis of Environmental Extracts,"
EPA-600/S4-84-004, March 1984.
8. "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
9. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
10. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
125
-------
11. Winfield, T., et al. "Analysis of Organohalide Pesticides and
Commercial PCB Products in Drinking Water by.Microextraction and Gas
Chromatography." In preparation.
12. Multilaboratory Method Validation Study #40, conducted by the Quality
Assurance Branch, EMSL-Ci. Report in progress.
126
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Analvte
Retention Time(a), Min
Primary Confirm. 1 Confirm. 2
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 5.5
Simazine 10.9
Atrazine 11.2
Hexachlorobenzene 11.9
Lindane 12.3
Alachlor 15.1
Heptachlor 15.9
Aldrin 17.6
Heptachlor Epoxide 19.0
gamma-Chl ordane 19.9
alpha-Chlordane 20.9
trans-Nonachlor 21.3
Dieldrin 22.1
Endrin 23.2
ci s-NonachTor 24.3
Methoxychlor 30.0
6.8
25.7
22.6
13.4
18.4
19.7
17.5
18.4
24.6
25.9
26.6
24.8
45.1
33.3
39.0
58.5
5.2
19.9
19.6
15.6
18.7
21.1
20.0
21.4
24.6
26.0
26.6
26.3
27.8
29.2
30.4
36.4
Primary(b)
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Chlordane
Toxaphene
13
7.
11
11
14
19
23
15
21
.6,
7,
.2,
.2,
.8,
.1,
.4,
.1,
.7,
14
9.0
14
13
16
21
24
15
22
.8,
, 15
.7,
.6,
.2,
.9,
.9,
• 9,
.5,
15
.9
13
14
17
23
26
20
26
.2,
, 19
.6,
.7,
.1,
.4,
.7,
.1,
.7,
16
.1
15
15
17
24
28
20
27
.2
9
.2
.2
.7
.9
.2
.9
.2
, 17
24.7
, 17
, 17
, 19
, 26
, 29
, 21
.7
.7
.7,
.8,
.7
.9,
.3
19.8
22.0
32.6
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.9.2, 6.9.3,
and 6.9.4.
Column and conditions described in Sect. 6.9.2. More than one peak
listed does not implicate the total number of peaks characteristic of the
multi-component analyte. Listed peaks indicate only the ones chosen for
summation in the quantification.
127
-------
TABLE 2. SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
(MDLS) FOR ANALYTES FROM REAGENT WATER, GROUNDWATER, AND TAP WATER3
Accuracy and Standard Deviation Data
Analvte
Aldrin
Al achl or
Aldrin
Atrazine
alpha-Chlordane
gamma-Chl ordane
Chlordane
Dieldrin
Endrin
Heptachlor
Heptachlor Epoxide
Hexachl orobenzene
0.09
Hexachl orocycl opentadi ene
Lindane
Hethoxychlor
cis-Nonachlor
trans-Nonachlor
Simazine
Toxaphene
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
«q/L
0.075
0.225
0.007
2.4
0.006
0.012
0.14
0.012
0.063
0.003
0.004
0.002
103
0.13
0.003
0.96
0.027
0.011
6.8
1.0
0.08
15.0
0.48
0.31
0.102
0.102
0.189
Concen-
tration*
IM/L
0.15
0.50
0.05
5.0
20.0
0.06
0.35
0.06
0.35
0.17
3.4
0.10
3.6
0.10
3.6
0.032
1.2
0.04
1.4
0.003
6.6
0.15
0.35
0.03
1.2
2.10
7.03
0.06
0.45
0.06
0.35
25
60
10
80
1.0
180
3.9
4.7
3.6
3.4
1.8
1.7
2.0
1.8
Reagent Water
R* SRd
86
102
106
85
95
95
86
95
86
NA
NA
87
114
119
99
77
80
100
115
104
101
73
73
91
111
100
98
110
82
95
86
99
65
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
-
NA
-
NA
NA
9.5
13.4
20.0
16.2
5.2
3.5
17.0
0.4
18.5
8.0
3.6
17.1
9.1
29.8
6.5
10.2
7.4
15.6
6.6
13.5
4.4
5.1
11.7
6.5
5.0
21.0
10.9
15.2
21.3
9.6
•21.8
8.3
3.6
12.6
15.3
6.6
8.3
13.5
6.0
11.5
-
10.4
-
20.7
-
Groundwater
R S»
100
_
86
95
86
83
94
86
95
— ••
—
67
94
94
100
37
71
90
103
91
88
87
69
88
109
-
_
101
93
83
94
97
59
-
-
-
-
-
_
_
-
-
_
_
-
11.0
_
16.3
7.3
9.1
4.4
10.2
5.3
14.5
. —
_
10.1
8.6
20.2
11.3
6.8
9.8
14.2
6.9
10.9
13.4
5.1
4.8
7.7
3.4
-
_
7.2
18.3
7.1
17.2
9.2
18.0
-
-
_
_
_
_
_
_
—
—
_
-
Tap
R
69
_
_
108
91
85
91
83
91
105
95
92
81
106
85
200
106
112
81
100
191
109
103
93
-
_
93
87
73
86
102
67
110
114
97
92
86
96
_
84
_
85
_
88
Water
SR
9.0
_
_
10.9
3.1
7.1
2.4
14.7
6.0
12.4
9.6
15.7
14.0
14.0
12.4
22.6
16.8
7.5
5.9
15.6
18.5
14.3
8.1
18.4
-
_
14.3
5.4
4.1
5.1
13.4
6.2
9.5
13.5
7.5
9.6
7.3
7.4
_
9.9
_
11.8
_
19.8
128
-------
Table 2 (Continued)
NA = Not applicable. A separate set of aqueous standards was not analyzed,
and the response factor for reagent water was used to calculate a recovery for
the tap water matrix.
aData corrected for amount detected in blank and represent the mean of 5-8
samples.
= method detection limit in sample in /ig/L; calculated by multiplying
standard deviation (S) times the students' t value appropriate for a 99%
confidence level and a standard deviation estimate with n-1 degrees of
freedom.
CR = average percent recovery.
dSR = Standard deviation about percent recovery.
* Refers to concentration levels used to generate R and SR data for the three
types of water Matrices, not for MDL determinations.
- No analyses conducted.
129
-------
Ul
CD
co
IU
c
o
*o .— »
0) _J
r—
t.
O
•M
>> «.
"J5
c c
r-»r- O>
C 0> *-_rJ
f- t-
CO Q.
(A
«BX
S- > C7>
3 O 51
u oCi
u o>
«CQi
Q)
sl^
goe-j
•**• • o>
r— O 53.
o. o
.
O CM
CM CM
CD O
CM CD
in CD
CO CD
IX IX
at co
* 0
O i-i
0 O
to
•«*• CD
• •
CM CO
en CM
CO 0
fV t -
V>J »***
CD CO
in •
1 CD
in i
in r-i
o
F-J O
a>
c
0)
Nl
C
CD
1-1
O
Simazine
Hexachlor
o to
O I-H
0 CD
IX ,X
CM in
^t CD
i-H i-H
O* CD
•-H CD
O l-H
0 0
I J , J
in (>.
0 0
O 0
O CO
CD 0
CD CD
1 1
O 0
en «*•
0 0
0 0
_
f^, O
en in
co
i-H CO
^J- o
CD in
o o
Lindane
Alachlor
CM O
0 0
r— I to
CM CM
0 CD
r-l CM
O O
0 0
,x ,x
f1^ l-H
O CO
•-H O
0 CD
CM O
0 0
CD* CD
CM tO
o to
O O
1—1 I-H
•—I CM
*s- <*•
O O
o o
s_
Heptachlol
Aldrin
CM CM
0 0
0 O
IX IX
'Js 'Z5
en co
CM en
0 CD
CM i-H
0 0
o o
IX IX
CM I-H
co cn
0 0
0 0
CD O
CD O
• •
^^ C^J
O 0
CM r»»
in CM
cn o
CD I-H
CM CO
•<*• in
i t
0 I-H
0 0
O)
T3
X
O
Q.
Cy
c_
Heptachlol
Dieldrin
CM
0
O
IX
to
co
o
1— 1
CD
O
IX
to
I-H
I— 1
CD
I— 1
CD
958C+0.
o
o
in
0
r-l
O
c
si
•o
LU
O O)
CM r-H
0 0
IX IX
in in
CM CM
O CD
CM tO
rH CD
O O
IX IX
m •«*•
—i CO
i-H O
O 0
in to
•-I O
d o
o o
o i--
in co
Ot O
0 ~
o o
o en
i i
O ft
CM in
o o
S-
o
Methoxychi
Chlordane
en
to
o
to
CM
O
i-H
O
IX
r— 1
CO
r-H
CD
CM
'0+3Z80
t— i
O
CD
1
CO
to
m
Toxaphene
in
CD
»-H
CD
r— 1
CO
CD
IX
to
o
r— 1
CD
r-H
CO
856C+0.
CD
CD
CO
en
CD
in
0
to
r—t
O
I-H
CO
o
Q.
in
o
o
IX
1—4
29
CM
CD
i— 1
CD
IX
CM
CM
CD
r— 1
O
CD
CM
00
CD
CD
CD
in
i
o
in
o
in
CM
I-H
CO
o
Q.
•o
0)
4->
.*=
u
•r—
1
£
•o
•*->
£
O
i.
o
(0
r—
1
=J
0>
O
2
ro
U
•i—
cx
ex
re
o>
ro
s-
c
o
•p-
ro
S_
**•*
C
O)
u
o
u
1—
130
-------
« ?! 1'
. O
u _«•»
8 I-
Z-T»— ••
°5ca ae
•• ^^
•o »/»»-•
01 ••> >
S«/> Z UJ
U. *C 3"£ Z
oil •-« o
llzi
O •"• ** O ' ,
sp/q&piv utjpug
dU9ZUdQOJtOTlfOH^
JOIlJOBdoJ^
.
«
.'
j
1 •
J .
• J
^ .
^
r
1
3
1 -
1
^> „
caH ^ •
• *
1.
J-
4.
1
•
n j2 ® **•
•* ••" 9
82 *****
eL £" "
S ^ * •"°
** *
M * £
W ==IS J5
O a « JB
8 » 3 S
»• 2 a.
a ?.5k
« * -o
a l^s
c o^ •
JI 3 *•
C o
Al ^-
8zSis
£f N e
8^|lc
s^^li
5 U "
* *2c
s 111
f^-£"°
•wlo^
o «5|
•»• -^-i
ft» 3r-T
x «5;
V
3
131
-------
COLUMN: Fused silica capillary
LIQUID PHASE: 06-1
FILM THICKNESS:. l.Oum
COLUMN DIMENSIONS: 0.32mm ID,
30 M long
els
•g
1
i
N
Ki
O N
1 I
Figure 2.
10 15 20
TIME (MBO
25
30
35
Extract of reagent water spiked at 20 wg/L with atrazlne,
60 ug/L with slmazlne, 0.45 uo/L with cis-nonachlor, and
0.35 ug/L with hexachlorocyclopentadlene,, heptachlor,
alpha chlordane, gamma chlordane, and trans-nonachlor.
132
-------
I
R
£ o-
r~ ••»
I .1
s
IB
••o
0-IU.O
M
133'
-------
134
-------
! J
§"•!«••»•
«*• OD «/»
MO K
•• O
3
e
i
*
in
t
135
-------
o.
3
«•«/»
»-o
O-JU.
ft
8
3
8
2
ac ».
2
v* in
"5.
136
-------
I
c
*
(/)*-•
•I
i
N
n
a-
M
*
2!
§.
137
-------
ex.
8
T» t/)
f> •• t/>
MUJ iu
5* »MA !S"
3S5S
O »-• t-»o
I
.u
N
s
g
CM
X
o>
00
£
138
-------
I
* »
m e
ft
.8 £
•4
e
i
139
-------
I
a:
*
u
s 1°
T> «/»«—
V ••) t/>
M
s»
-j--j
o •-«»-> o
n~
•
-------
I
*»
1C
ft
•
8*
5
*
S
e« 2!
§.
II
141
-------
-------
METHOD 507. DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN- AND PHOSPHORUS-CONTAINING PESTICIDES
IN WATER BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH A NITROGEN-PHOSPHORUS DETECTOR
Revision 2.0
T. Engels (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
Method 1, Revision 1.0 (1987)
R. L. Graves - Method 507, Revision 2.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
143
-------
METHOD 507
DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN-AND PHOSPHORUS-CONTAINING PESTICIDES IN WATER
BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH A NITROGEN-PHOSPHORUS DETECTOR
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the
determination of certain nitrogen- and phosphorus-containing
pesticides in ground water and finished drinking water. (1) The
following compounds can be determined using this method:
Analvte
Chemical Abstract Services
Registry Number
Alachlor 15972-60-8
Ametryn 834-12-8
Atraton 1610-17-9
Atrazine 1912-24-9
Bromacil 314-40-9
Butachlor 23184-66-9
Butyl ate 2008-41-5
Carboxin 5234-68-5
Chlorpropham 101-21-3
Cycloate 1134-23-2
Diazinon(a)* 333-41-5
Dichlorvos 62-73-7
Diphenamid 957-51-7
Disulfoton* . 298-04-4
Disulfoton sulfone* 2497-06-5
Disulfoton sulfoxide(a) 2497-07-6
EPTC 759-94-4
Ethoprop 13194-48-4
Fenamiphos 22224-92-6
Fenarimol 60168-88-9
Fluridone 59756-60-4
Hexazinone 51235-04-2
Merphos* 150-50-5
Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6
Metolachlor 51218-45-2
Metribuzin 21087-64-9
Mevinphos 7786-34-7
MGK 264- 113-48-4
Molinate 2212-67-1
Napropamide 15299-99-7
Norflurazon 27314-13-2
Pebulate 1114-71-2
Prometon 1610-18-0
Prometryn 7287-19-6
Pronamide(a)* 23950-58-5
Propazine 139-40-2
Simazine 122-34-9
Simetryn 1014-70-6
Stirofos 22248-79-9
Tebuthiuron 34014-18-1
144
-------
Terbacil 5902-51-2
Terbufos(a)* 13071-79-9
Terbutryn 886-50-0
Triademefon 43121-43-3
Tricyclazole 41814-78-2
Vernolate 1929-77-7
(a) Compound exhibits aqueous instability. Samples for which this
compound is an analyte of interest must be extracted
immediately (Sections 11.1 through 11.3).
* These compounds are only qualitatively identified in the
National Pesticides Survey (NPS) Program. These compounds are
not quantitated because control over precision has not been
accomplished.
1.2 This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
(Sect. 13). Observed detection limits may vary among waters,
depending upon the nature, of interferences in the sample matrix and
the specific instrumentation used.
1.3 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of
gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to
generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure
described in Sect. 10.3.
1.4 Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, i.e., analytes
which have very similar retention times, cannot be individually
identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
sample unless an alternative technique for identification and
quantitation exist (Section 11.5).
1.5 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
all of the analytes above, analyte identifications should be
confirmed by at least one additional qualitative technique.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 A measured volume of sample of approximately 1 L is extracted with
methylene chloride by shaking in a separatory funnel or mechanical
tumbling in a bottle. The methylene chloride extract is isolated,
dried .and concentrated to a volume of 5 ml during a solvent exchange
to methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE). Chromatographic conditions are
described which permit the separation and measurement of the
analytes in the extract by Capillary Column GC with a nitrogen-
phosphorus detector (NPD).
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
145
-------
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with.other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage, preserva-
tion and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB is to
determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in
the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) -- An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
146
-------
3.10 Stock standard solution -- A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.
All reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
from interferences under the conditions of the analysis, by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.
4.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned. (2) Clean all glass-
ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
the last solvent used in it. Follow by washing with hot
water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap and reagent
water. Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at
400°C for 1 hour. Do not heat volumetric ware. Thermally
stable materials might not be eliminated by this treatment.
Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted for the
heating. After drying and cooling, seal and store glassware
in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or
other contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum
foil.
4.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by
distillation in all-glass systems may be required. WARNING:
When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer may be removed thus potentially making the
solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified,
preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
147
-------
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a
sample containing relatively high concentrations of analytes.
Between-sample rinsing of the sample syringe and associated
equipment with MTBE can minimize sample cross contamination. After
analysis of a sample containing high concentrations of analytes, one
or more injections of MTBE should be made to ensure that accurate
values are obtained for the next sample.
4.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are
coextracted from the sample. Also, note that all the analytes
listed in the scope and application section are not resolved from
each other on any one column, i.e., one analyte of interest may be
an interferant for another analyte of interest. The extent of
matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source,
depending upon the water sampled. Further processing of sample
extracts may be necessary. Positive Identifications should be
confirmed (Sect. 11.5).
4.4 It is important that samples and working standards be contained in
the same solvent. The solvent for working standards must be the
same as the final solvent used in sample preparation. If this is
not the case, chromatographic comparability of standards to sample
may be affected.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogen!city of each reagent used in this method
has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
be treated as a potential health hazard. Accordingly, exposure to
these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level. The
laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data
sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified (3-5) for the information of
the analyst.
5.2 WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer may be removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All specifications are suggested. Catalog
numbers are included for illustration only.)
6.1 Sample bottle — Borosilicate, 1-L volume with graduations (Wheaton
Media/Lab bottle 219820 or equivalent), fitted with screw caps lined
with TFE-fluorocarbon. Protect samples from light. The container
must be washed and dried as described in Sect. 4.1.1 before use to
minimize contamination. Cap liners are cut to fit from sheets
(Pierce Catalog No. 012736 or equivalent) and extracted with
methanol overnight prior to use.
148
-------
6.2 GLASSWARE
6.2.1 Separatory funnel — 2000-mL, with TFE-fluorocarbon stopcock,
ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stopper.
6.2.2 Tumbler bottle — 1.7-L (Wheaton Roller Culture Vessel or
equivalent), with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap. Cap
liners are cut to fit from sheets (Pierce Catalog No. 012736)
and extracted with methanol overnight prior to use.
6.2.3 Flask, Erlenmeyer — 500-mL.
6.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D) — 10- or 25-mL,
graduated (Kontes K-570050-2525 or K-570050-1025 or
equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes
employed in the test. Ground glass stoppers are used to
prevent evaporation of extracts.
6.2.5 Evaporative flask, K-D — 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
6.2;6 Snyder column, K-D — Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121
or equivalent).
6.2.7 Snyder column, K-D — Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
equivalent).
6.2.8 Vials — glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
lined screw cap.
6.3 Separatory funnel shaker (Optional) — Capable of holding 2-L
separatory funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve
thorough mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from
Eberbach Co. in Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).
6.4 Tumbler — Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg. Co.,
Alexandria, VA. or other suppliers).
6.5 Boiling stones — Carborundum, #12 granules (Arthur H. Thomas Co.
#1590-033 or equivalent). Heat at 400°C for 30 min prior to use.
Cool and store in desiccator.
6.6 Water bath — Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C). The
bath should be used in a hood.
6.7 Balance — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.8 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
detector and stripchart recorder. A data system is recommended for
measuring peak areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for
149
-------
method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
described below.
6.8.1 Column 1 (Primary column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
bonded fused silica column, 0.25 /zm film thickness (J&W
Scientific) or equivalent. Helium carrier gas flow is
established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature
is programmed from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min. Data presented
in this method were obtained using this column. The
injection volume was 2 0L in splitless mode with a 45 s
delay. The injector temperature was 250°C and the detector
temperature was 300°C. Alternative columns may be used in
accordance with the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.
6.8.2 Column 2 (Confirmation column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm
I.D.DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film
thickness (J&W Scientific) or equivalent. Helium carrier gas
flow is established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven
temperature is programmed from 60C to 300°C at 4°C/min.
6.8.3, Detector — Nitrogen-phosphorus (NPD). A NPD was used to
generate the validation data presented in this method.
Alternative detectors, including a mass spectrometer, may be
used in accordance with the provisions described in Sect.
10.4.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING: When a solvent is
purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially reducing the shelflife.
7.1 Acetone, methylene chloride, methyl tert.-butyl ether (MTBE) --
Distilled-in-glass quality or equivalent.
7.2 Phosphate buffer, pH 7 — Prepare by mixing 29.6 ml 0.1 N HC1 and 50
ml 0.1 M dipotassium phosphate.
7.3 Sodium chloride (NaCl), crystal, ACS grade — Heat treat in a
shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
organic substances.
7.4 Sodium sulfate, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade — Heat treat in a
shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
organic substances.
7.5 Sodium thiosulfate, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade.
7.6 Triphenylphosphate (TPP) — 98% purity, for use as internal standard
(available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).
7.7 l,3-Dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene — 98% purity, for use as surrogate
standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).
150
-------
7.8 Mercuric Chloride — ACS grade (Aldrich Chemical Co.) - for use as a
bactericide. If any other bactericide can be shown to work as well
as mercuric chloride, it may be used instead.
7.9 Reagent water — Reagent water is defined as a water that is
reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
determination of any analyte of interest. Reagent water used to
generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.
7.10 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 /jg/juL) — Stock standard solutions
may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
standard materials using the following procedure:
7.10.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
approximately 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the
material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. The stock solution for simazine should be prepared in
methanol. Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of
the analyst. If compound purity is certified at 96% or
greater, the weight may be used without correction to
calculate the concentration of the stock standard.
Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any
concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by
an independent source.
7.10.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into
TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap amber vials. Store at room
temperature and protect from light.
7.10.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
QC samples indicate a problem.
7.11 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare the internal standard solution
by accurately weighing approximately 0.0500 g of pure TPP. Dissolve
the TPP in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 100-mL volumetric flask.
Transfer the internal standard solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed
screw cap bottle and store at room temperature. Addition of 50 #L
of the internal standard solution to 5 mL of sample extract results
in a final TPP concentration of 5.0 /zg/mL. Solution should be
replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem. Note that
TPP has been shown to be an effective internal standard for the
method analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality
control requirements in Sect. 10 are met.
7.12 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare the surrogate standard
solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0250 g of pure
l,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene. Dissolve the 1,3-dimethyl-
2-nitrobenzene in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 100-mL volumetric
flask. Transfer the surrogate standard solution to a
TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at room
temperature. Addition of 50 #L of the surrogate standard solution
to a 1-L sample prior to extraction results in a 1,3-dimethyl-
2-nitrobenzene concentration in the sample of 12.5 /jg/L. Solution
should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.
151
-------
Note that l,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene has been shown to be an
effective surrogate standard for the method analytes (1), but other
compounds may be used if the quality control requirements in Sect.
10 are met.
7.13 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare the laboratory
performance check solution by adding 5 /tL of the vernolate stock
solution, 0.5 mL of the bromacil stock solution, 30 jttL of the
prometon stock solution, 15 /*L of the atrazine stock solution, 1.0
mL of the surrogate solution, and 500 (j.1 of the internal standard
solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with MTBE
and thoroughly mix the solution. Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-
sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature. Solution
should be replaced when ongoing QC (Section 10) indicates a problem.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional
sampling practices (6) should be followed; however, the bottle must
not be prerinsed with sample before collection.
8.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND STORAGE
8.2.1 Add mercuric chloride (See 7.8) to the sample bottle in
amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L. Add 1 mL of a
solution containing 10 mg/mL of mercuric chloride in reagent
water to the sample bottle at the sampling site or in the
laboratory before shipping to the sampling site. A major
disadvantage of mercuric chloride is that it is a highly
toxic chemical; mercuric chloride must be handled with
caution, and samples containing mercuric chloride must be
disposed of properly.
8.2.2 If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
collecting the sample.
8.2.3 After the sample is collected in a bottle containing
preservative(s), seal the bottle and shake vigorously for
1 min.
8.2.4 The samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C away from
light from the time of collection until extraction. Pre-
servation study results indicated that most method analytes
present in samples were stable for 14 days when stored under
these conditions. (1). The analytes disulfoton sulfoxide,
diazinon, pronamide, and terbufos exhibited significant
aqueous instability, and samples to be analyzed for these
compounds must be extracted immediately. The analytes
carboxin, EPTC, fluridone, metolachlor, napropamide,
tebuthiuron, and terbacil exhibited recoveries of less than
60% after 14 days. Analyte stability may be affected by the
matrix; therefore, the analyst should verify that the
preservation technique is applicable to the samples under
study.
152
-------
8.3 Extract Storage — Extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light.
Preservation study results indicate that most analytes are stable
for 28 days; however, a 14-day maximum extract storage time is
recommended. The analyst should verify appropriate extract holding
times applicable to the samples under study.
9. CALIBRATION
9.1 Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.8. The GC system may be calibrated using either the
internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
technique (Sect. 9.3). Be aware that NPDs may exhibit instability
(i.e., fail to hold calibration curves over time). The analyst may,
when analyzing samples for target analytes which are very rarely
found, prefer to analyze on a daily basis a low level (e.g. 5 to 10
times detection limit or 1/2 times the regulatory limit, whichever
is less), sample (containing all analytes of interest) and require
some minimum sensitivity (e.g. 1/2 full scale deflection) to show
that if the analyte were present it would be detected. The analyst
may then quantitate using single point calibration (Sect. 9.2.5 or
9.3.4). NOTE: Calibration standard solutions must be prepared such
that no unresolved analytes are mixed together.
9.2 INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE — To use this approach, the
analyst must select one or more internal standards compatible in
analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must
further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is
not affected by method or matrix interferences. TPP has been
identified as a suitable internal standard.
9.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
a volumetric flask. If Merphos is to be determined, calibrate
with DEF (S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-trithioate). To each
calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or
more of the internal standards, and dilute to volume with
MTBE. The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs. The
remaining standards should bracket the analyte concentrations
expected in the sample extracts, or should define the working
range of the detector.
9.2.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
described in Sect. 11.4. Tabulate response (peak height or
area) against concentration for each compound and internal
standard. Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.
RF = s is Equation 1
(Ais)(Cs)
where :
As = Response for the analyte.
153
-------
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Cis = Concentration of the internal standard /*g/L.
Cs = Concentration of the analyte to be measured jug/L.
9.2.3 If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
or less) the average RF can be used for calculations.
Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios (As/Ais) vs. Cs.
9.2.4 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
standards. If the response for any analyte varies from the
predicted response by more than ±20%, the test must be
repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If the
repetition also fails, a new calibration curve must be
generated for that analyte using freshly prepared standards.
9.2.5 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standard should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
9.2.6 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
9.3 EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
9.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
more stock standards to a volumetric flask. If Merphos is to
be determined, calibrate with DEF (S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-
trithioate). Dilute to volume with MTBE. The lowest
standard should represent analyte concentrations near, but
above, their respective EDLs. The remaining standards should
bracket the analyte concentrations expected in the sample
extracts, or should define the working range of the detector.
9.3.2 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.4 and
tabulate response (peak height or area) versus the
concentration in the standard. The results can be used to
prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
(20% RSD or less), linearity through the origin can be
assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
used in place of a calibration curve.
154
-------
9.3.3 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
one at the end of the analysis day. These check standards
should be at two different concentration levels to verify the
calibration curve. For extended periods of analysis (greater
than 8 hrs.), it is strongly recommended that check standards
be interspersed with samples at regular intervals during the
course of the analyses. If the response for any analyte
varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve.
9.3.4 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standard should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
9.3.5 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
10, QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
of laboratory capability, determination of surrogate compound
recoveries in each sample and blank, monitoring internal standard
peak area or height in each sample and blank (when internal standard
calibration procedures are being employed), analysis of laboratory
reagent blanks, laboratory fortified samples, laboratory fortified
blanks, and QC samples.
10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks. Before processing any samples, the
analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent
interferences are under control. Each time a set of samples is
extracted or reagents are changed, a LRB must be analyzed. If
within the retention time window of any analyte of interest the LRB
produces a peak that would prevent the determination of that
analyte, determine the source of contamination and eliminate the
interference before processing samples.
10.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability.
10.3.1 Select a representative fortified concentration (about 10
times EDL or at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level,
whichever is lower) for each analyte. Prepare a sample
concentrate (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000
times selected concentration. With a syringe, add 1 mL of
the concentrate to each of at least four 1-L aliquots of
reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to
procedures beginning in Sect. 11.
155
-------
10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ± 3SR
if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent water
in Table 2. For those compounds that meet the acceptance
criteria, performance is considered acceptable and sample
analysis may begin. For those compounds that fail these
criteria, this procedure must be repeated using four fresh
samples until satisfactory performance has been demonstrated.
10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown sample's via a
new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
with it. It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
experience with this method the quality of data will improve
beyond those required here.
10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC detectors, GC
conditions, continuous extraction techniques, concentration
techniques (i.e. evaporation techniques), internal standards or
surrogate compounds. Each time such method modifications are made,
the analyst must repeat the procedures in Sect. 10.3.
10.5 Assessing Surrogate Recovery
10.5.1 When surrogate recovery from a sample or method blank is <70%
or >130%, check (1) calculations to locate possible errors,
(2) fortifying solutions for degradation, (3) contamination,
and (4) instrument performance. If those steps do not reveal
the cause of the problem, reanalyze the extract.
10.5.2 If a blank extract reanalysis fails the 70-130% recovery
criterion, the problem must be identified and corrected
before continuing.
10.5.3 If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
criterion, report only data for the reanalyzed extract. If
sample extract reanalysis continues to fail the recovery
criterion, report all data for that sample as suspect.
10.6 Assessing the Internal Standard
10.6.1 When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
peak height) of all samples during each analysis day. The IS
response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate from
the daily calibration check standard's IS response by more
than 30%.
10.6.2 If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract, optimize
instrument performance and inject a second aliquot of that
extract.
10.6.2.1 If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
internal standard response report results for that
aliquot.
156
-------
10.6.2.2 If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
the reinjected extract, analysis of the sample
should be repeated beginning with Sect. 11,
provided the sample is still available. Otherwise,
report results obtained from the reinjected
extract, but annotate as suspect.
10.6.3 If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.
10.6.3.1 If the check standard provides a response factor
(RF) within 20% of the predicted value, then follow
procedures itemized in Sect. 10.6.2 for each sample
failing the IS response criterion.
10.6.3.2 If the check standard provides a response factor
which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
value, then the analyst must recalibrate, as
specified in Sect. 9.
10.7 Assessing Laboratory Performance - Laboratory Fortified Blank
10.7.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory fortified
blank (LFB) sample with every twenty samples or one per
sample set (all samples extracted within a 24-h period)
whichever is greater. The fortified concentration of each
analyte in the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL,
whichever is less. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery
(X-)- If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the
control limits (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged out
of control, and the source of the problem should be
identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
10.7.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory performance
against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that are derived
from the data in Table 2. When sufficient internal
performance data becomes available, develop control limits
from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard deviation (S)
of the percent recovery. These data are used to establish
upper and lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = X + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT = X - 3S
After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new control
limits should be calculated using only the most recent 20-30
data points. These calculated control limits should never
exceed those established in Sect. 10.3.2.
10.7.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically determine
and document its detection limit capabilities for analytes of
interest.
157
-------
10.7.4 At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
source.
source.
10.7.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
certification programs offered by many states or the studies
conducted by USEPA. Performance evaluation studies serve as
independent checks on the analyst's performance.
10.8 Assessing Analyte Recovery - Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix
10.8.1 The laboratory must add' a known concentration to a minimum of
5% of the routine samples or one sample concentration per
set, whichever is greater. The fortified concentration
should not be less then the background concentration of the
sample selected for fortification. Ideally, the
concentration should be the same as that used for the
laboratory fortified blank (Sect. 10.7). Over time, samples
from all routine sample sources should be fortified.
10.8.2 Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X, from
the fortified sample for the background concentration, b,
measured in the unfortified sample, I.e.',:
P - 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,
and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
reagent water data collected in the same fashion. If the
analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO background
concentrations, and the added concentrations are those
specified in Sect. 10.7, then the appropriate control limits
would be the acceptance limits in Sect. 10.7. If, on the
other hand, the analyzed unfortified sample is found to
contain background concentration, b, estimate the. standard
deviation at the background concentration, sb, using
regressions or comparable background data and, similarly,
estimate the mean, Xa and standard deviation, s , of
analytical results at' the total concentration after
fortifying.. Then the appropriate percentage control limits
would be P ± 3sp , where:
P = 100 X / (b + fortifying concentration)
and sp = 100 (sa + sb f /fortifying concentration
For example, if the background concentration for Analyte A
was found to be 1 /*g/L and the added amount was also 1 ug/L,
and upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
1.6 /j/L, then the calculated P for this sample would be (1 6
lig/l minus 1.0 0g/L)/l /fg/L or 60%. This calculated P is
compared to control limits derived from prior reagent water
data. Assume it is known that analysis of an interference
free sample at 1 /jg/L yields an s of 0.12 #g/L and similar
analysis at 2.0 /tg/L yields X and s of 2.01 /jg/L and 0.20
158
-------
/jg/L, respectively. The appropriate limits to judge the
reasonableness of the percent recovery, 60%, obtained on the
fortified matrix sample is computed as follows:
[100 (2.01 fig/I) I 2.0 pg/L]
1/2
±3 (100) [(0.12 fig/I)2 + (0.20 jug/L)2] / 1,0 /jg/L =
100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =
100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.
10.9 ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK (LPC) -
Instrument performance should be monitored on a daily basis by
analysis of the LPC sample. The LPC sample contains compounds
designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance. LPC
sample components and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
Inability to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance indicates
the need for reevaluation of the instrument system. The sensitivity
requirements are set based on the EDLs published in this method. If
laboratory EDLs differ from those listed in this method,
concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must be
adjusted to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.
10.10 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
use with this method. The specific practices that are most
productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements
or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 EXTRACTION (MANUAL METHOD)
11.1.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.1.6). Add
preservative to blanks and QC check standards. Fortify the
sample with 50 (JtL of the surrogate standard solution. Pour
the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
11.1.2 Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 mL of phosphate
buffer.
11.1.3 Add 100 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.1.4 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and
shake 30 s to rinse the inner walls. Transfer the solvent to
the separatory funnel and extract the sample by vigorously
shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release
excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from
the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion
interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
159
-------
the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum
technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
filtration of the emulsion through glass wool,
centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the
methylene chloride extract in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
11.1.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample
bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a
third extraction in the same manner.
11.1.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest
5 ml.
11.2 EXTRACTION (AUTOMATED METHOD) — Data presented in this method were
generated using the automated extraction procedure with the
mechanical tumbler.
11.2.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.2.6). Add
preservative to blanks and QC check standards. Fortify the
sample with 50 ill of the surrogate standard solution. If the
mechanical separatory funnel shaker is used, pour the entire
sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. If the mechanical
tumbler is used, pour the entire sample into a tumbler
bottle.
11.2.2 Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 ml of phosphate
buffer.
11.2.3 Add 100 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.2.4 Add 300 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and
shake 30 s to rinse the inner walls. Transfer the solvent to
the sample contained in the separatory funnel or tumbler
bottle, seal, and shake for 10 s, venting periodically.
Repeat shaking and venting until pressure release is not
observed. Reseal and place sample container in appropriate
mechanical mixing device (separatory funnel shaker or
tumbler). Shake or tumble the sample for 1 hour. Complete
mixing of the organic and aqueous phases should be observed
within about 2 min after starting the mixing device.
11.2.5 Remove the sample container from the mixing device. If the
tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-L
separatory funnel. Allow the organic layer to separate from
the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion
interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum
technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
filtration through glass wool, centrifugation, or other
160
-------
physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in
a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
11.2.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest
5 ml.
11.3 EXTRACT CONCENTRATION
11.3.1 Assemble a K-D concentrator by attaching a 25-mL concentrator
tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration
devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D if the
requirements of Sect.. 10.3 are met.
11.3.2 Dry the extract by pouring it through a solvent-rinsed drying
column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
Collect the extract in the K-D concentrator, and rinse the
column with 20-30 ml methylene chloride. Alternatively, add
about 5 g anhydrous sodium sulfate to the extract in the
Erlenmeyer flask; swirl flask to dry extract and allow to sit
for 15 min. Decant the methylene chloride extract into the
K-D concentrator. Rinse the remaining sodium sulfate with
two 25-mL portions of methylene chloride and decant the
rinses into the K-D concentrator.
11.3.3 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask and
attach a macro Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by
adding about 1 mL methylene chloride to the top. Place the
K-D apparatus on a hot water bath, 65 to 70°C, so that the
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and
the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with
hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and
the water temperature as required to complete the
concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of
distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter,
but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of
liquid reaches 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
drain and cool for at least 10 min.
11.3.4 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower
joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of MTBE. Add
5-10 mL of MTBE and a fresh boiling stone. Attach a
micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet the
column by adding about 0.5 mL of MTBE to the top. Place the
micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water
temperature as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10
min. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 2 mL, remove
the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to drain and cool.
Add 5-10 mL MTBE to the micro K-D and reconcentrate to 2 mL.
Remove the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to drain and
cool. Remove the micro Snyder column, and rinse the walls of
the concentrator tube while adjusting the volume to 5.0 mL
with MTBE. NOTE: If methylene chloride is not completely
161
-------
removed from the final extract, it may cause detector
problems.
11.3.5 Transfer extract to an appropriate- sized TFE-fluorocarbon-
sealed screw-cap vial and store, refrigerated at 4°C, until
analysis by GC-NPD.
11.4 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
11.4.1 Sect. 6.8 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for
the gas chromatograph. Included in Table 1 are retention
times observed using this method. Other GC columns,
chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.
11.4.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.
standards and extracts must be in MTBE.
The
11.4.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, add
50 fiL of the internal standard solution to the sample
extract, seal, and shake to distribute the internal standard.
11.4.4 Inject 2 fil of the sample extract.
size in area units.
Record the resulting peak
11.4.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the
system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
11.5 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES
11.5.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram. If
the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds, within
limits, to the retention time of a standard compound, then
identification is considered positive.
11.5.2 The width of the retention time window used to make
identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
retention time variations of standards over the course of a
day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time
can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
compound. However, the experience of the analyst should
weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.5.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically. When peaks
obviously represent more than one sample component (i.e.,
broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between two or more
maxima), or any time doubt exists over the identification of
a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate alternative techniques
to help confirm peak identification, need be employed. For
example, more positive identification may be made by the use
of an alternative detector which operates on a
chemical/physical principle different from that originally
used, e.g., mass spectrometry, or the use of a second
162
-------
chromatography column. A suggested alternative column is
described in Sect. 6.8.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response
for the analyte using the calibration procedure described in Sect.
9.
12.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the concentration (C) in the sample using the response factor (RF)
determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2, or determine sample
concentration from the calibration curve.
C (/*g/L) - * Equation 2
(Ais)(RF)(Vo)
where:
As = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
L = Amount of internal standard added to each extract
S
Vo = Volume of water extracted (L).
12.3 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the amount of material injected from the peak response using the
calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Sect. 9.3.2.
The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from
Equation 3.
Equation 3
where:
A = Amount of material injected (ng) .
Vj = Volume of extract injected (/iL) .
Vt = Volume of total extract (juL) .
Vs = Vol ume of water extracted (ml) .
13. PRECISION AND ACCURACY
13.1 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
determined at five concentration levels. Results were used to
determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range. (1) Analytes
were divided into five groups for recovery studies. Analyte EDLs
163
-------
and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the percent
recoveries at one Concentration are given in Table 2.
13.2 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level
Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
different ground water matrices.(1) Analyte recoveries from the
two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.
14. REFERENCES
1. National Pesticide Survey Method No. 1: Determination of Nitrogen-
and Phosphorus-Containing Pesticides in Groundwater by Gas
Chromatography with a Nitrogen-Phosphorus Detector.
t
2. ASTH Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
"Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
3. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.
4. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
5. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
6. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
"Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
164
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Analyte
Retention Time8
Col. 1 Col. ;
l,3-Dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene(surrogate)
Dichlorvos
Disulfoton sulfoxide
Butyl ate
Mevinphos
Vernolate
Pebulate
Tebuthiuron
Molinate
Ethoprop
Cycloate
Chi orpropham
Atraton
Simazine
Prometon
Atrazine
Propazine
Terbufos
Pronamide
Diazinon
Disulfoton
Terbacil
Metribuzin
Methyl paraoxon
Simetryn
Alachlor
Ametryn
Prometryn
Terbutryn
Bromacil
Metolachlor
Triademefon
MGK 264 (c)
Diphenamid
Stirofos
Disulfoton sulfone
Butachlor
Fenamiphos
Napropamide
Tricyclazole
Merphos (d)
Carboxin
Norflurazon
Triphenyl phosphate (int. std.)
14.48
16.54
19.08
20.07
22.47
22.51
22.94
23.41
25.15
25.66
28.58
28.58
29.09
31.26
31.49
31.58
31.77
32.01
32.57
32.76
33.23
33.42
33.79
35.20
35.58
35.72
35.96
36.00
36.14
36.80
37.22
37.74
38.12
38.73
38.87
41.27
41.31
41.45
41.78
41.83
42.25
42.35
42.77
45.92
47
(b)
15.35
/ l_ \
(b)
16.57
18.47
21.92
19.25
19.73
42.77
A A m -7
22.47
26.42
29.67
(b)
29.97
31.32
30
A i • /\f\
31.23
A 1 1 ^
31.13
(b)
32.63
/ 1 \
(b)
30.9
* » \
(b)
A • "TO
34.73
34.1
34.55
34.1
34.52
34.23
34.8
40
35.7
37
36.73
37.97
39.65
42.42
39
41
(b)
44.33
39.28
42.05
47.58
45.4
165
-------
TABLE 1 (CONTINUED)
Analyte
Retention Time3
Col.l Col.2
Hexazinone
Fenarimol
Fluridone
46.58
51.32
56.68
47.8
50.02
59.07
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.8.1 and 6.8.2.
b Data not available
c MGK 264 gives two peaks; peak identified in this table used for
quantification.
Merphos is converted to S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-trithioate (DBF) in the
hot GC injection port; DEF is actually detected using these analyses
conditions.
166
-------
TABLE 2. SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION AND ESTIMATED DETECTION LIMITS
(EDLS) FOR ANALYTES FROM REAGENT WATER AND SYNTHETIC GROUNDWATERS(A)
Analyte
Alachlor
Ametryn
Ametraton
Atrazine
Bromacil
Butachlor
Butyl ate
Carboxin
Chlorpropham
Cycloate
Diazinon
Dichlorvos
Diphenamid
Disulfoton
Disulfoton sulfone
Disulfoton sulf oxide
EPTC
Ethoprop
Fenamiphos
Fenarimol
Fluridone
Hexazinone
Merphos
Methyl paraoxon
Metolachlor
Metribuzin
Mevinphos
MGK 264
Molinate
Napropamide
Norflurazon
Pebulate
Prometon
Prometryn
Pronamide
Propazine
Simazine
Simetryn
Stirofos
Tebuthiuron
Terbacil
Terbufos
Terbutryn
EDLb
0.38
2
0.6
0.13
2.5
0.38
0.15
0.6
0.5
0.25
0.25
2.5
0.6
0.3
3.8
0.38
0.25
0.19
1.
0.38
3.8
0.76
0.25
2.5
0.75
0.15
5.
0.5
0.15
0.25
0.5
0.13
0.3
0.19
0.76
0.13
0.075
0.25
0.76
1.3
4.5
0.5
0.25
Reagent
Cone. Rc
3.8
20
6
1.3
25
3.8
1.5
6
5
2.5
2.5
25
6
3
7.5
3.8
2.5
1.9
10
3.8
38
7.6
2.5
25
7.5
1.5
50
5
1.5
2.5
5.
1.3
3
1.9
7.6
1.3
0.75
2.5
7.6
13
45
5
2.5
95
91
91
92
91
96
97
102
93
89
115
97
93
89
98
87
85
103
90
99
87
90
96
98
93
101
95
100
98
101
94
94
78
93
91
92
100
99
98
84
97
97
94
Water
c d
11
10
11
8
9
4
21
4
11
9
7
6
8
10
10
11
9
5
8
5
9
7
8
10
4
5
11
4
18
6
5
9
9
8
10
8
7
5
6
9
6
4
9
Synthetic
Water 1
R SR
82
102
84
89
81
93
36
98
82
97
83
86
88
107
92
88
83
91
87
89
91
86
90
97
92
99
93
91
83
89
101
80
89
91
84
89
86
88
84
85
86
80
91
6
11
7
6
5
15
8
13
7
14
8
6
4
12
5
22
5
7
5
6
11
6
4
8
10
10
6
11
8
5
15
6
5
8
7
6
5
4
6
10
5
6
8
Synthetic
Water 2
R SR
90
96
91
92
88
84
83
87
93
93
84
106
93
95
96
54
86
79
89
89
86
95
92
94
84
86
92
83
89
104
87
98
63
93
92
92
103
103
95
98
102
77
92
8
4
8
5
8
5
8
5
8
3
3
16
5
5
3
19
4
3
2
6
10
9
4
4
4
4
4
6
9
18
4
15
2
4
8
5
14
14
10
13
12
7
4
167
-------
TABLE 2. (CONTINUED)
Analyte
EDLD
09/L
Reagent Water
Cone. R6 SRd
Synthetic
Water l,e
R SR
Synthetic
Water 2f
R SR
inaaemeron
Tricyclazole
Vernol ate
0.65
1.
0.13
6.5
10
1.3
93
86
93
8
7
6
94
90
79
5
6
9
95
90
81
5
11
2
Data corrected for blank and represent the analysis of 7-8 samples using
mechanical tumbling and internal standard calibration.
D*! Detection limit; defined as either MDL (Appendix B to 40 CFR
Part 136 - Definition and Procedure for the Determination of the Method
Detection Limit - Revision 1.11) or a level of compound in a sample yielding
a peak in the final extract with signal-to-noise ratio of approximately 5
whichever value is higher. The concentration used in determining the EDl'is
not the same as the concentration presented in this table.
R
S
average percent recovery.
standard deviation of the percent recovery.
Corrected for amount found in blank; Absopure Nature Artesian Spring Water
Obtained from the Absopure Water Company in Plymouth, Michigan.
Corrected for amount found in blank; reagent water fortified with fulvic acid
at the 1 mg/L concentration level. A well -characterized fulvic acid
thriiSJL^?111**11^1"?6-^0^1 Hum1c Substances Society (associated with
the United States Geological Survey in Denver, Colorado), was used
168
-------
c
o>
S
as -
o
l_
§ o>
c2 4->
§"«»
c
* *1
0)
jll
1
(0
0
o
4-»
o>
O)
o
in
o
o
Q)
4^
(0
"o
C
O)
^
">
4_3
c
o>
CO
10*
0
CM
i— i
V
U_
o.
V
O
00
o
o
in
r—
•r™
U
§
s-
CQ
O)
U
C
10
^
O
^^
^.
o>
OL
0
CL
(0
CT)
O
o
i.
J=
o
2-
s.^.
•^
o
A
C
O
+J
f™~
o
OS
o in
CO «— 1
o o
c o>
o c
•0— * *r**
O> N
0 S-
(X <
o>
u
g
o
i-
o>
o.
g.
3
^—
O
o
c
•r«*
eo
cr
0)
o>
5
c
•r-
V)
3'
•o
O)
(0
'S
u
10
•
i.
o
u
4-
(0
V)
3
(0
<0
0)
Q.
1
1^
ts
Cu
•
4J
•C
en
•r-
O)
J=
JZ •
C
o>
"f0
^j
•o
•f—
2
^
(0
Q)
CL
0)
-C
v>
"r™
o
1— 1
^"^
^ •*
3
•o
<0
o>
•r-
Q>
jaz
*^*
(0
<0
JC
4.3
•o
^•** s
r— 1 <-x (0
«— O OJ
3 1-4 O.
X «-< «
•— JC
CO 3 4->
00
• (/>
f— 1 'r-
U ^^
CM
LJ_ '
CS i-«
O)
L.
"§
• *
o
I *
10
3
cr
0)
j=
j^
-o
0>
•r~
cc
A
J=
XJ
*
(0
o>
CL
O)
cn
(0
s-
<0
O>
_c
4->
•r"
3
•o
C .
(0
V)
(0
0)
O.
i
t4-*
0>
•^
4~
c
Q)
0)
X
4«>
c
4-> t^
0>
w
T- (0
x>
4^
o>
O) J=
o>
x: 4->
3! «0
169
-------
-------
METHOD 508. DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED PESTICIDES IN WATER BY
GAS CHROMAT06RAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
Revision 3.0
J. J. Lichtenberg, J. E. Longbottom, T. A. Bellar, J. W. Eichelberger,
and R. C. Dressman - EPA 600/4-81-053, Revision 1.0 (1981)
T. Engels (Batten e Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide
Survey Method 2, Revision 2.0 (1987)
R. L. Graves - Method 508, Revision 3.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
171
-------
METHOD 508
DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED PESTICIDES IN WATER BY
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the
determination of certain chlorinated pesticides in groundwater and
finished drinking water.(1) The following compounds can be
determined using this method:
Compound
Aldrin
Chlordane-alpha
Chlordane-gamma
Chlorneb
Chlorobenzilate(a)
Chlorothalonil
DCPA
4,4'-ODD
4,4'-DDE
4,4'-DDT
Dieldrin
Endosulfan I
Endosulfan II
Endosulfan sulfate
Endrin
Endrin aldehyde
Etridiazole
HCH-alpha
HCH-beta
HCH-delta(a)
HCH-gamma (Lindane)
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Methoxychlor
cis-Permethrin
trans-Permethrin
Propachlor
Trifluralin
Aroclor 1016*
Aroclor 1221*
Aroclor 1232*
Aroclor 1242*
Aroclor 1248*
Aroclor 1254*
Aroclor 1260*
Chemical Abstract Service
Registry Number
309-
5103
5103-
2675-
501-
2921-
1897-
72-
72-
50-
60-
959-
33213-
1031-
72-
7421-
2593-
319-
319-
319-
58-
76-
1024-
118-
72-
52645-
52645-
1918-
1582-
12674-
11104-
11141-
53469-
12672-
11097-
11096-
-00-2
-71-9
-74-2
-77-6
-15-6
-88-2
-45-6
-54-8
-55-9
-29-3
-57-1
-98-8
-65-9
-07-8
-20-8
-93-4
-15-9
-84-6
-85-7
-86-8
•89-9
•44-8
•57-3
•74-1
43-5
53-1
53-1
16-7
09-8
11-2
28-2
16-5
21-9
29-6
69-1
82-5
172
-------
Toxaphene* 8001-35-2
Chlordane* 57-74-9
* The extraction conditions of this method are comparable to USEPA
Method 608, which does measure the multicomponent constituents:
commercial polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) mixtures (Aroclors),
toxaphene, and chlordane. The extract derived from this procedure
may be analyzed for these constituents by using the GC conditions
prescribed in either Method 608 (packed column) or Method 505
(capillary column). The columns used in this method may well be
adequate, however, no data were collected for these constituents
during methods development.
(a) These compounds are only qualitatively identified in the
National Pesticides Survey (NPS) Program. These compounds are not
quantitated because control over precision has not been
accomplished.
1.2 This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
(Sect. 13). Observed detection limits may vary between waters,
depending upon the nature of interferences, in the sample matrix and
the specific instrumentation used.
1.3 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of
gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to
generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure
described in Sect. 10.3.
1.4 Degradation of DDT and Endrin caused by active sites in the
injection port and GC columns may occur. This is not as much a
problem with new capillary columns as with packed columns. However,
high boiling sample residue in capillary columns will create the
same problem after injection of sample extracts.
1.5 Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, i.e., analytes
which have very similar retention times cannot be individually
identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
sample unless an alternative technique for identification and
quantitation exist (Sect. 11.5).
1.6 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
all of the analytes above, analyte identifications must be confirmed
by at least one additional qualitative technique.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 A measured volume of sample of approximately 1 L is solvent
extracted with methylene chloride by shaking in a separatory funnel
or mechanical tumbling in a bottle. The methylene chloride extract
is isolated, dried .and concentrated to a volume of 5 ml after
173
-------
solvent substitution with methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE). Chroma-
tographic conditions are described which permit the separation and
measurement of the analytes in the extract by capillary column/GC
with an electron capture detector (ECD).
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) -- An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
174
-------
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) -- An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) ~ A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — a sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.
All reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.
4.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned (2). Clean all glass-
ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
the last solvent used in it. Follow by washing with hot
175
-------
water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap and reagent
water. Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at
400°C for 1 hour. Do not heat volumetric ware. Thermally
stable materials such as PCBs might not be eliminated by this
treatment. Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted
for the heating. After drying and cooling, seal and store
glassware in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation
of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted or capped with
aluminum foil.
4.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by
distillation in all-glass systems may be required. WARNING:
When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified, preservatives
added by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially
reducing the shelf-life.
4.2 Interferences by phthalate esters can pose a major problem in pesti-
cide analysis when using the electron capture detector. These
compounds generally appear in the chromatogram as large peaks.
Common flexible plastics contain varying amounts of phthalates that
are easily extracted or leached during laboratory operations. Cross
contamination of clean glassware routinely occurs when plastics are
handled during extraction steps, especially when solvent-wetted
surfaces are handled. Interferences from phthalates can best be
minimized by avoiding the use of plastics in the laboratory
Exhaustive cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to
eliminate background phthalate contamination.(3,4)
4.3 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a
sample containing relatively high concentrations of analytes.
Between-sample rinsing of the sample syringe and associated
equipment with MTBE can minimize sample cross contamination. After
analysis of a sample containing high concentrations of analytes, one
or more injections of MTBE should be made to ensure that accurate
values are obtained for the next sample.
4.4 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are
coextracted from the sample. Also, note that all the analytes
listed in the Scope and Application Section are not resolved from
each other on any one column, i.e., one analyte of interest may be
an interferant for another analyte of interest. The extent of
matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source
depending upon the water sampled. Cleanup of sample extracts may'be
necessary. Positive identifications should be confirmed (Sect.
J. JL • D y •
4.5 It is important that samples and standards be contained in the same
solvent, i.e., the solvent for final working standards must be the
176
-------
same as the final solvent used in sample preparation. If this is
not the case chromatographic comparability of standards to sample
may be affected.
4.6 WARNING: A dirty injector insert will cause the late eluting
compounds to drop off.
5. SAFETY
6.
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
be treated as a potential health hazard. Accordingly, exposure to
these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level. The
laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data
sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified (5-7) for the information of
the analyst.
5.2 WARNING: When a solvent is purified stabilizers added by the
manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous.
APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All specifications are suggested. Catalog
numbers are included for illustration only.)
6.1 SAMPLE BOTTLE — Borosilicate, 1-1 volume with graduations (Wheaton
Media/Lab bottle 219820 or equivalent), fitted with screw caps lined
with TFE-fluorocarbon. Protect samples from light. The container
must be washed and dried as described in Sect. 4.1.1 before use to
minimize contamination. Cap liners are cut to fit from sheets
(Pierce Catalog No. 012736) and extracted with methanol overnight
prior to use.
6.2 GLASSWARE
6.2.1 Separatory funnel — 2000-mL, with TFE-fluorocarbon stopcock,
ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stopper.
6.2.2 Tumbler bottle 1.7-L (Wheaton Roller Culture Vessel or
equivalent), with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap. Cap
liners are cut to fit from sheets (Pierce Catalog No. 012736)
and extracted with methanol overnight prior to use.
6.2.3 Flask, Erlenmeyer — 500-mL.
6.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D) 10- or 25-mL,
graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or K-570050-2525 or
equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes
177
-------
employed in the test. Ground glass stoppers are used to
prevent evaporation of extracts.
6.2.5 Evaporative flask, K-D 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
6.2.6 Snyder column, K-D three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).
6.2.7 Snyder column, K-D two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
equivalent).
6.2.8 Vials -- Glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
lined screw cap.
6.3 SEPARATORY FUNNEL SHAKER — Capable of holding 2-L separatory
funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve thorough
mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from Eberbach Co. in
Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).
6.4 TUMBLER — Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg. Co.,
Alexandria, VA or other suppliers.).
6.5 BOILING STONES CARBORUNDUM, #12 granules (Arthur H. Thomas Co.
#1590-033 or equivalent). Heat at 400°C for 30 min prior to use.
Cool and store in a desiccator.
6.6 WATER BATH -- Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C). The
bath should be used in a hood.
6.7 BALANCE — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.8 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
detector and stripchart recorder. A data system is recommended for
measuring peak areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for
method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
described below.
6.8.1 Column 1 (Primary column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film thickness (J&W
Scientific). Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30
cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min. Data presented in this method
were obtained using this column. The injection volume was 2
III splitless mode with a 45 sec. delay. The injector
temperature was 250°C and the detector temperature was 320°C.
Column performance criteria are presented in Table 3 (See
178
-------
Section 10.9). Alternative columns may be used in accordance
with the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.
6.8.2 Column 2 (Alternative column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm
I.D.DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 urn film
thickness (J&W Scientific). Helium carrier gas flow is
established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature
is programmed from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.
6.8.3 Detector — Electron capture. This detector has proven
effective in the analysis of spiked reagent and artificial
ground waters. An ECD was used to generate the validation
data presented in this method. Alternative detectors,
including a mass spectrometer, may be used in accordance with
the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.
REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING: When a solvent is
purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
7.1 ACETONE, methylene chloride, MTBE — Distilled-in-glass quality or
equivalent.
7.2 PHOSPHATE BUFFER, pH7 Prepare by mixing 29.6 ml 0.1 N HC1 and 50 ml
0.1 M dipotassium phosphate.
7.3 SODIUM CHLORIDE, crystal, ACS grade. Heat treat in a shallow tray
at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering organic
substances.
7.4 SODIUM SULFATE, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade. Heat treat in a
shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
organic substances.
7.5 SODIUM THIOSULFATE, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade.
7.6 PENTACHLORONITROBENZENE (PCNB) 98% purity, for use as internal
standard.
7.7 4,4'-DICHLOROBIPHENYL (DCB) 96% purity, for use as surrogate
standard (available from Chemicals Procurement Inc.).
7.8 MERCURIC CHLORIDE — ACS grade — for use as a bactericide. If any
other bactericide can be shown to work as well as mercuric chloride,
it may be used instead.
7.9 REAGENT WATER — Reagent water is defined as water that is
reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
determination of any analyte of interest. Reagent water used to
179
-------
generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.
7.10 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 /jg//iL) -- Stock standard solutions
may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
standard materials using the following procedure:
7.10.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
approximately 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the
material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of the
analyst. If compound purity is certified at 96% or greater,
the weight may be used without correction to calculate the
concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared
stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
7.10.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
carbon-sealed screw cap amber vials. Store at room temper-
ature and protect from light.
7.10.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
QC samples indicate a problem.
7.11 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare an internal, standard
fortifying solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of
pure PCNB. Dissolve the PCNB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a
10-mL volumetric flask. Transfer the internal standard solution to
a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at room
temperature. Addition of 5 /zL of the internal standard fortifying
solution to 5 mL of sample extract results in a final internal
standard concentration of 0.1 /zg/mL. Solution should be replaced
when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem. Note that PCNB has
been shown to be an effective internal standard for the method
analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality control
requirements in Section 10 are met.
7.12 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare a surrogate standard
fortifying solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0050 g of
pure DCB. Dissolve the DCB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL
volumetric flask. Transfer the surrogate standard fortifying
solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at
room temperature. Addition of 50 /zL of the surrogate standard
fortifying solution to a 1-L sample prior to extraction results in
a surrogate standard concentration in the sample of 25 #g/L and,
assuming quantitative recovery of DCB, a surrogate standard
concentration in the final extract of 5.0 /jg/mL. Solution should be
replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem. Note DCB
has been shown to be an effective surrogate standard for the method
analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality control
requirements in Section 10 are met.
180
-------
7.13 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare by accurately
weighing 0.0010 g each of chlorothalonil, chlorpyrifos, DCPA, and
HCH-delta. Dissolve each analyte in MTBE and dilute to volume in
individual 10-mL volumetric flasks. Combine 2 fil of the
chloropyrifos stock solution, 50 jil of the DCPA stock solution, 50
Hi of the chlorothalonil stock solution, and 40 jil of the HCH-delta
stock solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume
with MTBE. Transfer to a TFE-fluorcarbon-sealed screw cap bottle
and store at room temperature. Solution should be replaced when
ongoing QC (Section 10) indicates a problem.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional
sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the bottle must
not be prerinsed with sample before collection.
8.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION
8.2.1 Add mercuric chloride (See 7.8) to the sample bottle in
amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L. Add 1 mL of a
10 mg/mL solution of mercuric chloride in reagent water to
the sample bottle at the sampling site or in the laboratory
before shipping to the sampling site. A major disadvantage
of mercuric chloride is that it is a highly toxic chemical;
mercuric chloride must be handled with caution, and samples
containing mercuric chloride must be disposed of properly.
8.2.2 If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
collecting the sample.
8.2.3 After adding the sample to the bottle containing
preservative(s), seal the sample bottle and shake vigorously
for 1 min.
8.2.4 Samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C from the time of
collection until extraction. Preservation study results
indicate that most of the target analytes present in the
samples are stable for 7 days when stored under these
conditions (1). Preservation data for the analytes
chlorthalonil, alpha-HCH, delta-HCH, gamma-HCH, cis-
permethrin, trans-permethrin, and trifluralin are
nondefinitive, and therefore if these are analytes of
interest, it is recommended that the samples be analyzed
immediately. Analyte stability may be affected by the
matrix; therefore, the analyst should verify that the
preservation technique is applicable to the samples under
study.
181
-------
8.3 EXTRACT STORAGE
8.3.1 Sample extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light. A
14-day maximum extract storage time is recommended. However,
analyte stability may be affected by the matrix; therefore,
the analyst should verify appropriate extract holding times
applicable to the samples under study.
9. CALIBRATION
9.1
Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.8. The GC system must be calibrated using the internal
standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard technique
(Sect. 9.3). WARNING: DDT and endrin are easily degraded in the
injection port if the injection port or front of the column is
dirty. This is the result of buildup of high boiling residue from
sample injection. Check for degradation problems by injecting a
mid-level standard containing only 4,4'-DDT and endrin. Look for
the degradation products of 4,4'-DDT (4,4'-DDE and 4,4'-ODD) and
endrin (endrin ketone and endrin aldehyde). If degradation of
either DDT or endrin exceeds 20%, take corrective action before
proceeding with calibration. Calculate percent breakdown as
fol1ows:
% breakdown
for 4,4'-DDT=
% breakdown
for Endrin
Total DDT degradation peak area (DDE +
Total DDT peak area (DDT + DDE + ODD)
x 100
Total endrin degradation peak area (endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone) x 100
Total endrin peak area (endrin + endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)
NOTE: Calibration standard solutions must be prepared such that no
unresolved analytes are mixed together.
9.2 INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE — To use this approach, the
analyst must select one or more internal standards compatible in
analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must
further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is
not affected by method or matrix interferences. PCNB has been
identified as a suitable internal standard. Data presented in this
method were generated using the internal standard calibration
procedure.
9.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each
calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or
more of the internal standards, and dilute to volume with
MTBE. The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs. -The
182
-------
remaining standards should correspond to the range of
concentrations expected in the sample concentrates, or should
define the working range of the detector. The calibration
standards must bracket the analyte concentrations found in
the sample extracts.
9.2.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
(Sect. 11.4). Tabulate response ( peak height or area)
against concentration for each compound and internal
standard. Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.
(As)(Cis)
RF = Equation 1
(Ais)(Cs)
where :
As = Response for the analyte to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Cis = Concentration of the internal standard (/jg/L).
Cs = Concentration of the analyte to be measured (jtg/L).
9.2.3 If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
or less) the average RF can be used for calculations.
Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios (As/Ais) vs. Cs.
9.2.4 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
standards. If the response for any analyte varies from the
predicted response by more than ± 20%, the test must be
repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively,
a new calibration curve must be prepared for that analyte.
9.2.5 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
9.2.6 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
9.3 EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
9.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
183
-------
9.3.2
9.3.3
interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
more stock standards to a volumetric flask. Dilute to volume
with MTBE. The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs. The
other concentrations should correspond to the range of
concentrations expected in the sample concentrates, or should
define the working range of the detector. The calibration
standards must bracket the analyte concentrations found in
the sample extracts.
Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.4 and
tabulate response (peak height or area) versus the
concentration in the standard. The results can be used to
prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
(20% RSD or less), linearity through the origin can be
assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
used in place of a calibration curve.
The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
one at the end of the analysis day. These check standards
should be at two different concentration levels to verify the
calibration curve. For extended periods of analysis (greater
than 8 hrs.), it is strongly recommended that check standards
be interspersed with samples at regular intervals during the
course of the analyses. If the response for any analyte
varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard.
If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve.
9.3.4
9.3.5
Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
of laboratory capability, determination of surrogate compound
184
-------
recoveries in each sample and blank, monitoring internal standard
peak area or height in each sample and blank (when internal standard
calibration procedures are being employed), analysis of laboratory
reagent blanks, laboratory fortified samples, laboratory fortified
blanks, and QC samples.
10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks — Before processing any samples, the
analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent
interferences are under control. Each time a set of samples is
extracted or reagents are changed, a laboratory reagent blank (LRB)
must be analyzed. If within the retention time window of any
analyte of interest the LRB produces a peak that would prevent the
determination of that analyte, determine the source of contamination
and eliminate the interference before processing samples.
10.3 INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF CAPABILITY
10.3.1 Select a representative fortified concentration (about 10
times EDL or at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level,
whichever is lower) for each analyte. Prepare a sample
concentrate (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000
times selected concentration. With a syringe, add 1 mL of
the concentrate to each of at least four 1-L aliquots of
reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to
procedures beginning in Section 11.
10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ± 3SR
if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent water
in Table 2. For those compounds that meet the acceptance
criteria, performance is considered acceptable and sample
analysis may begin. For those compounds that fail these
criteria, this procedure must be repeated using four fresh
samples until satisfactory performance has been demonstrated.
10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
with it. It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
experience with this method the quality of data will improve
beyond those required here.
10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions, GC
detectors, continuous extraction techniques, concentration
techniques (i.e. evaporation techniques), internal standards or
surrogate compounds. Each time such method modifications are made,
the analyst must repeat the procedures in Section 10.3.
10.5 ASSESSING SURROGATE RECOVERY
10.5.1 When surrogate recovery from a sample or method blank is <70%
or >130%, check (1) calculations to locate possible errors,
185
-------
(2) fortifying solutions for degradation, (3) contamination
or other obvious abnormalities, and (4) instrument
performance. If those steps do not reveal the cause of the
problem, reanalyze the extract.
10.5.2 If a blank extract reanalysis fails the 70-130% recovery
criterion, the problem must be identified and corrected
before continuing.
10.5.3 If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
criterion, report only data for the reanalyzed extract. If
sample extract reanalysis continues to fail the surrogate
recovery criterion, report all data for that sample as
suspect.
10.6 ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD
10.6.1 When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
peak height) of all samples during each analysis day. The IS
response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate from
the daily calibration check standards IS response by more
than 30%.
10.6.2 If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract, optimize
instrument performance and inject a second aliquot of that
extract.
10.6.2.1 If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
internal standard response report results for that
aliquot.
10.6.2.2 If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
the re-injected extract, analysis of the sample
should be repeated beginning with Section 11,
provided the sample is still available. Otherwise,
report results obtained from the re-injected
extract, but annotate as suspect.
10.6.3 If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.
10.6.3.1 If the check standard provides a response factor
(RF) within 20% of the predicted value, then follow
procedures itemized in Section 10.6.2 for each
sample failing the IS response criterion.
10.6.3.2 If the check standard provides a response factor
which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
value, then the analyst must recalibrate, as
specified in Section 9.
186
-------
10.7 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK
10.7.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory fortified
blank (LFB) sample with every twenty samples or one per
sample set (all samples extracted within a 24-h period)
whichever is greater. The fortified concentration of each
analyte in the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL,
whichever is less. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery
(X,-). If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the
control limits (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged out
of control, and the source of the problem should be
identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
10.7.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory performance
against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that are derived
from the data in Table 2. When sufficient internal
performance data becomes available, develop control limits
from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard deviation (S)
of the percent recovery. These data are used to establish
upper and lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = X + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT = X - 3S
After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new control
limits should be calculated using only the most recent 20-30
data points. These calculated control limits should never
exceed those established in Sect. 10.3.2.
10.7.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically document
and determine its detection limit capabilities for the
analytes of interest.
10.7.4 At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
source.
10.7.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
performance evaluation studies such as the labroatory
certification programs offered by many states or the studies
conducted by USEPA. Performance evaluation studies serve as
independent checks on the analyst's performance.
10.8 ASSESSING METHOD PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX
10.8.1 The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum of
10% of the routine samples or one sample concentration per
set, whichever is greater. The added concentration should
not be less then the background concentration of the sample
-selected for fortification. Ideally, the fortified analyte
concentrations should be the same as that used for the LFB
187
-------
(Section 10.7). Over time, samples from all routine sample
sources should be fortified.
10.8.2 Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X, from
the fortified sample for the background concentration, b,
measured in the unfortified sample, i.e.,:
P = 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,
and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
reagent water data collected in the same fashion. If the
analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO background
concentrations, and the added concentrations are those
specified in Sect. 10.7, then the appropriate control limits
would be the acceptance limits in Sect. 10.7. If, on the
other hand, the analyzed unfortified sample is found to
contain background concentration, b, estimate the standard
deviation at the background concentration, sb, using
regressions or comparable background data and, similarly,
estimate the mean, X and standard deviation, s , of
analytical results at' the total concentration after
fortifying. Then the appropriate percentage control limits
would be P ± 3sp , where:
P = 100 X / (b + fortifying concentration)
and sn
2 2 1/2
100 (s_ + s. ) /fortifying concentration
a D
For example, if the background concentration for Analyte A
was found to be 1 /*g/L and the added amount was also 1 /jg/L,
and upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
1.6 /i/L, then the calculated P for this sample would be (1.6
/jg/L minus 1.0 #g/L)/l jug/L or 60%. This calculated P is
compared to control limits derived from prior reagent water
data. Assume it is known that analysis of an interference
free sample at 1 /jg/L yields an s of 0.12 /zg/L and similar
analysis at 2.0 /jg/L yields X and s of 2.01 /jg/L and 0.20
JWJ/L, respectively. The appropriate limits to judge the
reasonableness of the percent recovery, 60%, obtained on the
fortified matrix sample is computed as follows:
1/2
[100 (2.01 jag/L) / 2.0 /ig/L]
± 3 (100) [(0.12 /zg/L)2 + (0.20 fig/I)2] '/ 1.0 /zg/L =
100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =
100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.
188
-------
10.8.3 If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.7), the recovery
problem encountered with the dosed sample is judged to be
matrix related, not system related. The result for that
analyte in the unfortified sample is labeled suspect/matrix
to inform the data user that the results are suspect due to
matrix effects.
10.9 ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SAMPLE -
Instrument performance should be monitored on a daily basis by
analysis of the LPC sample. The LPC sample contains compounds
designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance. LPC
sample components and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
Inability to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance indicates
the need for reevaluation of the instrument system. The sensitivity
requirements are set based on the EDLs published in this method. If
laboratory EDLs differ from those listed in this method,
concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must be
adjusted to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.
10.10 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
use with this method. The specific practices that are most
productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
analyzed to asses the precision of the environmental measurements or
filed reagent blanks may be used to asses contamination of samples
under site conditions, transportation and storage.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 EXTRACTION (MANUAL METHOD)
11.1.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.1.6). Add
preservative to blanks and QC check standards. Fortify the
sample with 50 /iL of the surrogate standard fortifying
solution. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory
funnel.
11.1.2 Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 mL of phosphate
buffer. Check pH: add H2S04 or NaOH if necessary.
11.1.3 Add 100 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.1.4 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and
shake 30 s to rinse the inner walls. Transfer the solvent to
the separatory funnel and extract the sample by vigorously
shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release
excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from
189
-------
the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion
interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum
technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
filtration of the emulsion through glass wool,
centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the
methylene chloride extract in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
11.1.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample
bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a
third extraction in the same manner.
11.1.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest
5 ml.
11.2 AUTOMATED EXTRACTION METHOD — Data presented in this method were
generated using the automated extraction procedure with the
mechanical tumbler.
11.2.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.2.6). Add
preservative to blanks and QC check standards. Fortify the
sample with 50 /iL of the surrogate standard fortifying
solution. If the mechanical separatory funnel shaker is
used, pour the entire sample into a 2-1 separatory funnel.
If the mechanical tumbler is used, pour the entire sample
into a tumbler bottle.
11.2.2 Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 ml of phosphate
buffer. Check pH: add H2S04 or NaOH if necessary.
11.2.3 Add 100 g NaCl to'the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.2.4 Add 300 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and
shake 30 s to rinse the inner walls. Transfer the solvent to
the sample contained in the separatory funnel or tumbler
bottle, seal, and shake for 10 s, venting periodically.
Repeat shaking and venting until pressure release is not
observed during venting. Reseal and place sample container
in appropriate mechanical mixing device (separatory funnel
shaker or tumbler). Shake or tumble the sample for 1 hour.
Complete mixing of the organic and aqueous phases should be
observed within about 2 min after starting the mixing device.
11.2.5 Remove the sample container from the mixing device. If the
tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-1
separatory funnel. Allow the organic layer to separate from
190
-------
the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion
interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum
technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
filtration through glass wool, centrifugation, or other
physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in
a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
11.2.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest
5 ml.
11.3 EXTRACT CONCENTRATION
11.3.1 Assemble a K-D concentrator by attaching a 25-mL concentrator
tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration
devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D if the
requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.
11.3.2 Dry the extract by pouring it through a solvent-rinsed drying
column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
Collect the extract in the K-D concentrator, and rinse the
column with 20-30 ml methylene chloride. Alternatively, add
about 5 g anhydrous sodium sulfate to the extract in the
Erlenmeyer flask; swirl flask to dry extract and allow to sit
for 15 min. Decant the methylene chloride extract into the
K-D concentrator. Rinse the remaining sodium sulfate with
two 25-mL portions of methylene chloride and decant the
rinses into the K-D concentrator.
11.3.3 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask and
attach a macro Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by
adding about 1 mL methylene chloride to the top. Place the
K-D apparatus on a hot water bath, 65 to 70°C, so that the
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and
the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with
hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and
the water temperature as required to complete the
concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of
distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter,
but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of
liquid reaches 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
drain and cool for at least 10 min.
11.3.4 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower
joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of MTBE. Add
5-10 mL of MTBE and a fresh boiling stone. Attach a
micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet the
column by adding about 0.5 mL of MTBE to the top. Place the
micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the
191
-------
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water
temperature as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10
min. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 2 ml, remove
the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to drain and cool.
Add 5-10 ml MTBE to the micro K-D and reconcentrate to 2 ml.
Remove the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to drain and
cool. Remove the micro Snyder column, and rinse the walls of
the concentrator tube while adjusting the volume to 5.0 ml
with MTBE.
11.3.5 Transfer extract to an appropriate-sized TFE-fluorocarbon-
sealed screw-cap vial and store, refrigerated at 4°C, until
analysis by GC-NPD.
11.4 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
11.4.1 Sect. 6.8 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for
the gas chromatograph. Included in Table 1 are retention
times observed using this method. Other GC columns,
chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.
11.4.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9. The
standards and extracts must be in MTBE.
11.4.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, add
5 nL of the internal standard fortifying solution to the
sample extract, seal, and shake to distribute the internal
standard.
11.4.4 Inject 2 #L of the sample extract.
size in area units.
Record the resulting peak
11.4.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the
system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
11.5 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES
11.5.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram. If
the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds, within
limits, to the retention time of a standard compound, then
identification is considered positive.
11.5.2 The width of the retention time window used to make
identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
retention time variations of standards over the course of a
day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time
can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
compound. However, the experience of the analyst should
weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
192
-------
11.5.3 Identification requires expert judgment when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically. When GC
peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
(i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between two
or more maxima), or any time doubt exists over the
identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate
alternate techniques, to help confirm peak identification,
need to be employed. For example, more positive
identification may be made by the use of an alternative
detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
different from that originally used; e.g., mass spectrometry,
or the use of a second chromatography column. A suggested
alternative column is described in Sect. 6.8.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response for
the analyte using the calibration procedure described in Sect. 9.
12.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the concentration (C) in the sample using the calibration curve or
response factor (RF) determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2.
(As)ds) c +. ,
C (/ig/L) = Equation 2
(Ajs)(RF)(V0)
where:
As = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Is = Amount of internal standard added to each extract (/zg).
V0 = Volume of water extracted (L).
12.3 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the amount of material injected from the peak response using the
calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section
9.3.The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from
Equation 3.
(A)(Vt)
C (Mg/L) = Equation 3
(Vf)(V.)
where:
A = Amount of material injected (ng).
V,- = Volume of extract injected (ML)-
Vt = Volume of total extract (/it).
Vs = Volume of water extracted (ml).
193
-------
13. PRECISION AND ACCURACY
13.1 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
determined at five concentration levels. Results were used to
determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range (1). Analytes
were divided into two fortified groups for recovery studies.
Analyte EDLs and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the
percent recoveries at one concentration are given in Table 2.
13.2 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level.
Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
different ground water matrices (1). Analyte recoveries from the
two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.
14. REFERENCES
1. National Pesticide Survey Method No. 2: Determination of
Chlorinated Pesticides in Groundwater by Gas Chromatography with a
Electron Capture Detector.
2. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
"Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
3. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.
4. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
5. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on. Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
.L •/ / «7 •
6. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
"Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
194
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Retention Time8
(minutes)
Primary . Alternative
Etridiazole
Chlorneb
Propachlor
Trifluralin
HCH-alpha
Hexachlorobenzene
HCH-beta
HCH-gamma
PCNB (internal std.)
HCH-delta
Chlorthalonil
Heptachlor
Aldrin
Chlorpyrifos
DC PA
Heptachlor epoxide
Chlordane-gamma
Endosulfan I
Chlordane-alpha
4,4'-DDE
Dieldrin
Endrin
Endosulfan II
Chi orobenzi late
4, 4 '-ODD
Endrin aldehyde
Endosulfan sulfate
4, 4 '-DDT
Methoxychlor
cis-Permethrin
trans-Permethrin
DCB
23.46
25.50
28.90
31.62
31.62
31.96
33.32
33.66
34
35.02
35.36
37.74
40.12
40.6
41.14
42.16
43.52
44.20
44.54
45.90
45.90
46.92
47.60
47.94
48.28
48.62
49.98
50.32
53.38
58.48
58.82
64.1
22.78
26.18
30.94
(b)
32.98
(b)
40.12
35.36
34
41.48
39.78
36.72
38.08
(b)
41.14
42.16
43.86
43.52
44.54
44.88
45.90
(b)
51.68
48.28
46.92
46.92
49.30
50.32
53.72
(b)
(b)
(b)
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.8.1 and 6.8.2.
Data not available.
195
-------
CM i— < i— <
O CO
ss -,
o to ir> h«. oo co o vo in oo co CM co co co co «<• KMO o> o> i— i CM oo •-< in !•>. vo co
COO CO CM CO (O IO CO t-t «O
>-Lu £
Q*3 D>
CO CO I-- CM CM CO CM in i-l CO CO
co o> oS en i—i ov r—i •—i en I-H oo co i—i co oo CT» i—i en o> •—i oo cy> oo en ^-i cj>»—i •—11—i
in to in
in in in in in in in in in in
in
in in
in
CM
oooinr-nooooooooooooooooooooininino
in in m r^.
u> ^H t-< in in CM in in in in **• in in in in r-» in
t^ O C3 CM CM O i—I IO CM i—I i-l i-l CM CM CM CM i-H i—I i-H i-l r-4 O in CM
o o o in o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o CD o o o o in in in o
ooooinoooooooooooooooooooooooo
(U
m
. E «Sr—
i T3 o
c ja eo'«
o>
XJ tt>
•a o M i= s-
>>!-< O. C -r- ^
^r >-i a) £-or—
nS«t-N.Cl«+Jgr— r— O O 1= 0>i— rt
>> S-Q-J= S-
196
-------
0) c
0) Q. O
S- i—
3 (9 4->
•O A
« O> S-
O C 4->
S-TJ 0)
Q-r— O
C S-i-
i- 19 01 J=
«»- J= 4->
o> c o>
o ••- -i- c
,C "r"
i -o
Vt
_
00
*«-
o
0)
E
O)
J5
4J
4-»
c
0)
to
o>
S-
o.
d)
S-
VO 3 f- O)
co o 4->
+J O r— W)
S-u
« > i-
a. <4- a.
os-
oc a> i —
U_ r— > O>
« a> o> >
> J= O)
O O) Or—
O fl»
S- «•!-»
CQ o in ra
O
O
S-
o>
n>
o.
O
c/>
a*
o
s-
O)
C
n»
"8
(DO)
>-C
a) -4->
r—
O •«-
«o-o
s- a>
+->-(->
c
o v>
O
a) o
jc co
a)
o
o -r- •
U
s-
O)
4->
0» i
Q.
t-« a> o>
U
SO
.
<. o x
*-••»- o
10
- .
a>o.
Z tl) <0 VI
os. to
I. M-
0> I o o«o
t--f-i-«n
0) E 4->
•r- fO O)
I— TO O
.Q 0) f—
C 4->
C f- U
t- «l- O)
0) 4J
•o -o o)
+»
U
a)
O
E
ra
S-
o
T3
Q)
J-
S.
O
O
•M
"3
a
-4->-O
i- o
E J=
i-*j
r— O)
S
c.
O
en
OO
CO
a)
0)
s-
as
0)
V)
^3
<
O CO
p— t-
<«- 3
-•->•—
1-08
s c
O
"O-r-
Q>+->
t- &- .
a) -a
a)
<4->-i3
S- 0) V>
OJ^r n»
"^
+-> S- O
-
o>
5?*£
£-8-5
r— <_>
c > s-
m nj
O
0
O)
s-
OS
O >
•MO
O)
T?C
o
T3 ••-
O)
OS- 4->
+J
V)
0>
O)
ICS
_J
-u a)
x ~o
tt>
c
i— -i-
«
C-O
r-Q)
V>
3
0>
a>
o
s-
0)
05
nj
S-
0)
>
ns
>
a>
can
Eo
n» -i-
S-
o-
X -O3
(3 (DO
Jj -4-> E
to O>>
"" 0)r—
K s-a-
" S-
K oc
co <_>•!-
c
3T3
o a>
Ersi
<*-O
«
-OS-
Q) (O
-M.C
OO
O> I
s-r—
S-i—
o s
>,
O)
>
s-
3
>
D)
o
0)
Cfl
flS
-i->
co
o -o
197
-------
CO
c
EH
z 2
2 "5
fe «
o
jj§ cT— i
^^ ^» ^^^
Ljj O O>
;j»
c£
sg
Mi
£
ee
UJ
o.
1 .
s >>
§ 1
3 ^
•
CO
Ul
CD
1—
4_>
CO
«
1—
CO
A
CO
oT
tfj
>J
r—
C
«£
o
c
o
U
O>
0
CM
O
o
o
CO
o
r
ex
o
JC
^J
4^>
•r*
4->
CO
c:
oj
to
in
i— t
?— i
•o
re
o
00
o
c
0)
0)
^g
03
XI
U.
CO
o.
o
0
in
o
o
1
a
0)
u
c
£~
s-
c£
(U
0.
u
•P"
J=
a.
re
s-
O)
o
re
o
s-
x:
<->
JO
0
in
0
A
o
•j—
3
O
CU
OO
OO
in **•
00
o o
r™"*
•^
c
o
Is
o*cu
S-T3
0 1
!co
O 3=
a>
o
c
rt
E
i»
Q
*^m
s-
0)
a.
c
3
"o
0
c
o
•p—
,^A
re
a-
(U
a>
.c
c:
•!••
CO
3
0)
+•*
re
r~*
3
U
l_ .
re
CJ
tl
o
4^
u
C *-N
re CM
CO r-<
3 3
re
C9 X
^^ CO
re 00
(U •
' O.I-H
1 II
^J^ ^^
C3 C5
a. a.
•
,
1 7
_g-
cn
•r-
a>
-c
c
a>
re
^
^
re
0)
ex
cu
4^
CO
,•••*,
O
F— 1
***^
r-H
•a
re
sz
at
0)
.c
•' «*-
^--_
(O
JZ
•f^
«J
p*
•4-*
"O
"5
^^
re
O)
ex
cu
4^
O CO
1— « "I—
l~4 ^~N
•—CM
3: --».
•-H
--!_ -•
™ag
O)
cu
x:
"
o
• f*B
4^
re
qr
cu
O)
.c
•°
^3
0.
o
^
4*>
0)
4J
J—
0>
§
Q)
XI
C
O
1 %
3 4->
r-
0
CO X
a>
ce. ct.
A
a>
40
•s
J=
•o
•i™
<^g
re
a>
0.
01
s
cu
ro
a>
CO
•r*
C;
re
CO
re
a>
a.
o
j^
(O
Q)
tu
O)
XI
CO
0)
E
4J
C
o
^J
3
(2)
C
CO
a> -*
•j ft
o
CO
Q)
m^ ^
(U r—
S- 0)
CO
JC re
198
-------
METHOD 508A. SCREENING FOR POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
BY PERCHLORINATION AND GAS CHRONATOGRAPHY
Revision 1.0
T. A. Bellar - Method 508A, Revision 1.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
199
-------
METHOD 508A
SCREENING FOR POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
BY PERCHLORINATION/GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1. This procedure may be used for screening finished drinking water,
raw source water, or drinking water in any treatment stage for
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). This procedure is applicable to
samples containing PCBs as single congeners or as complex mixtures
such as weathered, intact, or mixtures of commercial Aroclors. The
procedure is incapable of identifying the parent PCBs because the
original PCBs are chemically converted to a common product,
decachlorobiphenyl (DCB). The procedure has only been evaluated
using Aroclors and 2-chlorobiphenyl as a source of PCBs.
1.2. This procedure is primarily designed to function as a pass/fail test
for DCB at 0.5 fj.g/1. However, it will accurately measure DCB from
the method detection limit (MDL) to 5.0 ng/L. It is prone to false
positive interferences and can result in a calculated weight of PCBs
significantly greater than that of PCB originally present in the
sample. If DCB is detected at 0.5 fj.g/1 or above, then an approved
method for the analysis of PCBs should be used to accurately
identify the source and measure the concentration of the PCBs.
1.3. This procedure can be used to help confirm the presence of PCBs for
• other methods using electron capture or halogen specific detectors
whenever chromatographic patterns are not representative of those
described in the method.
2. SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE
2.1
A 1-L water sample is placed into a separatory funnel and extracted
with methylene chloride or one of several optional solvents. The
extract is dried, concentrated, and the solvent is exchanged to
chloroform. The PCBs are then reacted with antimony pentachloride
(SbCl5) (in the presence of an iron catalyst and heat) to form DCB.
The DCB is extracted with hexane from the reaction mixture; after
the extract is purified, an aliquot is injected into a gas
chromatograph (GC) equipped with an electron capture detector (ECD)
for separation and measurement. The GC is calibrated using DCB as
the standard.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1. Calibration Standard (CAL) -- A solution of DCB used to calibrate
the ECD.
3.2. Congener Number -- Throughout this procedure, individual PCBs are
described with the number assigned by Ballschmiter and Zell (1).
200
-------
(This number is also used to describe PCB congeners in catalogs
produced by Ultra Scientific, Hope, RI.)
3.3. Laboratory Duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory are analyzed with identical procedures.
Analysis of laboratory duplicates indicates precision associated
with laboratory procedures, but not with sample collection,
preservation or storage procedures.
3.4. Laboratory Performance Check Solution (LPC) -- A solution of method
analytes used to evaluate the analytical system performance with
respect to a defined set of criteria.
3.5. Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB) -- An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated as a sample. It is exposed to all glassware and
apparatus, and all method solvents and reagents are used. The
extract is concentrated to the final volume used for samples and is
analyzed the same as a sample extract.
3.6. Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix (LFM) -- An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.7. Quality Control (QC) Sample -- A sample containing known
concentrations of analytes that is analyzed by a laboratory to
demonstrate that it can obtain acceptable identifications and
measurements with procedures to be used to analyze environmental
samples containing the same or similar analytes. Analyte
concentrations are known by the analyst. Preparation of the QC
check sample by a laboratory other than the laboratory performing
the analysis is highly desirable.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1. Interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents reagents,
glassware, and other sample processing equipment. Laboratory
reagent blanks (LRBs) are analyzed routinely to demonstrate that
these materials are free of interferences under the analytical
conditions used for samples.
4.2. To minimize interferences, glassware (including sample bottles)
should be meticulously cleaned. As soon as possible after use,
rinse glassware with the last solvent used. Then wash with
detergent in hot water and rinse with tap water followed by
distilled water. Drain dry and heat in a muffle furnace at 450 C
for a few hours. After cooling, store glassware inverted or covered
with aluminum foil. Before using, rinse each piece with an
201
-------
appropriate solvent.
muffle furnace.
Volumetric glassware should not be heated in a
4.3. In addition to PCBs, several compounds and classes of compounds will
form DCB with varying yields when extracted and perchlorinated
according to this procedure. Based upon a literature search (2)
such compounds include biphenyl, polyhalogenated biphenyls,
hydrogenated biphenyls, and polyhalogenated terphenyls. If such
compounds are present in the extract, false positive or positively
biased data will be generated.
4.4. A splitless injection capillary column GC can be used but standards
and samples should be contained in the same solvent, or results may
be significantly biased.
4.5.
PCBs are converted to DCB on a mole for mole basis. Converting DCB
concentrations back to the original PCB concentration is beyond the
scope of this method. For informational purposes and in order to
demonstrate the degree of increased weight of PCBs generated by the
procedure, Table 1 lists the conversion of 0.5 ng/l of DCB back to
various sources of PCBs assuming 100% method recovery.
5. SAFETY
5.1,
5.2.
Chloroform and methylene chloride have been tentatively classified
as known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens. The toxicity
or carcinogenicity of the remaining chemicals used in this method
has not been precisely defined. Therefore, each should be treated
as a potential health hazard, and exposure should be reduced to the
lowest feasible level. Each laboratory is responsible for safely
disposing materials and for maintaining awareness of OSHA
regulations regarding safe handling of the chemicals used in this
method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should be
made available to all personnel involved in analyses. Additional
information on laboratory safety is available (3-5).
Polychlorinated biphenyls have been classified as known or suspected
human or mammalian carcinogens. Primary standards of these
compounds should be prepared in an area specifically designed to
handle carcinogens. It is recommended that primary dilutions be
obtained from certified sources such as the EPA repository.
5.3.
This
SbCl5 is a corrosive reagent that reacts violently with water.
compound must be used with extreme caution. All operations
involving the pure reagent must be performed in a hood because
appreciable quantities of volatile, potentially harmful materials
will be lost to the atmosphere.
5.4. The perch!orination reaction described in this procedure requires
that the sample extract be heated to 205°C for about 30 min while
hermetically sealed in a glass test tube. The solvents and volumes
described in the procedure should be carefully reproduced; otherwise
202
-------
dangerous pressures may be generated during perch!orination. The
following safety precautions are strongly recommended.
5.4.1. Use only the prescribed perch!orination glassware and
visually check for flaws such as chips, strains, or
scratches. Discard if any abnormalities are noted.
5.4.2. After cooling the perch!orinated product is still under
slight pressure and should be carefully vented in a hood
(Sect. 11.2.8.).
5.4.3. The SbCl5 neutralization step involves an exothermic
reaction and should be performed in a hood (Sect, 11.2.9.).
5.4.4. An explosion shield should be used during the
perchlorination and neutralization procedures along with
additional eye protection such as an 8-in. face shield. An
oil bath heater should not be substituted for the block
digester.
5.5. Storage, labelling and disposal of PCBs must conform to all
applicable laws and regulations. See (6) for USEPA requirements.
Call the Toxics Substances Control Act hotline for further
assistance (1-800-424-9065).
5.6. Methylene chloride is described in the procedure (Sect. 11.1.2) as
the extraction solvent; however, hexane, hexane + 15% methylene
chloride or hexane + 15% ethylether may be substituted to minimize
laboratory personnel exposure to methylene chloride.
5.7. Chloroform is described in the procedure (Sect. 11.2.1) as the
solvent for the perchlorination reaction. Other less toxic solvents
including methylene chloride and hydrocarbons were evaluated but
were found to be unsuitable. Prior to implementing this procedure,
all laboratory personnel must be trained in safe handling practices
for chloroform.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1. Sampling equipment
6.1.1. Water sample bottles -- Meticulously cleaned 1-L glass
bottles fitted with Teflon-lined screw caps.
6.2. Glassware
6.2.1. Separatory Funnel -- 2-L with Teflon stopcock.
6.2.2. Drying Column -- Glass column approximately 400 mm long x
19 mm i.d. with coarse frit filter disc.
203
-------
6.2.3. Concentrator Tube -- 10-mL graduated Kuderna-Danish design
with ground-glass stopper.
6.2.4. Evaporative Flask -- 500-mL Kuderna-Danish design.
6.2.5. Snyder Column -- Three-ball macro Kuderna-Danish design.
6.2.6. Snyder Column -- Three-ball micro Kuderna-Danish design.
6.2.7. Vials -- 10- to 15-mL amber glass with Teflon-lined screw
caps.
6.2.8. Screw cap culture test tubes -- 100 mm x 13 mm i.d. Pyrex
with a Teflon-lined screw cap, Sargent-Welch #S-79533A or
equivalent.
6.2.9. Disposable Pasteur pipettes -- 9-in. heavy wall.
6.2.10. Screw cap test tube -- 15 ml with Teflon-lined screw cap.
6.3. GC System -- Packed column or capillary column.
6.3.1. Isothermal packed column GC equipped with an on-column
injector and a linearized BCD capable of generating a linear
response for DCB from at least 0.005 to 1.0 ng injected.
6.3.2. Programmable capillary column GC equipped with an on-column
or split!ess injector and a linearized ECD capable of
generating a linear response for DCB from at least 0.005 to
1.0 ng injected. The column oven temperature programmer
should have multi-ramp capabilities from at least 60°C to
300 C. For most precise data, an autoinjector should be
used.
6.4. GC Columns
6.4.1. Packed Column -- A 2 mm i.d. x 3 m, glass column packed with
3% OV-1 on 80-100 mesh Supelcoport or equivalent.
6.4.2. Capillary Column -- A 30 m x 0.32 mm i.d. fused silica
capillary coated with a bonded 0.25 urn film of cross linked
phenyl methyl silicone such as Durabond-5 (DB-5).
6.5. Miscellaneous Equipment
6.5.1. Volumetric flask -- 5-mL, 10-mL, and 100 ml with ground
glass stoppers.
6.5.2. Microsyringes -- Various standard sizes.
204
-------
6.5.3. Boiling Chips -- Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat at 400°C
for 30 min or extract with methylene chloride in a Soxhlet
apparatus.
6.5.4. Water Bath -- Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of
temperature control with + 2°C.
6.5.5. Analytical Balance -- Capable of accurately weighing to
0.0001 g.
6.5.6. 1-L graduated cylinder.
6.5.7. Block digestor -- 1.4 cm i.d. x 5 cm deep holes. Operated
at 205°C ± 5°C. Note: A Technicon Model BD-40 block
digestor with specially fabricated aluminum insert bushings
was used to conduct the procedure development research.
Block digesters with holes of other dimensions may adversely
influence recoveries.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1. Solvents -- High purity, distilled in glass toluene, hexane,
methylene chloride, chloroform and methyl alcohol.
7.2. Sodium sulfate -- ACS granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at
400°C for 4 h in a shallow dish. Store in a glass bottle with a
Teflon-lined screw cap.
7.3. SbCl5 > 98%.
7.4. Iron powder - 99.1%.
7.5. PCB Solutions.
7.5.1. Prepare a stock solution of Aroclor 1260 at 5.00 ng/p.1 in
methyl alcohol or obtain a similar mixture from a certified
source.
7.5.2. Prepare a stock solution of DCB at 1.00 M9/ML in toluene or
obtain a similar mixture from a certified source.
7.5.3. PCB fortification solution. Dilute an aliquot of the
Aroclor 1260 stock solution in methyl alcohol to produce
about 10 ml of a solution containing 50.0 ng//xL. Store in a
50-90% filled glass bottle with a Teflon-lined screw cap.
7.5.4. Calibration standards. Five calibration solutions
containing DCB from 0.01 ng/juL to 1.0 ng/p,l in hexane are
required to calibrate the detector response. Prepare
standards at 0.010, 0.080, 0.10, 0.25 and 1.0 r\g/p,L in
hexane (see 4.4) from the stock solution of DCB. Store in
205
-------
50-90% filled glass bottles with Teflon-lined screw caps.
Monitor for solvent loss due to evaporation.
7.5.5. Extract matrix evaluation solution. Dilute an aliquot of
the DCB stock solution to produce about 10 ml of a solution
containing 50.0 ng/jul_ in hexane. Store in a 50-90% filled
glass bottle with a Teflon-lined screw cap.
7.6. Hydrochloric Acid Solution 1+1 - Dilute one part concentrated
hydrochloric acid with one part distilled water.
7.7. 0.1N Sodium Bicarbonate (NaHC03) Solution - Dilute 0.84 g of ACS
grade NaHC03 to 100 ml with reagent water.
7.8. Reagent water - Water in which DCB is found to be less than 0.1 p.g/1
as analyzed by this procedure. Distilled water met this criterion.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1. Sample Collection
8.1.1. Collect duplicate samples in clean 1-L glass containers and
seal with a Teflon-lined screw cap. Fill the bottles to
about 90-95% full.
8.1.2. Because PCBs are hydrophobic they are likely to be adsorbed
on suspended solids. If suspended solids are present in the
source, a representative portion of solids must be included
in the water sample.
8.1.3. When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 1 L/min and
collect the duplicate samples 'from the flowing stream.
8.1.4. When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-gal
wide-mouth bottle from a representative area. Carefully
fill the duplicate sample bottles from the 1-gal bottle.
8.2. Sample Preservation --No chemical preservation reagents are
recommended. Store the samples at 4°C to retard microbial action
until analysis.
8.3. Sample Storage -- Extract samples within 14 days of collection (7).
Extracts and perch!orinated extracts may be stored for up to 30 days
if protected from solvent volatilization.
9. CALIBRATION -- Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial
calibration is required before any samples are analyzed and is required
intermittently throughout sample analyses as dictated by results of
continuing calibration checks. After initial calibration is successfully
performed, a continuing calibration check is required at the beginning
206
-------
and end of each set of samples or 8-hour period during which analyses are
performed.
9.1. Initial Calibration
9.1.1. Inject duplicate aliquots (1-3 pi ) of each calibration
solution into the GC. (Autoinjectors are preferred,
especially with splitless injectors.) Inject five
additional aliquots of the 0.10 ng/juL standard.
9.1.2. Accurately determine the DCB retention time (RT) arid peak
area or peak height for each injection.
9.1.3. Determine the average RT and the standard deviation (SD) of
RTs for all 15 injections. To be acceptable, the RSD of the
RTs should be less than 0.2%.
9.1.4. Determine the response factor (RF) for each of the
injections by dividing the amount (ng) injected into the
resulting area or peak height or integrator units.
9.1.5. Determine the average RF and its SD and RSD for the seven
injections at the 0.10 ng/juL level.
9.1.6. The RSD of the RF should be less than 6% for the seven
injections at the 0.1 ng/jil_ level.
9.1.7. Compare the RF determined for the 0.01, 0.08, 0.25, and
1.0 ng standards to the average RF calculated in 9.1.5 ± 3
SD. If any value falls outside of this range, then the
instrument is not being operated within an acceptable linear
range and the sample volume injected must be adjusted
accordingly. Alternatively, the linear dynamic range can be
clearly defined by injecting standards at other
concentrations. To be marginally acceptable, the system
should function from 0.08 to 0.25 ng injected.
Table II shows typical values obtained during method
developmnt.
9.2. For an acceptable continuing calibration check, the 0.1 ng//iL
calibration standard must be analyzed before and after a series of
samples or at least once after each 8 hours of operation. The RF
must be within + 20% of the mean value determined in 9.1.5, or a
new calibration curve must be generated. Additionally, the RT must
fall within the mean value + 3 SD determined in 9.1.3, or a new
calibration curve must be generated or the reason for the RT
variance must be found and rectified.
9.3. Extract matrix effect evaluation --It has been found that there may
be a matrix effect from the perchlorinated extract which can bias
the response on certain GC systems. Until this problem is
207
-------
understood, an extract matrix effect evaluation should be performed
on each gas chromatographic system to determine if the system can be
used for this procedure. This test should be repeated each time a
modification or change is made to the system.
9.3.1.
9.3.2.
9.3.3.
9.3.4.
9.3.5.
9.3.6.
9.3.7.
Extract, perch!orinate, and cleanup duplicate drinking water
samples or laboratory reagent blanks according to the
procedure halting at step 11.2.13.
Combine the two extracts together in a 25-mL beaker or flask
and mix.
Immediately place 5.0 ml in a volumetric flask and seal.
Place the remaining solution in a second hermetically sealed
container and label MS-1 (mixed sample 1).
Analyze MS-1 in duplicate. If the value for the DCB is
< 0.05 ng/juL, proceed to 9.3.5. If > 0.05 ng/fj.1, proceed to
y • *5 * o •
Fortify the contents of the volumetric flask with 10.0 p.1
of the 50.0 ng/jLtL extract matrix evaluation solution (Sect.
7.5.5) and label SE-1 (fortified extract 1). Analyze SE-1
in duplicate, then proceed to 9.3.
Fortify the contents of the volumetric flask at three to ten
times the concentration found in 9.3.4. If the fortified
value plus the MS-1 value found in 9.3.4 exceeds the linear
dynamic range of the detector (Sect. 9.1.7), then terminate
the test and select another sample. Do not dilute extract
matrices to perform this test.
Determine the extract matrix bias according to the following
calculation:
(SE-1 nq/uL) - (MS-1 ng/ul) x 100
(Fortified value ng//j|_)
= % recovery
Recoveries between 80 and 120% are acceptable. If the
recovery is < 80%, the test should be repeated. If the
recovery remains < 80%, then another GC system should be
used.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1. Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB) -- Perform all steps in the
analytical procedure (Sect. 11) using all glassware, reagents,
standards, equipment, apparatus, and solvents that would be used
for a sample analysis using 1 L of reagent water.
208
-------
10.1.1. Prepare and analyze a LRB before any samples are extracted
and analyzed.
10.1.2. Prepare and analyze additional LRB whenever new batches or
sources of reagents are introduced into the analysis
scheme.
10.1.3. Prepare a LRB each time samples are perchlorinated. If
large batches of samples are perchlorinated, then prepare
and analyze 1 LRB per 10 samples.
10.1.4. An acceptable LRB contains < 0.025 ng/juL of DCB.
10.1.5. Corrective action for unacceptable LRB -- Systematically
check solvents, reagents (particularly the SbCl5 and
methylene chloride), apparatus and glassware to locate and
eliminate the source of contamination before any samples
are extracted, perchlorinated, and analyzed. Purify or
discard contaminated reagents and solvents.
10.2. Calibration -- Included among initial and continuing calibration
procedures are numerous QC checks to ensure that valid data are
being acquired (See Sect. 9). Continuing calibration checks are
accomplished with results from analysis of one solution, the
0.10 ng/juL calibration solution.
10.2.1. If some criteria are not met for a continuing calibration
check after an 8-h period or after a series of samples are
analyzed, then those samples must be reanalyzed. Those
criteria include the RF criteria and the RT criteria
described in Sect. 9.2.
10.3. All sample concentrations must be bracketed by the calibration
curve and must be within the linear dynamic range of the detector.
(See Sect. 9.1.7.)
10.3.1. Samples that fall outside the linear dynamic range due to
excessive concentration must be reanalyzed after
appropriate dilution if accurate values for DCB are
required.
10.4. All GC systems must be evaluated for extract matrix effect bias
according to Sect. 9.3.
10.4.1. Systems that exhibit a bias in excess of + or - 20% should
not be used for this determination.
10.5. Initial demonstration of laboratory capability for water analysis.
10.5.1. Prepare one or more solutions containing representative
PCB mixtures at a concentration that falls within the
209
-------
10.9,
10.10,
10.5.2.
10.5.3.
linear dynamic range of the instrument. Reagent water
fortified with Aroclor 1260 is recommended for this test.
Fortify four to seven 1-L portions of reagent water with
10.0 juL of the 50 ng/p.1 PCB solution (Sect. 7.5.3).
Extract and analyze the fortified water samples according
to the procedure (Sect. 11).
Calculate the recovery according to the following formula:
(Total nq found in extract) x 100
% Recovery =
where 691 =
691
500 ng
mwDCB (499)
mw Aroclor 1260 (361)'
10.5.4.
aSee Table 1 for the molecular weights of other Aroclors.
Determine the average concentration and the relative SD of
the five measurements. Average recovery should be 100%
±20 with a RSD of < 10%.
10.6. Fortify reagent water with varying quantities of the 50 ng/juL PCB
solution (Sect. 7.5.3). Analyze at least one fortified sample for
each batch of 20 samples. Calculate recovery according to Sect
10.5.3. Maintain QC charts of these data. Until interlaboratory
data are available, the recovery of the fortified sample should be
equivalent to that determined in 10.5.4.
10.7. Sample matrix effects have been observed with this procedure and
they are significant. Check for sample matrix effects by analyzing
one laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) for every 20 samples.
10.8. At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy (Sect. 10.5.4), check the entire analytical
procedure to locate and correct the problem source.
Qualitative identification of DCB in the samples is based on the
average RT for DCB determined in Sect. 9.1.3. For a positive
identification, the DCB peak must elute within the window bracketed
by the average retention + 3 SD. If DCB appears to fall outside of
this window, then further analyses of samples should be halted and
Sect. 9.2 initiated.
It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this method. The specific
practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the
laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements.
Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference
210
-------
materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation
studies.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1. Sample Extraction
11.1.1. Mark the sample meniscus on the side of the sample bottle
for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire
sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
11.1.2. Add 60 ml of methylene chloride (See Sect. 5.6) to the
sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner
surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel
and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min
with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Wait at
least 10 min to allow the organic layer to separate from
the water phase. If the emulsion interface between layers
is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer,
use mechanical techniques (such as stirring, filtration of
emulsion through glass wool, or centrifugation) to
complete phase separation. Collect the methylene chloride
extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask. Add a second 60-mL
volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and
repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining
the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third
extraction in the same manner.
11.1.3. Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching
a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
11.1.4. Pour the combined extract into a solvent-rinsed drying
column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with a 20 to 30 ml portion of
methylene chloride adding the rinse to the drying column.
Collect the combined extract in the K-D concentrator.
11.1.5. Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative
flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the
Snyder column by adding about 1 ml of methylene chloride
to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath
(60-65°C) so that the concentrator tube is partially
immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded
surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the
vertical position of the apparatus and the water
temperature as required to complete the concentration in
15-20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls
of the column will actively chatter, but the chambers will
not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent
volume of liquid reaches 1 ml, remove the K-D apparatus
from the water bath and allow it to drain and cool for at
least 10 min.
211
-------
11.1.6. Remove the 10-mL concentrator tube from the 500-mL
evaporative flask and attach a 3-ball micro Snyder column.
After wetting the column with about 0.5 mL of methylene
chloride, continue concentrating the extract down to about
2 mL.
11.1.7. Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
sample bottle with water to the mark and transferring the
liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 ml.
11.2. Perchlorination (8,9)
11.2.1.
11.2.2.
11.2.3,
11.2.4.
11.2.5.
11.2.6.
11.2.7.
11.2.8.
11.2.9.
Quantitatively transfer the extract to a 100 mm x 13 mm
i.d. screw cap test tube. Rinse the KD ampul three times
with 250 /LiL of chloroform adding the rinse to the test
tube.
Concentrate the extract to about 0.1 mL (0.1 mL is about
the volume of one drop of water) by directing a stream of
nitrogen flowing at about 100 mL/m into the test tube
while warming the base of the test tube in a 50°C water
bath.
11.2.2.1. Do not allow to go to dryness.
11.2.2.2. Disposable pipettes are a convenient means of
directing the nitrogen into the test tube. In
an effort to minimize cross contamination, a
new pipette should be used for each sample.
Add an additional 2 mL of chloroform and again concentrate
to 0.1 mL using the nitrogen blow-down technique.
Add 100 mg of iron powder to the extract.
Using a disposable pipette, carefully add 25 drops of
SbCl5 to the extract. (See Sect. 5.3). Seal immediately.
Heat to 205°C + 5°C for a minimum of 30 min but do not
exceed 45 min. Perform the reaction in the hood behind an
explosion shield.
Allow the mixture to cool to room temperature.
Carefully open in a hood. (The extract will be under a
slight pressure.)
Slowly add 0.5 mL of 1+1 diluted hydrochloric acid to the
perchlorinated extract in a hood. Caution: The remaining
SbCl5 will react exothermally with the HC1. If a white
212
-------
precipitate is present, add additional hydrochloric acid
solution until it dissolves.
11.2.10. Add 2.0 ml of hexane to the contents of the test tube.
Seal and shake for 2 min. Allow the two phases to
separate. Decant the top layer into a 5.0-mL volumetric
flask. Reextract the mixture two additional times: First
with 2.0 ml of hexane, then with 1.0 ml of hexane, adding
the extracts to the 5.0-mL volumetric flask. Carefully
adjust the volume to 5.0 ml using hexane.
11.2.11. Add 4 ml of 0.1 N NaHC03 to a 15-mL test tube with a
Teflon-lined screw cap. Pour the contents of the 5-mL
volumetric flask into the test tube. (Note: Do not rinse
the volumetric flask with additional solvent.) Seal and
shake for 1 min. Allow the two phases to separate.
11.2.12. Decant the top layer into a second 15-mL test tube. Add
4 mL of reagent water. Seal and shake for 1 min.
11.2.13. Decant the top layer and store in a hermetically sealed
container for GC analysis.
11.3. GC -- Packed - on-column injection ECD, capillary - on-column
injection electron capture and capillary split!ess injection ECD GC
systems have been evaluated and found to generate acceptable data
for DCB as long as Sect. 10.4 criteria are met. The following
conditions were used to generate the single-laboratory accuracy and
precision data listed in Sect. 13. The values given are for
guidance because slight modifications may be necessary to optimize
specific GC systems.
11.3.1. The packed column GC was operated with a glass column 3 m
long with an i.d. of 2 mm. The column was packed with 3%
OV-1 coated on 80-100 mesh Supelcoport. 3.0 /xL volumes
of each sample was injected directly on column using an
autosampler. The injection port was held at 200°C while
the column was maintained isothermally at 235°C with an
Argon +5% methane carrier gas flowing at 50 mL/min. The
ECD was maintained at 300°C with no auxiliary make-up gas.
Under these conditions, the average RT for DCB was 9.49
min with a SD of 0.014. DCB was adequately resolved from
other perch!orination reaction byproducts to generate
accurate data for drinking water samples. Highly
contaminated raw source water generated complex chromato-
grams with late eluting components that interfered with
DCB measurements.
11.3.2. The capillary column on-column GC was operated with a DB-5
fused silica column 30 m long with a 0.32 mm i.d. and a
0.25 fan film thickness. The helium carrier gas was
213
-------
11.3.3.
12. CALCULATIONS
adjusted to flow at 29 cm/sec at 60°C. Three microliter
sample volumes were injected on-column into a 0.5 mm i.d.
x 10 cm fused silica retention gap using an autoinjector.
The retention gap was maintained at 60°C during injection.
The capillary column was maintained at 60°C until one
minute after injection, then programmed at 20°/min to
180°C. After a 2 minute hold, the column was again
programmed at 20°C/nrin to 290°C and held there until all
compounds eluted. The ECD was operated at 300°C with an
Argon +5% methane makeup gas flowing at 20 mL/min.
Under these conditions the average RT for DCB was 21.85
min with a SD of 0.021. DCB was adequately resolved from
other perch!orination byproducts to generate accurate data
for both finished drinking water and raw source water
samples.
The capillary column splitless injection GC was operated
with a DB-5 fused silica column 30 m long with an i.d. of
0.32 mm and a 0.25 /zm film thickness. The helium carrier
gas was adjusted to flow at 29 cm/sec at 180°C. Three juL
injection volumes were delivered by an autoinjector into
the splitless injecto'r operated at 250°C. The splitless
time was set for 30 sec.
The capillary column was maintained at 180°C until one
minute after injection, then programmed at 20°C/min to
290°C and held for 20 min or until all late eluting
compounds eluted. The electron capture was operated at
300 C with an argon + 5% methane makeup gas flowing at
20 mL/min.
Under these conditions the average RT for DCB was 24.75
min with a SD of 0.009. DCB was adequately resolved from
other perchlorination byproducts to generate accurate data
for both finished drinking water and raw source water
samples.
12.1. Calculate the concentration of the DCB found in each extract using
an automated data system or according to the formula.
12.1.1. Extract concentration ng//zL =
Area Sample
uL In.iected
RF
12.1.2. Sample concentration ng/L = (Concentration nq/pL) (5000)
M/ volume of sample (L)
where: area sample = area, peak height or
214
-------
integrator units
/zL injected = volume of sample injected
into GC
5000 = final volume of extract in #L
(Sect. 11.2.10)
Volume of sample (L) = volume of sample
extracted in liters (Sect. 11.1.7)
RF = average RF (9.1.4) for
the 0.1 ng//iL standard.
12.1.3. Calculations should utilize all available digits of
precision, but final reported concentrations should be
rounded to an appropriate number of significant figures
(one digit of uncertainty). Experience indicates that
three significant figures may be used for concentrations
above 99 /Ltg/L, two significant figures for concentrations
between 0.1-99 fig/I, and one significant figure for lower
concentrations.
12.1.4. Do not subtract method blanks from the sample data unless
otherwise required in the procedure.
13. METHOD PERFORMANCE — To obtain single-laboratory accuracy and precision
data for method analytes, seven 1-L aliquots of chlorinated tap water,
groundwater and river water were fortified with 500 ng of PCBs from
several sources. The samples were extracted, perchlorinated and analyzed
according to Sect. 11. Tables 3 and 4 list the resulting data.
14. REFERENCES
1. Ballschmiter, K. and M. Zell, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem.. 302, 20,
1980.
2. DeKok, A., et al., Intern. J. Environ. Anal. Chem.. Vol. 11, pp.
17-41, 1982.
3. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
publication No. 77-206. August 1977.
4. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards," (29 CFR 1910), Occupational
Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
5. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4th Edition,
1985.
215
-------
6. 40 CFR Part 761.60; .65; .40; .45 40 CFR Part 761, Polychlorinated
Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce and Use Prohibitions.
7. Bellar, T.A. and Lichtenberg, J. J., "Some Factors Affecting
Recovery of Polychlorinated Biphenyls from Water and Bottom
Samples," ASTM, STP 573, Water Quality Parameters, 1975.
8. H. Steinwandter, Brune, H. Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem. 314, 160,
1983.
9. H. Steinwandter, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem. 317, 869-871, 1984.
10. Armour, J., JQAC, 56, 4, 987-993, 1973.
11. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
"Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci. Techno!. lj> 1426,
1981.
216
-------
TABLE 1. DECACHLOROBIPHENYL EQUIVALENT OF
COMMON PCB SOURCES
Decachloro-
Compound
2-Chlorobiphenyl
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Dechlorobiphenyl
Congener
Number
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
209
Mol ecul ar
Weiaht3
188.5
188.5
223
257.5
257.5
292
326.4
361
499
Concentration
fua/L}
0.19
0.19
0.23
0.26
0.26
0.30
0.33
0.36
0.50
biphenyl
Equiva1ent(%)°
263
263
217
192
192
167
152
139
100
a Values from (10).
b /j.g/1 of various PCBs required to generate a value of 0.50 /xg/L DCB (assuming
100% method recovery).
c The decachlorobiphenyl produced by perchlorination will be this percentage
greater than the original concentration of the PCB/Aroclor listed.
217
-------
TABLE 2. CALIBRATION CURVE LINEARITY TEST
AND RETENTION DATA
Standard
Concentration
fno/tzL)
0.01
0.01
0.08
0.08
,1
0,
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.1
0.25
0.25
1.0
1.0
Retention
Time
fmin)
24.74
24.74
24.74
24.73
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.74
24.74
24.76
24.76
24.76
24.76
Response
Factor
farea/ng)
48790
50650
48240
47260
48300 Average
49550 Standard
51170 Deviation
49160
43220 Relative
47490 Standard
47320 Deviation
49960
48240
47230
48410
48030
2500
5.2%
Average RT =
SD -
Relative Standard Deviation =
24.75
0.009
0.038%
218
-------
TABLE 3. SPLITLESS CAPILLARY COLUMN SINGLE LABORATORY
ACCURACY AND PRECISION FOR FORTIFIED TAP WATER
Source of
PCBs
2-Chlorobiphenyl
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor
Aroclor
Aroclor
Biphenyl
1248
1254
1260
MDL(11> Concentration Accuracy36
uo/L fuq/L) (%}
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
08
14
23
21
15
14
14
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
85;
99
124
82
136
122;
113;
109;
(96)b
(137)c
(96)*
(75)c
Precis ionae
RSD. m
5
8
11
13
8
6
6
4
.0;
.4
.3
.1
.6
.4;
.5;
.8;
(9
(7
(6
(5
.9)b
•6)b
.9)b
.8)"
aData corrected for source water background. Average value over
study = 0.11 jug/L
bData collected by on-column capillary column GC.
cData collected by packed column GC.
Potential method interference compound.
fortified matrix effect bias (See Sect. 9.3)
Splitless capillary column 103, 113
Packed column 93, 95
Splitless on-column (not performed)
219
-------
TABLE 4. SPLITLESS CAPILLARY COLUMN SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY
AND PRECISION FOR RAW SOURCE WATERS
Raw
Source
Water
Ohio River
Spring
Ohio River
Little Miami
Source
of PCBs
Arocl or
1221
1260
1221
1260
Concen-
tration
fua/Ll
0.50
0.50
0.50
5.0
Extraction
Solvent
CH2C12
CH2C12
Hexane
Hexane
Source Water
Background
fua/L)
0.54
0.19
0.16
0.14
Accuracy
f%)
114
101
123
91
Precision
RSD (%)
8.4
7.9
7.5
5.8
River
Ohio River
1260
5.0
Hexane
0.29
100
5.4
220
-------
METHOD 515.1. DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED ACIDS IN WATER
BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
Revision 4.0
R.C. Dressman and J.J. Lichtenberg - EPA 600/4-81-053, Revision 1.0 (1981)
J.W. Hodgeson - Method 515, Revision 2.0 (1986)
T. Engels (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
Method 3, Revision 3.0 (1987)
R.L. Graves - Method 515.1, Revision 4.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
221
-------
METHOD 515.1
DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED ACIDS IN WATER BY GAS
CHROMAT06RAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1
1.2
1.3
This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the
determination of certain chlorinated acids in ground water and
finished drinking water.(1) The following compounds can be
determined by this method:
Analvte
Acifluorfen*
Bentazon
Chioramben*
2,4-D
Dalapon*
2,4-DB
DCPA acid metabolites(a)
Dicamba
3,5-Dichlorobenzoic acid
Dichlorprop
Dinoseb
5-Hydroxydicamba
4-Nitrophenol*
Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
Picloram
2,4,5-T
2,4,5-TP
Chemical Abstract Services
Registry Number
50594-66-6
25057-89-0
133-90-4
94-75-7
75-99-0
94-82-6
1918-
51-
120-
88-
7600-
100-
87-
1918-
93-
93-
00-9
36-5
36-5
85-7
50-2
02-7
86-5
02-1
76-5
72-1
(a)DCPA monoacid and diacid metabolites included in method scope;
DCPA diacid metabolite used for validation studies.
*These compounds are only qualitatively identified in the National
Pesticides Survey (NPS) Program. These compounds are not
quantitated because control over precision has not been
accomplished.
This method may be applicable to the determination of salts and
esters of analyte acids. The form of each acid is not distinguished
by this method. Results are calculated and reported for each listed
analyte as the total free acid.
This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
(Sect.13). Observed detection limits may vary between ground
waters, depending upon the nature of interferences in the sample
matrix and the specific instrumentation used.
222
-------
1.4 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of
gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to
generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure
described in Sect. 10.3.
1.5 Analytes that are not separated chromatographically i.e., which have
very similar retention times, cannot be individually identified and
measured in the same calibration mixture or water sample unless an
alternate technique for identification and quantitation exist (Sect.
11.8).
1.6 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
all of the analytes above, analyte identifications must be confirmed
by at least one additional qualitative technique.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 A measured volume of sample of approximately 1 L is adjusted to pH
12 with 6 N sodium hydroxide and shaken for 1 hr to hydrolyze
derivatives. Extraneous organic material is removed by a solvent
wash. The sample is acidified, and the chlorinated acids are
extracted with ethyl ether by shaking in a separatory funnel or
mechanical tumbling in a bottle. The acids are converted to their
methyl esters using diazomethane as the derivatizing agent. Excess
derivatizing reagent is removed, and the esters are determined by
capillary column/GC using an electron capture detector (ECD).
2.2 The method provides a Florisil cleanup procedure to aid in the
elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte -- A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) -- Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
223
-------
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) --An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) -- A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) --An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) --An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution -- A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution -- A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) -- A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
224
-------
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) -- A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.
All reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.
4.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.(2) Clean all glass-
ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
the last solvent used in it. Follow by washing with hot
water and detergent and thorough rinsing with dilute acid,
tap and reagent water. Drain dry, and heat in an oven or
muffle furnace at 400°C for 1 hr. Do not heat volumetric
ware. Thermally stable materials such as PCBs might not be
eliminated by this treatment. Thorough rinsing with acetone
may be substituted for the heating. After drying and
cooling, seal and store glassware in a clean environment to
prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants.
Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.
4.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by
distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by
the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the
solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified,
preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
4.2 The acid forms of the analytes are strong organic acids which react
readily with alkaline substances and can be lost during sample
preparation. Glassware and glass wool must be acid-rinsed with IN
hydrochloric acid and the sodium sulfate must be acidified with
sulfuric acid prior to use to avoid analyte losses due to
adsorption.
4.3 Organic acids and phenols, especially chlorinated compounds, cause
the most direct interference with the determination. Alkaline
hydrolysis and subsequent extraction of the basic sample removes
many chlorinated hydrocarbons and phthalate esters that might
otherwise interfere with the electron capture analysis.
225
-------
4.4 Interferences by phthalate esters can pose a major problem in pesti-
cide analysis when using the ECD. These compounds generally appear
in the chromatogram as large peaks. Common flexible plastics
contain varying amounts of phthalates, that are easily extracted or
leached during laboratory operations. Cross contamination of clean
glassware routinely occurs when plastics are handled during
extraction steps, especially when solvent-wetted surfaces are
handled. Interferences from phthalates can best be minimized by
avoiding the use of plastics in the laboratory. Exhaustive
purification of reagents and glassware may be required to eliminate
background phthalate contamination.(3,4)
4.5 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a
sample containing relatively high concentrations of analytes.
Between-sample rinsing of the sample syringe and associated
equipment with methyl-t-butyl-ether (MTBE) can minimize sample cross
contamination. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of analytes, one or more injections of MTBE should be
made to ensure that accurate values are obtained for the next
sample.
4.6 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are
coextracted from the sample. Also, note that all analytes listed in
the Scope and Application Section are not resolved from each other
on any one column, i.e., one analyte of interest may be an
interferant for another analyte of interest. The extent of matrix
interferences will vary considerably from source to source,
depending upon the water sampled. The procedures in Sect. 11 can be
used to overcome many of these interferences. Positive
identifications should be confirmed (Sect. 11.8).
4.7 It is important that samples and working standards be contained in
the same solvent. The solvent for working standards must be the
same as the final solvent used in sample preparation. If this is
not the case, chromatographic comparability of standards to sample
may be affected.
5. SAFETY
5.1
5.2
The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
be treated as a potential health hazard. Accordingly, exposure to
these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level. The
laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data
sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified (6-8) for the information of
the analyst.
DIAZOMETHANE -- A toxic carcinogen which can explode under certain
conditions. The following precautions must be followed:
226
-------
5.2.1 Use only a well ventilated hood -- do not breath vapors.
5.2.2 Use a safety screen.
5.2.3 Use mechanical pipetting aides.
5.2.4 Do not heat above 90°C -- EXPLOSION may result.
5.2.5 Avoid grinding surfaces, ground glass joints, sleeve
bearings, glass stirrers -- EXPLOSION may result.
5.2.6 Store away from alkali metals -- EXPLOSION may result.
5.2.7 Solutions of diazomethane decompose rapidly in the presence
of solid materials such as copper powder, calcium chloride,
and boiling chips.
5.2.8 The diazomethane generation apparatus used in the
esterification procedures (Sect. 11.4 and 11.5) produces
micromolar amounts of diazomethane to minimize safety
hazards.
5.3 ETHYL ETHER -- Nanograde, redistilled in glass, if necessary.
5.3.1 Ethyl ether is an extremely flammable solvent. If a
mechanical device is used for sample extraction, the device
should be equipped with an explosion-proof motor and placed
in a hood to avoid possible damage and injury due to an
explosion.
5.3.2 Must be free of peroxides as indicated by EM Quant test
strips (available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No.
PI 126-8, and other suppliers).
5.4 WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All specifications are suggested. Catalog
numbers are included for illustration only.)
6.1 SAMPLE BOTTLE -- Borosilicate, 1-L volume with graduations (Wheaton
Media/Lab bottle'219820 or equivalent), fitted with screw caps lined
with TFE-fluorocarbon. Protect samples from light. The container
must be washed and dried as described in Sect. 4.1.1 before use to
minimize contamination. Cap liners are cut to fit from sheets
(Pierce Catalog No. 012736) and extracted with methanol overnight
prior to use.
6.2 GLASSWARE
6.2.1 Separatory funnel -- 2000-mL, with TFE-fluorocarbon stop-
cocks, ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stoppers.
227
-------
6.2.2 Tumbler bottle -- 1.7-L (Wheaton Roller Culture Vessel or
equivalent), with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap. Cap
liners are cut to fit from sheets (Pierce Catalog No. 012736)
and extracted with methanol overnight prior to use.
6.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D) -- 10- or 25-mL,
graduated (Kontes K-570050-2525 or Kontes K-570050-1025 or
equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes
employed in the test. Ground glass stoppers are used to
prevent evaporation of extracts.
6.2.4 Evaporative flask, K-D -- 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
6.2.5 Snyder column, K-D -- three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121
or equivalent).
6.2.6 Snyder column, K-D -- two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
equivalent).
6.2.7 Flask, round-bottom -- 500-mL with 24/40 ground glass joint.
6.2.8 Vials -- glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
lined screw cap.
6.2.9 Disposable pipets -- sterile plugged borosilicate glass, 5-mL
capacity (Corning 7078-5N or equivalent).
6.3 SEPARATORY FUNNEL SHAKER -- Capable of holding 2-L separatory
funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve thorough
mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from Eberbach Co. in
Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).
6.4 TUMBLER -- Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg. Co.,
Alexandria, VA and other suppliers).
6.5 BOILING STONES -- Teflon, Chemware (Norton Performance Plastics No.
015021 and other suppliers).
6.6
6.7
WATER BATH -- Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C).
bath should be used in a hood.
The
BALANCE -- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.8 DIAZOMETHANE GENERATOR -- Assemble from two 20 x 150 mm test tubes,
two Neoprene rubber stoppers, and a source of nitrogen as shown in
Figure 1 (available from Aldrich Chemical Co.). When esterification
is performed using diazomethane solution, the diazomethane collector
is cooled in an approximately 2-L thermos for ice bath or a
cryogenically cooled vessel (Thermoelectrics Unlimited Model SK-12
or equivalent).
228
-------
6.9 GLASS WOOL -- Acid washed (Supelco 2-0383 or equivalent) and heated
at 450°C for 4 hr.
6.10 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH -- Analytical system complete with temperature
programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
detector and stripchart recorder. A data system is recommended for
measuring peak areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for
method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
described below.
6.10.1 Column 1 (Primary column) -- 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film thickness (J&W
Scientific). Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30
cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
from 60°C to 300°C at 4"C/min. Data presented in this
method were obtained using this column. The injection
volume was 2 juL split!ess mode with 45 second delay. The
injector temperature was 250°C and the detector was 320°C.
Alternative columns may be used in accordance with the
provisions described in Sect. 10.2.
6.10.2 Column 2 (Confirmation column) -- 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D.
DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 urn film thickness
(J&W Scientific). Helium carrier gas flow is established at
30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.
6.10.3 Detector -- Electron capture. This detector has proven
effective in the analysis of fortified reagent and arti-
ficial ground waters. An ECD was used to generate the
validation data presented in this method. Alternative de-
tectors, including a mass spectrometer, may be used in
accordance with the provisions described in Sect. 10.3.
REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - WARNING: When a solvent is purified,
stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially
making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified,
preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially
reducing the shelf-life.
7.1 ACETONE, METHANOL, METHYLENE CHLORIDE, MTBE -- Pesticide quality or
equivalent.
7.2 ETHYL ETHER, UNPRESERVED -- Nanograde, redistilled in glass if
necessary. Must be free of peroxides as indicated by EM Quant test
strips (available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No. PI126-8,
and other suppliers). Procedures recommended for removal of per-
oxides are provided with the test strips.
7.3 SODIUM SULFATE, GRANULAR, ANHYDROUS, ACS GRADE -- Heat treat in a
shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hr to remove interfering
organic substances. Acidify by slurrying 100 g sodium sulfate with
enough ethyl ether to just cover the solid. Add 0.1 mL concentrated
229
-------
sulfuric acid and mix thoroughly. Remove the ether under vacuum.
Mix 1 g of the resulting solid with 5 ml of reagent water and
measure the pH of the mixture. The pH must be below pH 4. Store at
130eC.
7.4 SODIUM THIOSULFATE, GRANULAR, ANHYDROUS -- ACS grade.
7.5 SODIUM HYDROXIDE (NAOH), PELLETS -- ACS grade.
7.5.1 NaOH, 6 N -- Dissolve 216 g NaOH in 900 mL reagent water.
*
7.6 SULFURIC ACID, CONCENTRATED -- ACS grade,sp. gr. 1.84.
7.6.1 Sulfuric acid, 12 N -- Slowly add 335 mL concentrated
sulfuric acid to 665 mL of reagent water.
7.7 POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE (KOH), PELLETS -- ACS grade.
7.7.1 KOH, 37% (w/v) -- Dissolve 37 g KOH pellets in reagent water
and dilute to 100 mL.
7.8 CARBITOL (DIETHYLENE 6LYCOL MONOETHYL ETHER) -- ACS grade.
Available from Aldrich Chemical Co.
7.9 DIAZALD, ACS grade -- Available from Aldrich Chemical Co.
7.10 DIAZALD SOLUTION -- Prepare a solution containing 10 g Diazald in
100 mL of a 50:50 by volume mixture of ethyl ether and carbitol.
This solution is stable for one month or longer when stored at 4"C
in an amber bottle with a Teflon-lined screw cap.
7.11 SODIUM CHLORIDE (NACL), CRYSTAL, ACS GRADE -- Heat treat in a
shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hr to remove interfering
organic substances.
7.12 4,4'-DIBROMOOCTAFLUOROBIPHENYL (DBOB) -- 99% purity, for use as
internal standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co).
7.13 2,4-DICHLOROPHENYLACETIC ACID (DCAA) -- 99% purity, for use as
surrogate standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co).
7.14 MERCURIC CHLORIDE -- ACS grade (Aldrich Chemical Co.) - for use as a
bacteriocide. If any other bactericide can be shown to work as well
as mercuric chloride, it may be used instead.
7.15 REAGENT WATER -- Reagent water is defined as water that is
reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
determination of any analyte of interest. Reagent water used to
generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.
7.16 SILICIC ACID, ACS GRADE.
230
-------
7.17 FLORISIL --, 60-100/PR mesh (Sigma No. F-9127). Activate by heating
in a shallow container at 150°C for at least 24 and not more than 48
. hr.
7.18 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 jugM) -- Stock standard solutions
may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
standard materials using the following procedure:
7.18.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
; : approximately 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the
material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of the
analyst. If compound purity is certified at 96% or greater,
the weight may be used without correction to calculate the
concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared
stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
7.18.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
carbon-sealed screw cap amber vials. Store at room tempera-
ture and protect from light.
7.18.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
, QC samples indicate a problem.
7.19 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION -- Prepare an internal standard solution
by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of pure DBOB.
Dissolve the DBOB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Transfer the internal standard solution to a TFE-fluoro-
carbon- sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.
Addition of 25 juL of the internal standard solution to 10 mL of
sample extract results in a final internal standard concentration of
0.25 /zg/mL. Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10)
indicates a problem. Note that DBOB has been shown to be an
effective internal standard for the method analytes(l), but other
compounds may be used if the quality control requirements in Sect.
10 are met.
7.20 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION -- Prepare a surrogate standard solution
by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of pure DCAA.
Dissolve the DCAA in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Transfer the surrogate standard solution to a TFE-fluoro-
carbon- sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.
Addition of 50 /^L of the surrogate standard solution to a 1-L sample
prior to extraction results in a surrogate standard concentration in
the sample of 5 jug/L and, assuming quantitative recovery of DCAA, a
.surrogate standard concentration in the final extract of 0.5 jug/mL.
Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a
problem. Note DCAA has been shown to be an effective surrogate
standard for the method analytes(l), but other compounds may be used
if the quality control requirements in Sect. 10.4 are met.
231
-------
7.21 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTIONS -- Prepare a diluted dinoseb
solution by adding 10 pL of the 1.0 M9/^L dinoseb stock solution to
the MTBE and diluting to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. To
prepare the check solution, add 40 /iL of the diluted dinoseb
solution, 16 juL of the 4-nitrophenol stock solution, 6 juL of the
3,5-dichlorobenzoic acid stock solution, 50 p,L of the surrogate
standard solution, 25 /zL of the internal standard solution, and 250
pi of methanol to a 5-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with
MTBE. Methyl ate sample as described in Sects. 11.4 or 11.5. Dilute
the sample to 10 mL in MTBE. Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed
screw cap bottle and store at room temperature. Solution should be
replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional
sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the bottle must
not be prerinsed with sample before collection.
8.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND STORAGE
8.2.1 Add mercuric chloride (See 7.14) to the sample bottle in
amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L. Add 1 mL of
a 10 mg/mL solution of mercuric chloride in water to the
sample bottle at the sampling site or in the laboratory
before shipping to the sampling site. A major disadvantage
of mercuric chloride is that it is a highly toxic chemical;
mercuric chloride must be handled with caution, and samples
containing mercuric chloride must be disposed of properly.
8.2.2 If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior
to collecting the sample.
8.2.3 After the sample is collected in the bottle containing
preservative(s), seal the bottle and shake vigorously for
1 min.
8.2.4 The samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C away from
light from the time of collection until extraction.
Preservation study results indicate that the analytes
(measured as total acid) present in samples are stable for
14 days when stored under these conditions.(1) However,
analyte stability may be affected by the matrix; therefore,
the analyst should verify that the preservation technique is
applicable to the samples under study.
8.3 EXTRACT STORAGE
8.3.1 Extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light.
Preservation study results indicate that most analytes are
stable for 28 days(l); however, the analyst should verify
appropriate extract holding times applicable to the samples
under study.
232
-------
9. CALIBRATION
9.1 Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.10. The GC system may be calibrated using either the
internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
technique (Sect. 9.3). NOTE: Calibration standard solutions must
be prepared such that no unresolved analytes are mixed together.
9.2 INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE -- To use this approach, the
analyst must select one or more internal standards compatible in
analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must
further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is
not affected by method or matrix interferences.. DBOB has been
identified as a suitable internal standard.
9.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a
known constant amount of one or more of the internal
standards and 250 /iL methanol, and dilute to volume with
MTBE. Esterify acids with diazomethane as described in Sect.
11.4 or 11.5. ' The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, the respective EDLs. The
remaining standards should bracket the analyte concentrations
expected in the sample extracts, or should define the working
range of the detector.
9.2.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
(Sect. 11.7). Tabulate response (peak height or area)
against concentration for each compound and internal
standard. Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.
(As) (c,8)
RF = Equation 1
(Ais) (Cs)
where:
As = Response for the analyte to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Cis = Concentration of the internal standard (p.g/L).
Cs = Concentration of the analyte to be measured
(M9/L).
9.2.3 If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
or less) the average RF can be used for calculations. Alter-
natively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve
of response ratios (As/Ais) vs. Cs.
233
-------
9.2.4 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
standards. If the response for any analyte varies from the
predicted response by more than ±20%, the test must be re-
peated using a fresh calibration standard. If the repetition
also fails, a new calibration curve must be generated for
that analyte using freshly prepared standards.
9.3.5 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a cali-
bration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
9.2.6 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
9.3 EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
9.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
more stock standards and 250 nl methanol to a volumetric
flask. Dilute to volume with MTBE. Esterify acids with
diazomethane as described in Sect. 11.4 or 11.5. The best
standard should represent analyte concentrations near, but
above, the respective EDL. The remaining standards should
bracket the analyte concentrations expected in the sample
extracts, or should define the working range of the detector.
9.3.2 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.7 and tabu-
late response (peak height or area) versus the concentration
in the standard. The results can be used to prepare a cali-
bration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio
of response to concentration (calibration factor) is a con-
stant over the working range (20% RSD or less), linearity
through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or
calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration
curve.
9.3.3 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
one at the end of the analysis day. These check standards
should be at two different concentration levels to verify the
calibration curve. For extended periods of analysis (greater
than 8 hr), it is strongly recommended that check standards
be interspersed with samples at regular intervals during the
course of the analyses. If the response for any analyte
234
-------
varies from the predicted response by more than + 20%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If
the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
curve or use a single point calibration standard as described
in Sect. 9.3.3.
9.3.4 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards in MTBE. The single point
standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
no more than 20%.
9.2.5 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
material obtained from an independent source. Results from
these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
check calibration.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
of laboratory capability, determination of surrogate compound
recoveries in each sample and blank, monitoring internal standard
peak area or height in each sample and blank (when internal standard
calibration procedures are being employed), analysis of laboratory
reagent blanks, laboratory fortified samples, laboratory fortified
blanks, and QC samples.
10.2 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS (LRB). Before processing any samples, the
analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent
interferences are under control. Each time a set of samples is
extracted or reagents are changed, a LRB must be analyzed. If
within the retention time window of any analyte the LRB produces a
peak that would prevent the determination of that analyte, determine
the source of contamination and eliminate the interference before
processing samples.
10.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability.
10.3.1 Select a representative fortified concentration (about 10
times EDL) for each analyte. Prepare a sample concentrate
(in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times selected
concentration. With a syringe, add 1 mL of the concentrate
to each of at least four 1-L aliquots of reagent water, and
analyze each aliquot according to procedures beginning in
Sect. 11.
10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ± 3SR
if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent water
in Table 2. For those compounds that meet the acceptable
criteria, performance is considered acceptable and sample
analysis may begin. For those compounds that fail these
235
-------
criteria, this procedure must be reported using five fresh
samples until satisfactory performance has been
demonstrated.
10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
with it. It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
experience with this method the quality of data will improve
beyond those required here.
10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions,
detectors, continuous extraction techniques, concentration
techniques (i.e., evaporation techniques), internal standard or
surrogate compounds. Each time such method modifications are made,
the analyst must repeat the procedures in Sect. 10.3
10.5 ASSESSING SURROGATE RECOVERY.
10.5.1 When surrogate recovery from a sample or method blank is
<70% or >130%, check (1) calculations to locate possible
errors, (2) spiking solutions for degradation, (3)
contamination, and (4) instrument performance. If those
steps do not reveal the cause of the problem, reanalyze the
extract.
10.5.2 If a blank extract reanalysis fails the 70-130% recovery
criterion, the problem must be identified and corrected
before continuing.
10.5.3 If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
criterion, report only data for the analyzed extract. If
sample extract continues to fail the recovery criterion,
report all data for that sample as suspect.
10.6 ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD
10.6.1 When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
peak height) of all samples during each analysis day. The
IS response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate
from the daily calibration check standard's IS response by
more than 30%.
10.6.2 If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract,
optimize instrument performance and inject a second aliquot
of that extract.
10.6.2.1 If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
internal standard response, report results for
that aliquot.
10.6.2.2 If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
the reinjected extract, analysis of the samples
236
-------
should be repeated beginning with Sect. 11,
provided the sample is still available.
Otherwise, report results obtained from the
reinjected extract, but annotate as suspect.
10.6.3 If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.
10.6.3.1 If the check standard provides a response factor
(RF) within 20% of the predicted value, then
follow procedures itemized in Sect. 10.6.2 for
each sample failing the IS response criterion.
10.6.3.2 If the check standard provides a response factor
which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
value, then the analyst must recalibrate, as
specified in Sect. 9.
10.7 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK
10.7.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory
fortified blank (LFB) sample with every 20 samples or one
per sample set (all samples extracted within a 24-hr period)
whichever is greater. The concentration of each analyte in
the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL, whichever is
less. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery (X,). If the
recovery of any analyte falls outside the control limits
(see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged out of control,
and the source of the problem should be identified and
resolved before continuing analyses.
10.7.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory
performance against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that
are derived from the data in Table 2. When sufficient
internal performance data becomes available, develop control
limits from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard
deviation (S) of the percent recovery. These data are used
to establish upper and lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = X + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT = X - 3S
After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new
control limits should be calculated using only the most
recent 20-30 data points. These calculated control limits
should never exceed those established in Section 10.3.2.
10.7.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically determine
and document its detection limit capabilities for the
analytes of interest.
237
-------
10.7.4 At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
source.
10.7.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
certification programs offered by many states or the studies
conducted by USEPA. Performance evaluation studies serve as
independent checks on the analyst's performance.
10.8 ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX
10.8.1 The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum
of 10% of the routine samples or one sample concentration
per set, whichever is greater. The concentration should not
be less then the background concentration of the sample
selected for fortification. Ideally, the concentration
should be the same as that used for the laboratory fortified
blank (Sect. 10.7). Over time, samples from all routine
sample sources should be fortified.
10.8.2 Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X,
from the fortified sample for the background concentration,
b, measured in the unfortified sample, i.e.,:
P - 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,
and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
reagent water data collected in the same fashion. If the
analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO
background concentrations, and the added concentrations are
those specified in Sect. 10.7, then the appropriate control
limits would be the acceptance limits in Sect. 10.7. If, on
the other hand, the analyzed unfortified sample is found to
contain background concentration, b, estimate the standard
deviation at the background concentration, sb, using
regressions or comparable background data and, similarly,
estimate the mean, Xa and standard deviation, s , of
analytical results at'the total concentration after
fortifying. Then the appropriate percentage control limits
would be P ± 3sD , where:
P = 100 X / (b + fortifying concentration)
1/2
2 2
and s = 100 (s + s ) /fortifying concentration
P a b
For example, if the background concentration for Analyte A
was found to be 1 /ug/L and the added amount was also 1 /zg/L,
and upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
1.6 /i/L, then the calculated P for this sample would be (1.6
238
-------
fj.g/1 minus 1.0 jug/L)/l p.g/1 or 60%. This calculated P is
compared to control limits derived from prior reagent water
data. Assume it is known that analysis of an interference
free sample at 1 /Ltg/L yields_an s of 0.12 jug/L and similar
analysis at 2.0 /ig/L yields X and s of 2.01 ng/l and 0.20
M9/L, respectively. The appropriate limits to judge the
reasonableness of the percent recovery, 60%, obtained on the
fortified matrix sample is computed as follows:
[100 (2.01 /zg/L) / 2.0 jag/L]
1/2
±3 (100) [(0.12 jug/L)2 + (0.20 »g/L)2] / 1.0 »g/L =
100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =
100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.
10.8.3 If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.7), the recovery
problem encountered with the fortified sample is judged to
be matrix related, not system related. The result for that
analyte in the unfortified sample is labeled suspect/matrix
to inform the data user that the results are suspect due to
matrix effects.
10.9 ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SAMPLE -
Instrument performance should be monitored on a daily basis by
analysis of the LPC sample. The LPC sample contains compounds
designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance. LPC
sample components and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
Inability to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance
indicates the need for revaluation of the instrument system. The
sensitivity requirements are set based on the EDLs published in
this method. If laboratory EDLs differ from those listed in this
method, concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must
be adjusted to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.
10.10 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
use with this method. The specific practices that are most
productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature
of the samples. For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements
or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 MANUAL HYDROLYSIS, PREPARATION, AND EXTRACTION.
11.1.1 Add preservative to blanks and QC check standards. Mark
the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.1.9). Pour
239
-------
the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. Fortify
sample with 50 /zL of the surrogate standard solution.
11.1.2 Add 250 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.1.3 Add 17 ml of 6 N NaOH to the sample, seal, and shake.
Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the sample
does not have a pH greater than or equal to 12, adjust the
pH by adding more 6 N NaOH. Let the sample sit at room
temperature for 1 hr, shaking the separatory funnel and
contents periodically.
11.1.4 Add 60 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle to rinse
the bottle, transfer the methylene chloride to the
separatory funnel and extract the sample by vigorously
shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to
release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to
separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If
the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-
third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must
employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase
separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample,
but may include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
centrifugation, or other physical methods. Discard the
methylene chloride phase.
11.1.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the
sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second
time, discarding the methylene chloride layer. Perform a
third extraction in the same manner.
11.1.6 Add 17 mL of 12 N H2S04 to the sample, seal, and shake to
mix. Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the
sample does not have a pH less than or equal to 2, adjust
the pH by adding more 12 N H2S04.
11.1.7 Add 120 ml ethyl ether to the sample, seal, and extract the
sample by vigorously shaking the funnel for 2 min with
periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the
organic layer to separate from the water phase for a
minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between
layers is more than one third the volume of the solvent
layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to
complete the phase separation. The optimum technique
depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
filtration through glass wool, centrifugation, or other
physical methods. Remove the aqueous phase to a 2-L
Erlenmeyer flask and collect the ethyl ether phase in a
500-mL round-bottom flask containing approximately 10 g of
acidified anhydrous sodium sulfate. Periodically,
vigorously shake the sample and drying agent. Allow the
extract to remain in contact with the sodium sulfate for
approximately 2 hours.
240
-------
11.1.8 Return the aqueous phase to the separatory funnel, add a
60-mL volume of ethyl ether to the sample, and repeat the
extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts
in the 500-mL erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction
with 60 ml of ethyl ether in the same manner.
11.1.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
sample bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a
1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to
the nearest 5 ml.
11.2 AUTOMATED HYDROLYSIS, PREPARATION, AND EXTRACTION, -- Data
presented in this method were generated using the automated
extraction procedure with the mechanical separatory funnel shaker.
11.2.1 Add preservative (Sect. 8.2) to any samples not previously
preserved, e.g., blanks and QC check standards. Mark the
water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later
determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.2.9). Fortify
sample with 50 /xL of the surrogate standard solution. If
the mechanical separatory funnel shaker is used, pour the
entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. If the
mechanical tumbler is used, pour the entire sample into a
tumbler bottle.
11.2.2 Add 250 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve
salt.
11.2.3 Add 17 ml of 6 N NaOH to the sample, seal, and shake.
Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the sample
does not have a pH greater than or equal to 12, adjust the
pH by adding more 6 N NaOH. Shake sample for 1 hr using
the appropriate mechanical mixing device.
11.2.4 Add 300 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle to rinse
the bottle, transfer the methylene chloride to the
separatory funnel or tumbler bottle, seal, and shake for 10
s, venting periodically. Repeat shaking and venting until
pressure release is not observed during venting. Reseal
and place sample container in appropriate mechanical mixing
device. Shake or tumble the sample for 1 hr. Complete and
thorough mixing of the organic and aqueous phases should be
observed at least 2 min after starting the mixing device.
11.2.5 Remove the sample container from the mixing device. If the
tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-L
separatory funnel. Allow the organic layer to separate
from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion interface between layers is more than one third
the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ
mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation.
The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may
include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
centrifugation, or other physical methods. Drain and
241
-------
discard the organic phase. If the tumbler is used, return
the aqueous phase to the tumbler bottle.
11.2.6 Add 17 ml of 12 N H2S04 to the sample, seal, and shake to
mix. Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the
sample does not have a pH less than or equal to 2, adjust
the pH by adding more 12 N H2S04.
11.2.7 Add 300 ml ethyl ether to the sample, seal, and shake for
10 s, venting periodically. Repeat shaking and venting
until pressure release is not observed during venting.
Reseal and place sample container in appropriate mechanical
mixing device. Shake or tumble sample for 1 hr. Complete
and thorough mixing of the organic and aqueous phases
should be observed at least 2 min after starting the mixing
device.
11.2.8 Remove the sample container from the mixing device. If the
tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-L
separatory funnel. Allow the organic layer to separate
from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion interface between layers is more than one third
the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ
mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation.
The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may
include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
centrifugation, or other physical methods. Drain and
discard the aqueous phase. Collect the extract in a 500-mL
round-bottom flask containing about 10 g of acidified
anhydrous sodium sulfate. Periodically vigorously shake
the sample and drying agent. Allow the extract to remain
in contact with the sodium sulfate for approximately 2 hr.
11.2.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
sample bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a
1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to
the nearest 5 ml.
11.3 EXTRACT CONCENTRATION
11.3.1 Assemble a K-D concentrator by attaching a concentrator
tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
11.3.2 Pour the dried extract through a funnel plugged with acid
washed glass wool, and collect the extract in the K-D
concentrator. Use a glass rod to crush any caked sodium
sulfate during the transfer. Rinse the round-bottom flask
and funnel with 20 to 30 ml of ethyl ether to complete the
quantitative transfer.
11.3.3 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask
and attach a macro Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
by adding about 1 ml ethyl ether to the top. Place the K-D
apparatus on a hot water bath, 60 to 65°C, so that the
242
-------
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water,
and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed
with hot vapor. At the proper rate of distillation the
balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers
will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches
1 ml, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and
cool for at least 10 min.
11.3.4 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower
joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 ml of ethyl
ether. Add 2 ml of MTBE and a fresh boiling stone. Attach
a micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet
the column by adding about 0.5 mL of ethyl ether to the
top. Place the micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so
that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot
water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and
the water temperature as required to complete concentration
in 5 to 10 min. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches
0.5 ml, remove the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to
drain and cool. Remove the micro Snyder column and add 250
/zL of methanol. If the gaseous diazomethane procedure
(Sect. 11.4) is used for esterification of pesticides,
rinse the walls of the concentrator tube while adjusting
the volume to 5.0 ml with MTBE. If the pesticides will be
esterified using the diazomethane solution (Sect. 11.5),
rinse the walls of the concentrator tube while adjusting
the volume to 4.5 ml with MTBE.
11.4 ESTERIFICATION OF ACIDS USING GASEOUS DIAZOMETHANE -- Results
presented in this method were generated using the gaseous diazomet-
hane derivatization procedure. See Section 11.5 for an alternative
procedure.
11.4.1 Assemble the diazomethane generator (Figure 1) in a hood.
11.4.2 Add 5 ml of ethyl ether to Tube 1. Add 1 ml of ethyl
ether, 1 ml of carbitol, 1.5 ml of 37% aqueous KOH, and 0.2
grams Diazald to Tube 2. Immediately place the exit tube
into the concentrator tube containing the sample extract.
Apply nitrogen flow (10 mL/min) to bubble diazomethane
through the extract for 1 min. Remove first sample. Rinse
the tip of the diazomethane generator with ethyl ether
after methylation of each sample. Bubble diazomethane
through the second sample extract for 1 min. Diazomethane
reaction mixture should be used to esterify only two
samples; prepare new reaction mixture in Tube 2 to esterify
each two additional samples. Samples should turn yellow
after addition of diazomethane and remain yellow for at
least 2 min. Repeat methylation procedure if necessary.
11.4.3 Seal concentrator tubes with stoppers. Store at room
temperature in a hood for 30 min.
243
-------
11.4.4 Destroy any unreacted diazomethane by adding 0.1 to
0.2 grams silicic acid to the concentrator tubes. Allow to
stand until the evolution of nitrogen gas has stopped (ap-
proximately 20 min). Adjust the sample volume to 5.0 ml
with MTBE.
11.5 ESTERIFICATION OF ACIDS USING DIAZOMETHANE SOLUTION -- Alternative
procedure.
11.5.1 Assemble the diazomethane generator (Figure 2) in a hood.
The collection vessel is a 10- or 15-mL vial, equipped with
a Teflon-lined screw cap and maintained at 0-5C.
11.5.2 Add a sufficient amount of ethyl ether to tube 1 to cover
the first impinger. Add 5 ml of MTBE to the collection
vial. Set the nitrogen flow at 5-10 mL/min. Add 2 ml
Diazald solution (Sect. 7.10) and 1.5 mL of 37% KOH
solution to the second impinger. Connect the tubing as
shown and allow the nitrogen flow to purge the diazomethane
from the reaction vessel into the collection vial for 30
min. Cap the vial when collection is complete and maintain
at 0-5°C. When stored at 0-5°C this diazomethane solution
may be used over a period of 48 hr.
11.5.3 To each concentrator tube containing sample or standard,
add 0.5 ml diazomethane solution. Samples should turn
yellow after addition of the diazomethane solution and
remain yellow for at least 2 min. Repeat methyl ation
procedure if necessary.
11.5.4 Seal concentrator tubes with stoppers. Store at room
temperature in a hood for 30 min.
11.5.5 Destroy any unreacted diazomethane by adding 0.1 to
0.2 grams silicic acid to the concentrator tubes. Allow to
stand until the evolution of nitrogen gas has stopped (ap-
proximately 20 min). Adjust the sample volume to 5.0 mL
with MTBE.
11.6 FLORISIL SEPARATION
11.6.1 Place a small plug of glass wool into a 5-mL disposable
glass pipet. Tare the pipet, and measure 1 g of activated
Florisil into the pipet.
11.6.2 Apply 5 mL of 5 percent methanol in MTBE to the Florisil.
Allow the liquid to just reach the top of the Florisil. In
this and subsequent steps, allow the liquid level to just
reach the top of the Florisil before applying the next
rinse, however, do not allow the Florisil to go dry.
Discard eluate.
11.6.3 Apply 5 mL methylated sample to the Florisil leaving
silicic acid in the tube. Collect eluate in K-D tube.
244
-------
11.6.4 Add 1 ml of 5 percent methanol in MTBE to the sample
container, rinsing walls. Transfer the rinse to the
Florisil column leaving silicic acid in the tube. Collect
eluate in a K-D tube. Repeat with 1-mL and 3-mL aliquots
of 5 percent methanol in MTBE, collecting eluates in K-D
tube.
11.6.5 If necessary, dilute eluate to 10 ml with 5 percent
methanol in MTBE.
11.6.6 Seal the vial and store in a refrigerator if further
processing will not be performed immediately. Analyze by
6C-ECD.
11.7 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
11.7.1 Sect. 6.10 summarizes the recommended operating conditions
for the GC. Included in Table 1 are retention times
observed using this method. Other GC columns, chromat-
ographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
requirements of Sect. 10.4 are met.
11.7.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9. The
standards and extracts must be in MTBE.
11.7.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used,
fortify the extract with 25 p,l of internal standard
solution. Thoroughly mix sample and place aliquot in a GC
vial for subsequent analysis.
11.7.4 Inject 2 /zL of the sample extract. Record the resulting
peak size in area units.
11.7.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of
the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
11.8 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES
11.8.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram. If
the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,
within limits, to the retention time of a standard
compound, then identification is considered positive.
11.8.2 The width of the retention time window used to make
identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
retention time variations of standards over the course of a
day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention
time can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
compound. However, the experience of the analyst should
weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.8.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically. When GC
245
-------
peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
(i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between
two or more maxima, or any time doubt exists over the
identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate
alternative techniques, to help confirm peak identifica-
tion, need to be employed. For example, more positive
identification may be made by the use of an alternative
detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
different from that originally used, e.g., mass spectrom-
etry, or the use of a second chromatography column. A
suggested alternative column in described in Sect. 6.10.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1
12.2
12.3
Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response
for the analyte using the calibration procedure described in Sect.
9.
If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the concentration (C) in the sample using the response factor (RF)
determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2, or determine sample
concentration from the calibration curve.
C Gag/L)
where:
(A.) (I.)
(Af.)(RF)(V0)
Equation 2.
As = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ais - Response for the internal standard.
Is ~ Amount of internal standard added to each extract (jug).
V0 = Volume of water extracted (L).
If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the amount of material injected from the peak response using the
calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Sect. 9.3.
The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from Equation
3.
C (jug/L) =
(A)(Vt)
Equation 3.
where:
I
Amount of material injected (ng).
Volume of extract injected (juL).
Volume of total extract (juL).
Volume of water extracted (ml).
246
-------
13. PRECISION AND ACCURACY
13.1 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
determined at five concentration levels. Results were used to
determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range.(1) Analyte
EDLs and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the
percent recoveries at one concentration are given in Table 2.
13.2 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from one standard
synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level.
Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
different ground water matrices.(1) Analyte recoveries from the
one synthetic matrix are given in Table 2.
14. REFERENCES
1. National Pesticide Survey Method No. 3, "Determination of
Chlorinated Acids in Water by Gas Chromatography with an Electron
Capture Detector."
2. '"Pesticide Methods Evaluation," Letter Report #33 for EPA Contract
No. 68-03-2697. Available from U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
Ohio 45268.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
"Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, PA, p. 86, 1986.
4. Giam, C. S., Chan, H. S., and Nef, G. S, "Sensitive Method for
Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota
Samples," Analytical Chemistry. 47, 2225 (1975).
5. Giam, C. S., and Chan, H.. S. "Control of Blanks in the Analysis of
Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples," U.S. National Bureau of
Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.
6. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.
7. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
8. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
1979.
9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
"Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, p. 130, 1986.
247
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Analvte
Retention Time3
(minutes)
Primary Confirmation
Dal apon
3,5-Dichlorobenzoic acid
4-Nitrophenol
DCAA (surrogate)
Dicamba
Dichlorprop
2,4-D
DBOB (int. std.)
Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
Chi oramben
2,4,5-TP
5-Hydroxydi camba
2,4,5-T
2,4-DB
Dinoseb
Bentazon
Picloram
DCPA acid metabolites
Acifluorfen
3.4
18.6
18.6
22.0
22.1
25.0
25.5
27.5
28.3
29.7
29.7
30.0
30.5
32.2
32.4
33.3
34.4
35.8
41.5
4.7
17.7
20.5
14.9
22.6
25.6
27.0
27.6
27.0
32.8
29.5
30.7
30.9
32.2
34.1
34.6
37.5
37.8
42.8
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.10.1
and 6.10.2.
248
-------
O)
•0'
o
a>
c
oo
1-4 bl
O «< O)T3
MJ * •»•» - -«
€0
00
t§i
!i
i<0
pS
UJ(-
a>
o>
: w>
o««
Sul
t315
>- Ul
OtD
£2
§:C
-^s
<0
O) -2
o ^
o
o
a
uj g
U 1X.
-JO
(0 Ik
(O
c\3
Ul
OQ
\o r*^ i—i to r--. o» 10 «* co ^s- co co cj co oo co
CM CO •—I CO CJ •—I r-l CO CM
o oo «-H r-t CM co en oo o co co CM oo en en o
ir>vo^-r^ocoo»cMtoo*3-u3co<-«>o
i—I i—1 rH CM CM f—I COi- CM oo vo vo cr> ^*-co r~. ^-oo i
OCMOCJOOCOOOOCvJi—i O •—I O i—I O O
OOOOi—lOOOQOOOOOOOO
o
0)
ex.
ex.
r— O
O N
O)
(0
J2
$-
o
C J3
SI
(0 t- I
u a>
O O O O-
& S- O. -i- C O
O O 73 O> $-
73 i— S. >>J= O
f- J= O. X 0.1— E
C U(0US.JQOOJZ>0
oco(0jD*>-oa>&-&.u&-
O-Q EQi— C0734J «0 O
<0 -<_> -r- «^r--r- I I O) v- " •>
I I
to m
!*.
•»-> o
•r- O>
t- >
CD
i—t -i-
.—.+j at
co 4-> i-i <0 c
0) S_ 1-1 i_ ••-
— 10 • c
CL Q- t—I O) -i-
E co E
5 oi c •*- C
co u_ o o a>
O -r- £= 4->
co « a>
I O ••- O 73
r-» «*>•!-»
a> i c:
4- O CC. i— T-
O 4-» «0
I C73
c oa a> a>
(0 4J -r- CO
CO X T- CO 3
0)
•o
C — J 4J O
O- C
0.0
: 4->
ea
< i.
a)
o <0 c
_i a) s- a>
s a> x «=.—
Q Q) O 03
S- U <0
j= o'« a>
0)0)4-
73
O>
a> i-
.
1£.
••- o
O) C
•o o
+J 10
S~ {=
O> -r-
C O>TD
•r- -f- 0>
O tt)
at
•o
O)
4->
u
o>
i-
o
u
<0
o
u o>
O) J=
4-> 4->
a>
'I
O)
4-> 0)
(0 S-
E 3
4J O)
CO U
O) O
s-
II 0-
-JT3
O C
UJ 10
O» -r- CO
O. O)
at i.
<0 3 O.
en to e
c > o
If *pM-
-o s- +J
'a> > i-
^r* Q) 4^ •
O O)
O) T- O
O.
JC C
S
O
U
a>
(0
c'a> co
•r- 4J 10
•o E a>
ixl
oo<.
E Q-a>
O O..C
o
Q)
t-
O)
O) (4_
O °
2 I
•^ S
O) >
o £
a> "°
O. -n
01
O)
<0
a>
(0
(0
(0
CO
H
oo1"
O
73
O)
C
(0
O)
s-
a.
co
I
<0
O) •
i- C
3 (0
a. en
O T-
oo jc
JQ U
<0 4->
f— 3
•£D ^3
c >>
73
C C
C
4-> <0
C O-
3 E
|5
s- a>
O 4->
(*- 10
73
O) O)
U 3
O) O-
i- O
S- CO
O J3
0
-------
CO
A
O)
0
o o
<4_ • A
° V C
c u_ o
O C3 i-
•r- Q. 4J
+J V 3
O i—
O) O O
0)
Q)
51
«a-
o
o
VO ID
• •
O •-€
.
s
*«
•f—
0)
•M
a>
(O
4J
•o
a
0)
a.
a>
00
O)
T3
'5
(O
0)
o.
O)
2
o>
05
0>
OL .C C3u
.n o up
0) fc. i- $-
v> •«-> a •*•>
o T- i «P-
c z in z:
•r- I •> I
Q ^4- CO «*
a>
o
o
cr
a>
a>
a>
"8
•8
(0
O
a '
JC
o>
•r-
0>
-C
««-
"•0
+J
(0
.C
•o
(0
. OJ
o a.
ut
CM
-8.2 *
H »
u. »
43 -S
Qu *
C0
cr
0)
^=
-l->
•o
O)
O)
(0
<0
CL
O
O)
J=
••->
O)
O)
o
(O
0)
a.
§
O
250
-------
Nitrogtn
Tub«1
Tubta
Samplt
Tub*
FIGURE 1. GASEOUS DIAZOMETHANE GENERATOR
251
-------
u
t>
t.
«
8
CK
I
CM
3
252
-------
METHOD 524.1. MEASUREMENT OF PUR6EABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
IN WATER BY PACKED COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
Revision 3.0
.A. AT ford-Stevens, J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524, Revision 1.0
(1983)
J. E. Longbottom, R. W. Slater, Jr. - Method 524.1, Revision 2.0 (1986)
J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524.1, Revision 3.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
253
-------
METHOD 524.1
MEASUREMENT OF PURGEABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY
PACKED COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a general purpose method for the identification and simul-
taneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
finished drinking water, raw source water, or drinking water in any
treatment stage (1). The method is applicable to a wide range of
organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
and trap procedures. The following compounds are method analytes,
and single-laboratory accuracy, precision, and method detection
limit data have been determined with this method for 31 of them3.
Compound
Benzene
Bromobenzene
* Bromochloromethane
Bromodi chloromethane
Bromoform
* Bromomethane
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
* Chloroethane
Chloroform
* Chloromethane
* 2-Chlorotoluene
* 4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochloromethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1,2-DiChlorobenzene
* 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
1,4-Di chlorobenzene
Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
* cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,3-Di chloropropane
Chemical Abstract Service
Registry Number
71-43-2
108-86-1
74-97-5
75-27-4
75-25-2
74-83-9
56-23-5
108-90-7
75-00-3
67-66-3
74-87-3
95-49-8
106-43-4
124-48-1
96-12-8
106-93-4
74-95-3
95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
75-71-8
75-34-3
107-06-2
75-35-4
156-59-4
156-60-5
78-87-5
142-28-9
254
-------
* 2,2-Dichloropropane 590-20-7
* 1,1-Dichloropropene 563-58-6
* cis-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-01-5
* trans-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-02-6
* Ethyl benzene 100-41-4
Methylene chloride 75-09-2
Styrene 100-42-5
* 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane 630-20-6
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5
Tetrachloroethene 127-18-4
Toluene 108-88-3
1,1,1-Trichloroethane 71-55-6
* 1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5
Trichloroethene 79-01-6
Trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4
* 1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4
Vinyl chloride 75-01-4
o-Xylene 95-47-6
* m-Xylene 108-38-3
p-Xylene 106-42-3
a Compounds preceded by an asterisk are known to be amenable to purge
and trap extraction (see Method 524.2), and chromatography on the
packed gas chromatography column used in this method, but precision,
accuracy, retention time, and method detection limit data is not
provided in this method.
.1.2 Method detection limits (MDLs) (2) are compound and instrument
dependent and vary from approximately 0.1-2 /jg/L. The applicable
concentration range of this method is also compound and instrument
dependent and is approximately 0.1 to 200 M9/L- Analytes that are
inefficiently purged from water will not be detected when present at
low concentrations, but they can be measured with acceptable
accuracy and precision when present in sufficient amounts.
1.3 Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, but which have
different mass spectra and non-interfering quantitation ions, can be
identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
sample (Sect. 11.9.2). Table 1 lists primary and secondary
quantitation ions for each analyte. Analytes which have very
similar mass spectra cannot be individually identified and measured
in the same calibration mixture or water sample unless they have
different retention times (Sect.11.9.3). Coeluting compounds with
very similar mass spectra, typically many structural isomers, must
be reported as an isomeric group or pair. Cis- and trans-
1,2-dichloroethene, two of the three isomeric xylenes, and two of
the three dichlorobenzenes are three examples of structural isomers
that cannot be explicitly identified if more than one member of the
isomeric group is present. These groups of isomers must be reported
as isomeric pairs (see Method 524.2 for an alternative approach).
255
-------
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Volatile organic compounds and surrogates with low water solubility
are extracted (purged) from the sample matrix by bubbling an inert
gas through the aqueous sample. Purged sample components are
trapped in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials. When
purging is complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with
helium to desorb the trapped sample components into a packed gas
chromatography (GC) column interfaced to a mass spectrometer (MS).
The column is temperature programmed to separate the method analytes
which are then detected with the MS. Compounds eluting from the GC
column are identified by comparing their measured mass spectra and
retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a data
base. Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
conditions used for samples. The concentration of each identified
component is measured by relating the MS response of the
quantisation ion produced by that compound to the MS response of the
quantitation ion produced by a compound that is used as an internal
standard. Surrogate analytes, whose concentrations are known in
every sample, are measured with the same internal standard
calibration procedure.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
256
-------
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) ~ A solution of one or
more compounds used to evaluate the performance of the instrument
system with respect to a defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
257
-------
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method.
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
INTERFERENCES
4.1 During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials
in the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
sorbent trap. The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
components in the purging device should be avoided since such
materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in
the trap during the purge operation. Analyses of laboratory reagent
blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants. When
potential interfering peaks are noted in laboratory reagent blanks,
the analyst should change the purge gas source and regenerate the
molecular sieve purge gas filter. Subtracting blank values from
sample results is not permitted.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
organic compounds. A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
reagent water. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.
4.3 Special precautions must be taken to determine methylene chloride.
The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
background levels will result. Since methylene chloride will
permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed of stainless
steel or copper tubing. Laboratory worker's clothing should be
cleaned frequently since clothing previously exposed to methylene
chloride fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
contribute to sample contamination.
SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogen!city of chemicals used in this method
has not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
this method. Additional references to laboratory safety are
available (3-5) for the information of the analyst.
258
-------
5.2 The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon
tetrachloride, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichlorethane,
1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloroform,
1,2-dibromoethane, tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene, and vinyl
chloride. Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
these compounds should be handled in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved
toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high
concentrations of these toxic compounds.
APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS — 60-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #19832
or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
(Pierce #12718 or equivalent). Prior to use, wash vials and septa
with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water. Allow the
vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C
oven for 1 hr, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to be
free of organics.
6.2 PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM — The purge and trap system consists of three
separate pieces of equipment: purging device, trap, and desorber.
Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet
all of the following specifications.
6.2.1 The all glass purging device (Figure 1) should be designed to
accept 25-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
A smaller (5-mL) purging device is recommended if the GC/MS
system has adequate sensitivity to obtain the method
detection limits required. Gaseous volumes above the sample
must be kept to a minimum (<15 ml) to eliminate dead volume
effects. A glass frit should be installed at the base of the
sample chamber so the purge gas passes through the water
column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of <3 mm at
the origin. Needle spargers may be used, however, the purge
gas must be introduced at a point about 5 mm from the base of
the water column.
6.2.2 The trap (Figure 2) must be at least 25 cm long and have an
inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. Starting from the
inlet, the trap should contain 1.0 cm of methyl silicone
coated packing and the following amounts of adsorbents: 1/3
of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer, 1/3 of silica gel, and 1/3
of coconut charcoal. If it is not necessary to determine
dichlorodifluoromethane, the charcoal can be eliminated and
the polymer increased to fill 2/3 of the trap. Before
initial use, the trap should be conditioned overnight at
180°C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least
20 mL/min. Vent the trap effluent to the room, not to the
analytical column. Prior to daily use, the trap should be
conditioned for 10 min at 180°C with backflushing. The trap
may be vented to the analytical column during daily
259
-------
conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
temperature program prior to analysis of samples.
6.2.3 The use, of the methyl silicone coated packing is recommended,
but not mandatory. The packing serves a dual purpose of
protecting the Tenax adsorbant from aerosols, and also of
insuring that the Tenax is fully enclosed within the heated
zone of the trap thus eliminating potential cold spots.
Alternatively, silanized glass wool may be used as a spacer
at the trap inlet.
6.2.4 The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable of rapidly heating
the trap to « 180°C. The polymer section of the trap should
not be heated higher than 200°C or the life expectancy of the
trap will decrease. Trap failure is characterized by a
pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
the trap during purging or by poor bromoform sensitivities.
The desorber design illustrated in Figure 2 meets these
criteria.
6.3 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETER/DATA SYSTEM (GC/MS/DS)
6.3.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
throughout desorption and temperature program operation. The
column oven may require cooling to <30 C; therefore, a
subambient oven controller may be required. The GC usually
is interfaced to the MS with an all-glass enrichment device
and an all-glass transfer line, but any enrichment device or
transfer line can be used if the performance specifications
described in this method can be achieved.
6.3.2 Gas Chromatography Column — 1.5 to 2.5 m x 2 mm ID stainless
steel or glass, packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack-B (60/80
mesh) or the equivalent.
6.3.3 The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron ionization
at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV. The spectrometer must
be capable of scanning from 35 to 260 amu with a complete
scan cycle time (including scan overhead) of 7 seconds or
less. (Scan cycle time = Total MS data acquisition time in
seconds divided by number of scans in the chromatogram). The
spectrometer must produce a mass spectrum that meets all
criteria in Table 2 when 50 ng or less of 4-bromof1uoro-
benzene (BFB) is introduced into the GC. An average spectrum
across the BFB GC peak may be used to test instrument
performance.
6.3.4 An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store,
reduce, and output mass spectral data. The computer software
should have the capability of processing stored GC/MS data by
260
-------
recognizing a GC peak within any given retention time window,
comparing the mass spectra from the GC peak with spectral
data in a user-created data base, and generating a list of
tentatively identified compounds with their retention times
and scan numbers. The software must allow integration of the
ion abundance of any specific ion between specified time or
scan number limits. The software should also allow calcu-
lation of response factors as defined in Sect. 9.2.6 (or
construction of a second or third order regression
calibration curve), calculation of response factor statistics
(mean and standard deviation), and calculation of concentra-
tions of analytes using either the calibration curve or the
equation in Sect. 12.
6.4 SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES
6.4.1 Two 5-mL or 25-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip
(depending on sample volume used).
6.4.2 Three 2-way syringe valves with Luer ends.
6.4.3 One 25-/iL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).
6.4.4 Micro syringes - 10, 100 /z.L.
6.4.5 Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off valve.
6,5 MISCELLANEOUS
6.5.1 Standard solution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
PTFE-lined screw caps.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 TRAP PACKING MATERIALS
7.1.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).
7.1.2 Methyl silicone packing (optional) - OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb
W, 60/80 mesh, or equivalent.
7.1.3 Silica gel — 35/60 mesh, Davison, grade 15 or equivalent.
7,1.4 Coconut charcoal ~ Prepare from Barnebey Cheney, CA-580-26
lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26 mesh screen.
7.2 COLUMN PACKING MATERIALS
7.2.1 1% SP-1000 on 60/80 mesh Carbopack-B or equivalent.
261
-------
7.3 REAGENTS
7.3.1 Methanol — Demonstrated to be free of analytes.
7.3.2 Reagent water -- Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
through a filter bed contai-ning about 0.5 kg of activated
carbon, by using a water purification system, or by boiling
distilled water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with inert
gas while the water temperature is held at 90 C. Store in
clean, narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw
caps.
7.3.3 Hydrochloric acid (1+1) — Carefully add measured volume of
cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.
7.3.4 Vinyl chloride — Certified mixtures of vinyl chloride in
nitrogen and 99.9% pure vinyl chloride are available from
several sources (for example, Matheson, Ideal Gas Products,
and Scott Gases).
7.3.5 Ascorbic Acid — ACS reagent grade, granular.
7.4 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS — These solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
the following procedures. One of these solutions is required for
every analyte of concern, every surrogate, and the internal
standard. A useful working concentration is about 1-5 mg/mL.
7.4.1 Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand,
unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
surfaces have dried and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
7.4.2 If the analyte is a liquid at room temperature, use a 100-0L
syringe and immediately add two or more drops of reference
standard to the flask. Be sure that the reference standard
falls directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck
of the flask. If the analyte is a gas at room temperature,
fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
5.0-mL mark, lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol
meniscus, and slowly inject the standard into the neck area
of the flask. The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.
7.4.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
flask several times. Calculate the concentration in ng/n\-
from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is
certified at 96% or greater, the weight can be used without
correction to calculate the concentration of the stock
standard.
7.4.4 Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped
with PTFE-lined screw caps. Methanol solutions prepared from
262
-------
liquid analytes are stable for at least four weeks when
stored at 4 C. Methanol solutions prepared from gaseous
, analytes are not stable for more than one week when stored at
<0°C; at room temperature, they must be discarded after one
day.
7.5 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS — Use stock standard solutions to
prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain all the
analytes of concern and the surrogates (but not the internal
standard!) in methanol. The primary dilution standards should be
prepared at concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare
aqueous calibration solutions that will bracket the working
.concentration range. Store the primary dilution standard solutions
with minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
calibration solutions. Storage times described for stock standard
solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also apply to primary dilution standard
solutions.
7.6 FORTIFICATION SOLUTIONS FOR INTERNAL STANDARD AND SURROGATES
7.6.1 A solution containing the internal standard and surrogates is
required to prepare laboratory reagent blanks (also used as a
laboratory performance check solution), and to fortify each
sample. Prepare a fortification solution containing fluoro-
benzene (internal standard), l,2-dichlorobenzene-d4
(surrogate), and BFB (surrogate) in methanol at concen-
trations of 5 fig/ml of each. A 10-0L aliquot of this
. , solution added to a 25-mL water sample volume gives
concentrations of 2 /zg/L of each. A 10-juL aliquot of this
solution added to a 5-mL water sample volume gives a
concentration of 10 /jg/L of each. Additional internal
standards and surrogate analytes are optional.
7.6.2 ,A solution of the internal standard alone is required to
prepare calibration standards, laboratory fortified blanks,
etc. The internal standard should be in methanol at a concen-
tration of 5 /ig/mL.
7.7 PREPARATION OF LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK — Fill a 25-mL (or 5-mL)
syringe with reagent water and adjust to the mark (no air bubbles).
Inject 10 pi of the fortification solution containing the internal
standard and surrogates through the Luer Lok valve into the reagent
water. Transfer the LRB to the purging device. See Sect. 11.1.2.
7:'8 PREPARATION OF LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK — Prepare this exactly
like a calibration standard. See Sect. 7.9.
7.9 PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
7.9.1 The number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on
the calibration range desired. A minimum of three CAL
263
-------
solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
in concentration. For a factor of 50 use at least four
standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
One calibration standard should contain each analyte of
concern and each surrogate at .a concentration of 2-10 times
the method detection limit (Table 3) for that compound. The
other CAL standards should contain each analyte of concern
and each surrogate at concentrations that define the range of
the method. Every CAL solution contains the internal
standard at the same concentration (10 /zg/L suggested).
7.9.2 To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
of a primary dilution standard (containing analytes and
surrogates) to an aliquot of reagent water in a volumetric
flask. Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the methanol
solutions into the expanded area of the filled volumetric
flask. Remove the needle as quickly as possible after
injection. Mix by inverting the flask three times only.
Discard the contents contained in the neck of the flask.
Aqueous standards are not stable in a volumetric flask and
should be discarded after 1 hr. unless transferred to a
sample bottle and sealed immediately.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Collect all samples in duplicate. If samples contain
residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
acid to the sample bottle before filling. Fill sample
bottles to overflowing, but take care not to flush out the
rapidly dissolving ascorbic acid. No air bubbles should pass
through the sample as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in
the sample when the bottle is sealed. Adjust the pH of the
duplicate samples to <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1
HC1 for each 20 mL of sample volume. Seal the sample
bottles, PFTE-face down, and shake vigorously for 1 min.
When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.
When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.
The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
and maintained at that temperature until analysis. Field
264
-------
samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
at the.laboratory.
8.2 SAMPLE STORAGE
8.2.1 Store samples at 4°C until analysis. The sample storage area
must be free of organic solvent vapors.
8.2.2 Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection. Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
8.3 FIELD REAGENT BLANKS
8.3.1 Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
from the same general sample site at approximately the same
time. At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
filled sample bottles. Wherever a set of samples is shipped
and stored, it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.
8.3.2 Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
and HC1 to blanks (Sect. 8.1.1).
9. CALIBRATION
9.1 Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration is
required before any samples are analyzed and is required intermit-
tently throughout sample analysis as dictated by results of
continuing calibration checks. After initial calibration is
successful, a continuing calibration check is required at the
beginning of each 8 hr period during which analyses are performed.
Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory practice.
9.2 INITIAL CALIBRATION
9.2.1 Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
calibration compounds and procedures prescribed by the
manufacturer with any modifications necessary to meet the
requirements in Sect. 9.2.2.
9.2.2 Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
blank or making a syringe injection) 50 ng of BFB and acquire
mass spectra for m/z 35-260 at 70 eV (nominal). Use the
purging procedure and/or GC conditions given in Sect. 11. If
the spectrum does not meet all criteria in Table 2, the MS
must be retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before
proceeding with calibration. An average spectrum across the
265
-------
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
system.
Purge a medium CAL solution, for example 10-20 M9/L, using
the procedure given in Sect. 11.
Performance criteria for the medium calibration.
stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.
Examine the
Figure 3
9.2.4.1 GC performance. Good column performance will produce
symmetrical peaks with minimum tailing for most
compounds. If peaks are broad, or sensitivity poor,
replace or repack the column. During handling,
packing, and programming, active sites can be exposed
on the Carbopack-B packing which can result in
tailing peak geometry and poor resolution of many
constituents. Pneumatic shocks and rough treatment
of packed columns will cause excessive fracturing of
the packing. If pressure in excess of 60 psi is
required to obtain 40 mL/min carrier flow, the column
should be repacked. With the column connected to the
MS interface, a pressure below about 10"5 mm of Hg
indicates the jet separator is clogged.
9.2.4.2 MS sensitivity. The GC/MS peak identification
software should be able to recognize a GC peak in the
appropriate retention time window for each of the
compounds in calibration solution, and make correct
tentative identifications. If fewer than 99% of the
compounds are recognized, system maintenance is
required. See Sect. 9.3.6.
If all performance criteria are met, purge an aliquot of each
of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS conditions.
Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte, surrogate,
and isomer pair, for each CAL solution using the internal
standard fluorobenzene. Table 1 contains suggested quantita-
tion ions for all compounds. This calculation is supported
in acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect. 6.3.4), and
many other software programs. RF is a unit!ess number, but
units used to express quantities of analyte and internal
standard must be equivalent.
RF
(Ais)(Qx)
where: Ax = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the analyte.
266
-------
Ais = Integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the internal standard.
Qx = quantity of analyte purged in ng or
concentration units.
Qis = quantity of internal standard purged in ng
or concentration units.
9.2.6.1 For each analyte and surrogate, calculate the mean RF
from the analyses of the CAL solutions. Calculate
the standard deviation (SD) and the relative standard
deviation (RSD) from each mean: ,RSD = 100 (SD/M).
If the RSD of any analyte or surrogate mean RF
exceeds 20%, either analyze additional aliquots of
appro-priate CAL solutions to obtain an acceptable
RSD of RFs over the entire concentration range, or
take action to improve GC/MS performance. See Sect.
9.2.7.
9,2.7 As an alternative to calculating mean response factors and
applying the RSD test, use the GC/MS data system software or
other available software to generate a second or third order
regression calibration curve.
9.3 Continuing calibration check. Verify the MS tune and initial
calibration at the beginning of each 8 hr work shift during which
analyses are performed using the following procedure.
9.3.1 Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
blank or making a syringe injection) 50 ng of BFB and acquire
a mass spectrum that includes data for m/z 35-260. If the
spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 2), the MS must be
retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before proceeding
with the continuing calibration check.
9.3.2 Purge a medium concentration CAL solution and analyze with
the same conditions used during the initial calibration.
9.3.3 Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria shown in
Sect. 9.2.4.
9.3.4 Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation ions of
the internal standard and surrogates have not decreased by
more than 30% from the areas measured in the most recent
continuing calibration check, or by more than 50% from the
areas measured during initial calibration. If these areas
have decreased by more than these amounts, adjustments must
be made to restore system sensitivity. These adjustments may
require cleaning of the MS ion source, or other maintenance
as indicated in Sect. 9.3.6, and recalioration. Control
charts are useful aids in documenting system sensitivity
changes.
267
-------
9.3.5 Calculate the RF for each analyte and surrogate from the data
measured in the continuing calibration check. The RF for
each analyte and surrogate must be within 30% of the mean
value measured in the initial calibration. Alternatively, if
a second or third order regression is used, the point from
the continuing calibration check for each analyte and
surrogate must fall, within the analyst's judgment, on the
curve from the initial calibration. If these conditions do
not exist, remedial action must be taken which may require
reinitial calibration.
9.3.6 Some possible remedial actions. Major maintenance such as
cleaning an ion source, cleaning quadrupole rods, etc.
require returning to the initial calibration step.
9.3.6.1 Check and adjust GC and/or MS operating conditions;
check the MS resolution, and calibrate the mass
scale.
9.3.6.2 Prepare fresh CAL solutions, and repeat the initial
calibration step.
9.3.6.3 Clean the MS ion source and rods (if a quadrupole).
9.3.6.4 Replace the MS electron multiplier, or any other
faulty components.
9.4 Optional calibration for vinyl chloride using a certified gaseous
mixture of vinyl chloride in nitrogen can be accomplished by the
following steps.
9.4.1 Fill the purging device with 25.0 ml of reagent water or
aqueous calibration standard.
9.4.2 Start to purge the aqueous mixture. Inject a known volume
(between 100 and 2000 ill) of the calibration gas (at room
temperature) directly into the purging device with a gas
tight syringe. Slowly inject the gaseous sample through a
septum seal at the top of the purging device at 2000 #L/min.
If the injection of the standard is-made through the aqueous
sample inlet part, flush the head volume with several mL of
room air or carrier gas. Inject the gaseous standard before
5 min of the 11-min purge time have elapsed.
9.4.3 Determine the aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
chloride standard, in /jg/L, injected with the equation:
S = 0.102 (C)(V)
where S = Aqueous equivalent concentration
of vinyl chloride standard in /jg/L;
C - Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v);
268
-------
V = Volume of standard injected in milliliters.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
blanks. The laboratory must maintain records to document the
quality of the data generated. Additional quality control practices
are recommended.
10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background. Before any samples
are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent
the determination of any analyte of concern. Sources of background
contamination are glassware, purge gas, sorbants, and equipment.
Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
before proceeding with the next section. In general background from
method analytes should be below the method detection limit.
10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision. Analyze
four to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of
0.2-5 jtig/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for
guidance on appropriate concentrations).
t
10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
quality control sample to reagent water. If a quality
control sample containing the method analytes is not
available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
standards may be used. Also add the appropriate amounts of
internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
of all replicates over a period of several days.
10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
procedures described in Sect. 13.2 (2).
10;3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
RSD should be <20%. Some analytes, particularly the early
eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight
compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
other analytes. The method detection limits must be suffici-
ent to detect analytes at the required levels. If these
269
-------
ent to detect analytes at the required levels. If these
criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial action and
repeat the measurements for that analyte to demonstrate
acceptable performance before samples are analyzed.
10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
as a function of time. Charting of surrogate recoveries is
an especially valuable activity since these are present in
.every sample and the analytical results will form a signi-
ficant record of data quality.
10.4 Monitor the integrated areas of the quantitation ions of the
internal standards and surrogates in continuing calibration checks.
These should remain reasonably constant over time. A drift of more
than 50% in any area is indicative of a loss in sensitivity, and the
problem must be found and corrected. These integrated areas should
also be reasonably constant in laboratory fortified blanks and
samples.
10.5 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS. With each batch of samples processed as
a group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
determine the background system contamination. A FRB (Sect. 10.7)
may be used in place of an LRB.
10.6 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work shift,
analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3. If
more than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for
every 20 samples. Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to
evaluate the accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether
the method detection limits can be obtained. If acceptable accuracy
and method detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be
located and corrected before further samples are analyzed. Add
these results to the on-going control charts to document data
quality.
10.7 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
analyzed. The results of these analyses will help define contamina-
tion resulting from field sampling and transportation activities.
If the FRB shows unacceptable contamination, a LRB must be measured
to define the source of the impurities.
10.8 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory measure-
ments. Add these results to the on-going control charts to document
data quality.
10.9 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
and correct the problem source.
270
-------
10.10 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is
used with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and
ground water. Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample
matrix (LFM) is not required. It is recommended that sample matrix
effects be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in
10.9.
10.11 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into other
parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to potential
problems.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING — This method is designed for a
25-mL sample volume, but a smaller (5 mL) sample volume is
recommended if the GC/MS system has adequate sensitivity to achieve
the required method detection limits. Adjust the purge gas
(nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet
to the purging device and open the syringe valve on the purging
device.
11.2 Remove the plungers from two 25-mL (or 5-mL depending on sample
size) syringes and attach a closed syringe valve to each. Warm the
sample to room temperature, open the sample bottle, and carefully
pour the sample into one of the syringe barrels to just short of
overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger, invert the syringe, and
compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual
air while adjusting the sample volume to 25.0 mL (or 5-mL). For
samples and blanks, add 10 #L of the fortification solution
containing the internal standard and the surrogates to the sample
through the syringe valve. For calibration standards and laboratory
fortified blanks, add 10 #L of the fortification solution containing
the internal standard only. Close the valve. Fill the second
syringe in an identical manner from the same sample bottle. Reserve
this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.
11.3 Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the purging
device. Be sure that the trap is cooler than 25°C, then open the
sample syringe valve and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
Close both valves and initiate purging. Purge the sample for 11.0
min at ambient temperature.
11.4 SAMPLE DESORPTION — After the 11-min purge, place the purge and
trap system in the desorb mode. Introduce the trapped materials to
the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180°C while
backflushing the trap with an inert gas at 15 mL/min for about 4.
min. Simultaneously with the start of desorption, begin the
temperature program of the gas chromatograph, and start data
acquisition. While the extracted sample is being introduced into
the gas chromatograph, empty the purging device using the sample
syringe and wash the chamber with two 25-mL flushes of reagent
water. After the purging device has been emptied, leave syringe
271
-------
valve open to allow the purge gas to vent through the sample
Introduction needle.
11.5 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY — Acquire and store data from
m/z 35-260 with a total cycle time (including scan overhead time) of
7 sec or less. Cycle time should be adjusted to measure at least
five or more spectra during the elution of each GC peak. Adjust the
helium carrier gas flow rate to about 40 mL/min. The column
temperature is programmed to hold at 45°C for three min, increase to
2206C at 8°C/min, and hold at 220°C for 15 min or until all expected
compounds have eluted.
11.6 TRAP RECONDITIONING — After desorbing the sample for 4 min,
recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
purge mode. Wait 15 sec, then close the syringe valve on the
purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. Maintain the
trap temperature at 180°C. After approximately 7 min, turn off the
trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through
the trap. When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
11.7 TERMINATION OF DATA ACQUISITION — When all the sample components
have eluted from the GC, terminate MS data acquisition. Use
appropriate data output software to display full range mass spectra
and appropriate plots of ion abundance'as a function of time. If
any ion abundance exceeds the system working range, dilute the
sample aliquot in the second syringe with reagent water and analyze
the diluted aliquot.
11.8 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES — Identify a sample component by compar-
ison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction) to a
reference spectrum in the user-created data base. The GC retention
time of the sample component should be within three standard
deviations of the mean retention time of the compound in the
calibration mixture.
11.8.1 In general, all ions that are present above 10% relative
abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
should agree within absolute 20%. For example, if an ion has
a relative abundance of 30% in the standard spectrum, its
abundance in the sample spectrum should be in the range of 10
to 50%. Some ions, particularly the molecular ion, are of
special importance, and should be evaluated even if they are
below 10% relative abundance.
11.8.2 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically and produce
mass spectra containing ions contributed by more than one
analyte. When GC peaks obviously represent more than,one
sample component (i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or
valley between two or more maxima), appropriate analyte
spectra and background spectra can be selected by examining
272
-------
plots of characteristic ions for tentatively identified
components. When analytes coelute (i.e., only one GC peak is
apparent), the identification criteria can be met but each
analyte spectrum will contain extraneous ions contributed by
the coeluting compound. Because purgeable organic compounds
are relatively small molecules and produce comparatively
simple mass spectra, this is not a significant problem for
most method analytes.
11.8.3 Structural isomers that produce very similar mass spectra can
be explicitly identified only if they have sufficiently
different GC retention times. Acceptable resolution is
achieved if the height of the valley between two peaks is
less than 25% of the average height of the two peaks.
Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric
pairs. Cis- and trans-l,2-dichloroethene, two of the three
isomeric xylenes, and two of the three dichlorobenzenes are
three examples of structural isomers that cannot be explicit-
ly identified if both members of the isomeric pair are
present. These groups of isomers must be reported as
isomeric pairs (see Method 524.2 for an alternative
approach).
11.8.4 Methylene chloride and other background components appear in
variable quantities in laboratory and field reagent blanks,
and generally cannot be accurately measured. Subtraction of
the concentration in the blank from the concentration in the
sample is not acceptable because the concentration of the
background in the blank is highly variable.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Complete chromatographic resolution is not necessary for accurate
and precise measurements of analyte concentrations if unique ions
with adequate intensities are available for quantitation. For
example, although two listed analytes, carbon tetrachloride and
bromodichloromethane, were not resolved with the GC conditions used,
concentrations were calculated by measuring the non-interfering
quantitation ions.
12.1.1 Calculate analyte and surrogate concentrations.
c . (Ax)(Qis) 1000
(A,.) RF V
where: Cx = concentration of analyte or surrogate in
in the water sample.
Ax = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the analyte in the sample.
Ais = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the internal standard in the sample.
Qis = total quantity (in micrograms) of internal
273
-------
standard added to the water sample.
V = original water sample volume in ml.
RF = mean response factor of analyte from the
initial calibration.
12.1.2 Alternatively, use the GC/MS system software or other
available proven software to compute the concentrations of
the analytes and surrogates from the second or third order
regression curves.
12.1.3 Calculations should utilize all available digits of
precision, but final reported concentrations should be
rounded to an appropriate number of significant figures (one
digit of uncertainty). Experience indicates that three
significant figures may be used for concentrations above
99 fig/I, two significant figures for concentrations between
1-99 /Kj/L, and one significant figure for lower concentra-
tions.
12.1.4 Calculate the total trihalomethane concentration by summing
the four individual trihalomethane concentrations in /*g/L.
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory accuracy and precision data were obtained for 31
of the method analytes using laboratory fortified blanks with
analytes at concentrations between 1 and 5 /*g/L, and these data are
shown in Table 3.
13.2 With these data, method detection limits were calculated using the
formula (2):
MDL = S t^^
where: t(n_., , lpha = Q-99) = Student's t value for the 99%
confidence level with n-1 degrees of freedom
n = number of replicates
S = the standard deviation of the replicate analyses.
14. REFERENCES
1. Alford-Stevens, A., J.W. Eichelberger, W.L. Budde, "Purgeable Organic
Compounds in Water by Gas Chromatography/ Mass Spectrometry, Method
524." Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio, February 1983.
2. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
"Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci. Techno!., 15, 1426,
1981.
274
-------
3. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
4. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
5. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
275
-------
TABLE 1. MOLECULAR WEIGHTS, RETENTION TIME DATA,
AND QUANTITATION IONS FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Compound
MWa
Retention15 Primary
Time Quantitation
fmin:sec) Ions
Secondary
Quantitation
Ions
Internal standard
Fluorobenzene 96 16:34 96 77
Surrogates
4-Bromofluorobenzene 174 26:53 95 174,176
l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4 150 35:55 152 115,150
Target Analvtes
Benzene 78 15:31 78 77
Bromobenzene 156 25:12 156 77,158
Bromochloromethane 128 9:20 128 49,130
Bromodichloromethane 162 12:24 83 85,'l27
Bromoform 250 17:17 173 175^252
Bromomethane 94 94 96
Carbon tetrachloride 152 12:19 117 119
Chlorobenzene 112 22:14 112 77,114
Chloroethane 64 64 66
Chloroform 118 9:41 83 85
Chloromethane 50 . 50 ,52
2-Chlorotoluene 126 91 126
4-Chlorotoluene 126 91 126
Dibromochloromethane 206 14:53 129 127
1,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane 234 23:55 75 155,157
1,2-Dibromoethane 186 16:10 107 109,188
Dibromomethane 172 10:38 93 95,174
1,2-DiChlorobenzene 146 35:07 146 111,148
1,3-DiChlorobenzene 146 35:55 146 111,148
1,4-DiChlorobenzene 146 35:55 146 111,148
Dichlorodifluoromethane 120 4:14 85 87
1,1-DiChloroethane 98 9:02 63 65,83
1,2-Dichloroethane 98 10:43 62 98
1,1-Dichloroethene 96 7:50 96 61,63
cis-l,2-Dichloroethene 96 96 61,98
trans-l,2-Dichloroethene 96 9:55 96 61,98
1,2-Dichloropropane 112 13:55 63 112*
1,3-Dichloropropane 112 16:28 76 78
2,2-Dichloropropane 112 77 97
1,1-Dichloropropene 110 75 110,77
cis-l,3-dichloropropene 110 75
trans-l,3-dichloropropene 110 75
Ethyl benzene 106 91 106
p-Isopropyltoluene 134 119 134,91
276
-------
Compound
TABLE 1. (Continued)
MWa
Retention13 Primary
Time Quantitation
fmin:sec) Ions
Secondary
Quantitation
Ions
Methyl ene chloride
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tr i chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tr i chl oropropane
Vinyl Chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xylene
p-Xylene
84
104
166
166
164
92
132
132
130
136
146
62
106
106
106
5:21
29:02
19:31
20:00
21:22
11:41
14:43
7:22
4:00
30:34
30:48
30:48
84
104
131
83
166
92
97
83
95
101
75
62
106
106
106
86,49
78
133,119
131,85
168,129
91
99,61
97,85
130,132
103
77
64
91
91
91
Monoisotopic molecular weight calculated from the atomic masses of the
isotopes with the smallest masses.
Retention time measured from the beginning of the thermal desorption step.
Compounds with no retention data are known to be amenable to purge and trap
extraction (see Method 524.2), and chromatography on the packed gas
chromatography column used in this method, but no retention time data is
available for this method.
277
-------
TABLE 2. ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR 4-BROMOFLUOROBENZENE (BFB)
Mass
(M/z)
Relative Abundance Criteria
50
75
95
96
173
174
175
176
177
15 to 40% of mass 95
30 to 80% of mass 95
Base Peak, 100% Relative Abundance
5 to 9% of mass 95
< 2% of mass 174
> 50% of mass 95
5 to 9% of mass 174
> 95% but < 101% of mass 174
5 to 9% of mass 176
278
-------
TABLE 3. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN TO NINE DETERMINATIONS
OF THE METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER3
True
Cone.
Compound (uq/L)
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroform
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1, 2-Di chlorobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1, 1-Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
Methyl ene chloride
Styrene
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
Vinyl chloride
o-Xylene
p-Xylene
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
1.0
1.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Mean Rel . Mean Method
Observed Std. Std. Accuracy Dect.
Cone. Dev. Dev. (% of True Limit
(UQ/L} (ua/L) (%) Value} (ua/l)
0.97
0.92
1.0
2.4
0.88
1.02
1.03
0.92
3.5
0.93
0.94
5.0
5.6
0.96
1.05
0.97
1.09
0.98
1.01
1.00
0.99
1.2
1.11
0.93
1.05
1.05
0.90
1.09
0.98
1.02
1.11
0.036
0.042
0.17
0.23
0.098
0.047
0.086
0.14
0.63
Q.13
0.11
0.35
0.73
0.11
0.060
0.077
0.066
0.066
0.060
0.033
0.45
0.072
0.14
0.10
0.043
0.093
0.12
0.072
0.11
0.068
0.047
3.7
4.6
17.
9.6
11.
4.6
8.3
15.
18.
14.
12.
7.0
13.
12.
5.7
7.9
6.1
6.7
5.9
3.3
46.
6.0
13.
11.
4.1
8.9
13.
6.6
11.
6.7
4.2
97
92
100
100
88
L02
103
92
100
93
94
100
112
9.6
105
97
109
98
101
100
99
120
111
93
105
105
90
109
98
102
111
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.4
2.
0.4
0.3
1.
2.
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
1.
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
Data obtained by Robert W. Slater with a 25-mL sample size and the
compounds divided into two groups to minimize coelution.
279
-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
TRAP
EXIT X IN.
0.0.
14MU 0. D.
INLET K IN.
0.0.
0. D. EXIT
.SAMPLE INLET
-*-2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
—-17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
6MM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
. 0. D.
INLET
K IN. 0. 0.
1/16 IN. O.D.
'STAINLESS ST
10MM GLASS FRIT
MEDIUM POROSITY
13X MOLECULAR
SIEVE PURGE
GAS FILTER
PURGE GAS
CONTROL
FIGURE 1. PURGING DEVICE'
280
-------
PACKING PROCEDURE
CONSTRUCTION
GLASS
WOOL
ACTIVATED,,^
CHARCOAL.7-7CW
GRADE 15
7.7C
SILICA GEL'
TENAX 7.7 CM
3%OV-1 ,_„,
GLASS l"nni'°"
!»00
7A/FQOT
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
SOLID
(DOUBLE LAYER)
7*./FOOTi
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
SOLID
(SINGLE LAYER)
soH
COMPRESSION
FITTING NUT
AND FERRULES
THERMOCOUPLE/
CONTROLLER
SENSOR
TRAP INLET
NIC
ERATURE
TROL
ID
PYROMETER
TUBING 2SCM
0.105 IN. I.D.
0.125 IN. O.D.
STAINLESS STEEL
FIGURE 2. TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
DESORB CAPABILITY
281
-------
COLUMN: 1% SP-1000 ON CARBOPACK:B
PROGRAM -45°C FOR 3 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 220°C
DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
HI
I . - - t . « I
10 12 U 16 18 20
RETENTION TIME. MIN.
FIGURE 3. GAS CHROMATOGRAM
22 24 26 28
282
-------
METHOD 524.2. MEASUREMENT OF PUR6EABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN
WATER BY CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
Revision 3.0
A. Alford-Stevens, J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524, Revision 1.0
(1983)
R. W. Slater, Jr. - Method 524.2, Revision 2.0 (1986)
J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524.2, Revision 3.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
283
-------
METHOD 524.2
MEASUREMENT OF PURGEABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY
CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a general purpose method for the identification and
simultaneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
finished drinking water, raw source water, or drinking water in any
treatment stage (1-2). The method is applicable to a wide range of
organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
and trap procedures. The following compounds can be determined by
this method.
Compound
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochloromethane
Bromodi chloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chloromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochloromethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1,2-Di chlorobenzene
1,3-Di chlorobenzene
1,4-Di chlorobenzene
Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
ci s-1,2-Di chloroethene
trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
1,2-Dichloropropane
284
Chemical Abstract Service
Registry Number
71-43-2
108-86-1
74-97-5
75-27-4
75-25-2
74-83-9
104-51-8
135-98-8
98-06-6
56-23-5
108-90-7
75-00-3
67-66-3
74-87-3
95-49-8
106-43-4
124-48-1
96-12-8
106-93-4
74-95-3
95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
75-71-8
75-34-3
107-06-2
75-35-4
156-59-4
156-60-5
78-87-5
-------
1,3-Dichloropropane 142-28-9
2,2-Dichloropropane 590-20-7
1,1-Dichloropropene 563-58-6
cis-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-01-5
trahs-l,3-Dichloropropene 10061-02-6
Ethyl benzene 100-41-4
Hexachlorobutadiene 87-68-3
Isopropylbenzene 98-82-8
4-Isopropyltoluene 99-87-6
Methylene chloride 75-09-2
Naphthalene 91-20-3
n-Propylbenzene 103-65-1
Styrene 100-42-5
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane 630-20-6
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5
Tetrachloroethene 127-18-4
Toluene 108-88-3
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene 87-61-6
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1
1,1,1-Trichloroethane 71-55-6
- 1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5
Trichloroethene 79-01-6
Trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4
1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4
1,2,4-Trimethyl benzene 95-63-6
1,3,5-Trimethyl benzene 108-67-8
Vinyl chloride 75-01-4
o-Xylene 95-47-6
m-Xylene 108-38-3
p-Xylene 106-42-3
1.2 Method detection limits (MDLs) (3) are compound and instrument
dependent and vary from approximately 0.02-0.35 jag/L. The applicable
concentration range of this method is primarily column dependent and
is approximately 0.02 to 200 /fg/L for the wide-bore thick-film
columns. Narrow-bore thin-film columns may have a capacity which
limits the range to about 0.02 to 20 /jg/L. Analytes that are
inefficiently purged from water will not be detected when present at
low concentrations, but they can be measured with acceptable accuracy
and precision when present in sufficient amounts.
1.3 Analytes that are not separated chromatographicallys but which have
different mass spectra and non-interfering quantitation ions, can be
identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
sample (Sect 11.6.2). Analytes which have very similar mass spectra
cannot be individually identified and measured in the same
calibration mixture or water sample unless they have different
retention times (Sect.11.6.3). Coeluting compounds with very similar
mass spectra, typically many structural isomers, must be reported as
an isomeric group or pair. Two of the three isomeric xylenes and two
of the three dichlorobenzenes are examples of structural isomers that
285
-------
may not be resolved on the capillary column, and if not, must be
reported as isomeric pairs.
SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Volatile organic compounds and surrogates with low water solubility
are extracted (purged) from the sample matrix by bubbling an inert
gas through the aqueous sample. Purged sample components are trapped
in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials. When purging is
complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with helium to
desorb the trapped sample components into a capillary gas
chromatography (GC) column interfaced to a mass spectrometer (MS).
The column is temperature programmed to separate the method analytes
which are then detected with the MS. Compounds eluting from the GC
column are identified by comparing their measured mass spectra and
retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a data
base. Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
conditions used for samples. The concentration of each identified
component is measured by relating the MS response of the quantitation
ion produced by that compound to the MS response of the quantitation
ion produced by a compound that is used as an internal standard.
Surrogate analytes, whose concentrations are known in every sample,
are measured with the same internal standard calibration procedure.
DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of a
surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
286
-------
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that is
treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated, as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage, preservation
and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB is to
determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in
the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of one or
more compounds (analytes, surrogates, internal standard, or other
test compounds) used to evaluate the performance of the instrument
system with respect to a defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an environ-
mental sample to which known quantities of the method analytes are
added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly like a sample,
and its purpose is to determine whether the sample matrix contributes
bias to the analytical results. The background concentrations of the
analytes in the sample matrix must be determined in a separate
aliquot and the measured values in the LFM corrected for background
concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a, concentrated
solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory with an
assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are used to
prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions and the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentra-tion.
287
-------
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible solvent
which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental samples. The
QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory, and is used
to check laboratory performance with externally prepared test
materi als.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
sorbent trap. The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
components in the purging device should be avoided since such
materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in the
trap during the purge operation. Analyses of laboratory reagent
blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants. When
potential interfering peaks are noted in laboratory reagent blanks,
the analyst should change the purge gas source and regenerate the
molecular sieve purge gas filter. Subtracting blank values from
sample results is not permitted.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
organic compounds. A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
reagent water. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.
4.3 Special precautions must be taken to determine methylene chloride.
The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
background levels will result. Since methylene chloride will
permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed of stainless steel
or copper tubing. Laboratory worker's clothing should be cleaned
frequently since clothing previously exposed to methylene chloride
fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
contribute to sample contamination.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method has
not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in this
method. Additional references to laboratory safety are available
(4-6) for the information of the analyst.
288
-------
5.2 The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon
tetrachloride, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichlorethane, hexachloro-
butadiene,1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloro-
form, l,2-dibromoethane,tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene, and vinyl
chloride. Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
these .compounds should be handled in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved
toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high
concentrations of these toxic compounds.
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS — 60-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #19832
or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
(Pierce #12718 or equivalent). Prior to use, wash vials and septa
with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water. Allow the
vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C oven
for 1 hr, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to be free
of organics.
6.2 PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM — The purge and trap system consists of three
separate pieces of equipment: purging device, trap, and desorber.
Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet all
of the following specifications.
6.2.1 The all glass purging device (Figure 1) should be designed to
accept 25-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
A smaller (5-mL) purging device is recommended if the GC/MS
system has adequate sensitivity to obtain the method
detection limits required. Gaseous volumes above the sample
must be kept to a minimum (< 15 mL) to eliminate dead volume
effects. A glass frit should be installed at the base of the
sample chamber so the purge gas passes through the water
column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of < 3 mm at
the origin. Needle spargers may be used, however, the purge
gas must be introduced at a point about 5 mm from the base of
the water column.
6.2.2 The trap (Figure 2) must be at least 25 cm long and have an
inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. Starting from the
inlet, the trap should contain 1.0 cm of methyl silicone
coated packing and the following amounts of adsorbents: 1/3
of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer, 1/3 of silica gel, and 1/3
of coconut charcoal. If it is not necessary to determine
dichlorodifluoromethane, the charcoal can be eliminated and
the polymer increased to fill 2/3 of the trap. Before
initial use, the trap should be conditioned overnight at
180°C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20
mL/min. Vent the trap effluent to the room, not to the
analytical column. Prior to daily use, the trap should be
conditioned for 10 min at 180°C with backflushing. The trap
may be vented to the analytical column during daily
289
-------
conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
temperature program prior to analysis of samples.
6.2.3 The use of the methyl silicone coated packing is recommended,
but not mandatory. The packing serves a dual purpose of
protecting the Tenax adsorbant from aerosols, and also of
insuring that the Tenax is fully enclosed within the heated
zone of the trap thus eliminating potential cold spots.
Alternatively, silanized glass wool may be used as a spacer
at the trap inlet.
6.2.4 The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable of rapidly heating
the trap to 180°C either prior to or at the beginning of the
flow of desorption gas. The polymer section of the trap
should not be heated higher than 200°C or the life expectancy
of the trap will decrease. Trap failure is characterized by
a pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
the trap during purging or by poor bromoform sensitivities.
The desorber design illustrated in Fig. 2 meets these
criteria.
6.3 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETER/DATA SYSTEM (GC/MS/DS)
6.3.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
throughout desorption and temperature program operation. The
column oven must be cooled to 10°C; therefore, a subambient
oven controller is required. If syringe injections of BFB
will be used, a split/splitless injection port is required.
6.3.2 Capillary Gas Chromatography Columns. Any gas chromatography
column that meets the performance specifications of this
method may be used. Separations of the calibration mixture
must be equivalent or better than those described in this
method. Three useful columns have been identified.
6.3.2.1 Column 1 — 60 m x 0.75 mm ID VOCOL (Supelco, Inc.)
glass wide-bore capillary with a 1.5 iim film
thickness.
Column 2 -- 30 m x 0.53 mm ID DB-624 (J&W
Scientific, Inc.) fused silica capillary with a 3 /zm
film thickness.
Column 3 — 30 m x 0.32 mm ID DB-5 (J&W Scientific,
Inc.) fused silica capillary with a 1 urn film thick-
ness.
6.3.3 Interfaces between the GC and MS. The interface used depends
on the column selected and the gas flow rate.
290
-------
6.3.3.1 The wide-bore columns 1 and 2 have the capacity to
accept the standard gas flows from the trap during
thermal desorption, and chromatography can begin
with the onset of thermal desorption. Depending on
the pumping capacity of the MS, an additional
interface between the end of the column and the MS
may be required. An open split interface (7), an
all-glass jet separator, or a cryogenic (Sect.
6.3.3.2) device are acceptable interfaces. Any
interface can be used if the performance
specifications described in this method can be
achieved. The end of the transfer line after the
interface, or the end of the analytical column if no
interface is used, should be placed within a few mm
of the MS ion source.
6.3.3.2 The narrow bore column 3 cannot accept the thermal
desorption gas flow, and a cryogenic interface is
required. This interface (Tekmar Model 1000 or
equivalent) condenses the desorbed sample components
at liquid nitrogen temperature, and allows the
helium gas to pass through to an exit. The
"condensed components are frozen in a narrow band on
an uncoated fused silica precolumn. When all
components have been desorbed from the trap, the
interface is rapidly heated under a stream of
carrier gas to transfer the analytes to the
analytical column. The end of the analytical column
should be placed with a few mm of the MS ion
source. A potential problem with this interface is
blockage of the interface by frozen water from the
trap. This condition will result in a major loss in
sensitivity and chromatographic resolution.
6.3.4 The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron ionization
at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV. The spectrometer must
be capable of scanning from 35 to 260 amu with a complete
scan cycle time (including scan overhead) of 2 sec or less.
(Scan cycle time = Total MS data acquisition time in seconds
divided by number of scans in the chromatogram). The
spectrometer must produce a mass spectrum that meets all
criteria in Table 3 when 25 ng or less of
4-bromofluorobenzene (BFB) is introduced into the GC. An
average spectrum across the BFB GC peak may be used to test
instrument performance.
6.3.5 An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store,
reduce, and output mass spectral data. The computer software
should have the capability of processing stored GC/MS data by
recognizing a GC peak within any given retention time window,
comparing the mass spectra from the GC peak with spectral
data in a user-created data base, and generating a list of
291
-------
tentatively identified compounds with their retention times
and scan numbers. The software must allow integration of the
ion abundance of any specific ion between specified time or
scan number limits. The software should also allow
calculation of response factors as defined in Sect. 9.2.6 (or
construction of a second or third order regression
calibration curve), calculation of response factor statistics
(mean and standard deviation), and calculation of
concentrations of analytes using either the calibration curve
or the equation in Sect. 12.
6.4 SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES
6.4.1 Two 5-mL or 25-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip
(depending on sample volume used).
6.4.2 Three 2-way syringe valves with Luer ends.
6.4.3 One 25-/JL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).
6.4.4 Micro syringes - 10, 100 #L.
6.4.5 Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off valve.
6.5 MISCELLANEOUS
6.5.1 Standard solution storage containers — 15-mL bottles with
PTFE-lined screw caps.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 TRAP PACKING MATERIALS
7.1.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).
7.1.2 Methyl silicone packing (optional) — OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb
W, 60/80 mesh, or equivalent.
7.1.3 Silica gel — 35/60 mesh, Davison, grade 15 or equivalent.
7.1.4 Coconut charcoal — Prepare from Barnebey Cheney, CA-580-26
lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26 mesh screen.
7.2 REAGENTS
7.2.1 Methanol — Demonstrated to be free of analytes.
7.2.2 Reagent water — Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
through a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of activated
292
-------
. ... carbon, by using a water purification system, or by boiling
distilled water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with inert
gas while the water temperature is held at 90 C. Store in
clean, narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw
. caps.
7.2.3 Hydrochloric acid (1+1) — Carefully add measured volume of
cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.
7.2.4 Vinyl chloride — Certified mixtures of vinyl chloride in
nitrogen and pure vinyl chloride are available from several
sources (for example, Matheson, Ideal Gas Products, and Scott
Gases).
7.2.5 Ascorbic acid — ACS reagent grade, granular.
7.2.6 Sodium thiosulfate — ACS reagent grade, granular.
7.3 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS — These solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
the following procedures. One of these solutions is required for
every analyte of concern, every surrogate, and the internal standard.
A useful working concentration is about 1-5 mg/mL.
7.3.1 Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand,
unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
surfaces have dried and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
7.3.2 If the analyte is a liquid,at room temperature, use a 100-/U.
syringe and immediately add two or more drops of reference
standard to the flask. Be sure that the reference standard
falls directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck
of the flask. If the analyte is a gas at room temperature,
fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
5.0-mL mark, lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol
meniscus, and slowly inject the standard into the neck area
of the flask. The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.
7.3.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
flask several times. Calculate the concentration in vg/fiL
from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is
certified at 96% or greater, the weight can be used without
correction to calculate the concentration of the stock
standard.
7.3.4 Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped with
PTFE-lined screw caps. Methanol solutions prepared from
liquid analytes are stable for at least 4 weeks when stored
at 4°C. Methanol solutions prepared from gaseous analytes
. are not stable for more than 1 week when stored at <0°C; at
;:-.-•• room temperature, they must be discarded after 1 day.
293
-------
7.4 PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS -- Use stock standard solutions to prepare
primary dilution standard solutions that contain all the analytes of
concern and the surrogates (but riot the internal standard!) in
methanol. The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous calibra-
tion solutions that will bracket the working concentration range.
Store the primary dilution standard solutions with minimal headspace
and check frequently for signs of deterioration or evaporation,
especially just before preparing calibration solutions. Storage
times described for stock standard solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also
apply to primary dilution standard solutions.
7.5 FORTIFICATION SOLUTIONS FOR INTERNAL STANDARD AND SURROGATES
7.5.1 A solution containing the internal standard and the
surrogates is required to prepare laboratory reagent blanks
(also used as a laboratory performance check solution), and
to fortify each sample. Prepare a fortification solution
containing fluorobenzene (internal standard), 1,2-
dichlorobenzene-d4 (surrogate), and BFB (surrogate) in
methanol at concentrations of 5 ng/ml of each (any
appropriate concentration is acceptable). A 5-/JL aliquot of
this solution added to a 25-mL water sample volume gives
concentrations of 1 #g/L of each. A 5-juL aliquot of this
solution added to a 5-mL water sample volume gives a
concentration of 5 ng/L of each). Additional internal
standards and surrogate analytes are optional.
7.5.2 A solution of the internal standard alone is required to
prepare calibration standards and laboratory fortified
blanks. The internal standard should be in methanol at a
concentration of 5 /jg/mL (any appropriate concentration is
acceptable).
7.6 PREPARATION OF LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK — Fill a 25-mL (or 5-mL)
syringe with reagent water and adjust to the mark (no air bubbles).
Inject 10 /*L of the fortification solution containing the internal
standard and surrogates through the Luer .Lok valve into the reagent
water. Transfer the LRB to the purging device. See Sect. 11.1.2.
7.7 PREPARATION OF LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK — Prepare this exactly
like a calibration standard (Sect. 7.8). This is a calibration
standard that is treated as a sample. .
7.8 PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
7.8.1 The number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on
the calibration range desired. A minimum of three CAL
solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
in concentration. For a factor of 50, use at least four
standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
One calibration standard should contain each analyte of
294
-------
concern and each surrogate at a concentration of 2-10 times
; the method detection limit (Tables 4-6) for that compound.
The other CAL standards should contain each analyte of
; concern and each surrogate at concentrations that define the
range of the method. Every CAL solution contains the
internal standard at the same concentration (5 ng/L suggested
for a 5-mL sample; 1 /ig/L for a 25-mL sample).
7.8.2 To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
of a primary dilution standard (containing analytes and
surrogates) to an aliquot of reagent water in a volumetric
flask. Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the methanol
solutions into the expanded area of the filled volumetric
flask. Remove the needle as quickly as possible after
injection. Mix by inverting the flask three times only.
Discard the contents contained in the neck of the flask.
•. •. . Aqueous standards are not stable in a volumetric flask and
should be discarded after 1 hr unless transferred to a sample
bottle and sealed immediately.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE
8.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION
8.1.1 Collect all samples in duplicate. If samples contain
residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
acid to the sample bottle before filling. If gases are not
- to be determined, sodium thiosulfate may be used to reduce
-,'.-: the residual chlorine. Fill sample bottles to overflowing,
but take care not to flush out the rapidly dissolving
ascorbic acid. No air bubbles should pass through the sample
as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in the sample when the
bottle is sealed. Adjust the pH of the duplicate samples to
<2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1 HC1 for each 20 mL of
sample volume. Seal the sample bottles, PFTE-face down, and
shake vigorously for 1 min. .
8.1.2 When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min). Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.
8.1.3 When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.
8.1.4 The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
•• and maintained at that temperature until analysis. Field
samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
295
-------
sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
at the laboratory.
8.2 SAMPLE STORAGE
8.2.1 Store samples at 4°C until analysis. The sample storage area
must be free of organic solvent vapors.
8.2.2 Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection. Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
8.3 FIELD REAGENT BLANKS
8.3.1
8.3.2
9. CALIBRATION
Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
from the same general sample site at approximately the same
time. At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
filled sample bottles. Wherever a .set of samples is shipped
and stored, it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.
Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
and HC1 to blanks (Sect. 8.1.1).
9.1 Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration is
required before any samples are analyzed and is required
intermittently throughout sample analysis as dictated by results of
continuing calibration checks. After initial calibration is
successful, a continuing calibration check is required at the
beginning of each 8 hr. period during which analyses are performed.
Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory practice.
9.2 INITIAL CALIBRATION
9.2.1 Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
calibration compounds and procedures prescribed by the
manufacturer with any modifications necessary to meet the
requirements in Sect. 9.2.2,
9.2.2 Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
blank or making a syringe injection) 25 ng of BFB and acquire
mass spectra for m/z 35-260 at 70 eV (nominal). Use the
purging procedure and/or GC conditions given in Sect. 11. If
the spectrum does not meet all criteria in Table 2, the MS
must be retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before
proceeding with calibration. An average spectrum across the
GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
system.
296
-------
9.2.3
9.2.4
Purge a medium CAL solution, for example 10-20 fig/I, using
the procedure given in Sect. 11.
Performance criteria for the medium calibration.
stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.
Examine the
Figure 3
9.2.4.1 GC performance. Good column performance will
produce symmetrical peaks with minimum tailing for
most compounds. If peaks are broad, or sensitivity
poor, see Sect. 9.3.6 for some possible remedial
actions.
9.2.4.2 MS sensitivity. The GC/MS/DS peak identification
software should be able to recognize a GC peak in
the appropriate retention time window for each of
the compounds in calibration solution, and make
correct tentative identifications. If fewer than
99% of the compounds are recognized, system
maintenance is required. See Sect. 9.3.6.
9.2.5 If all performance criteria are met, purge an aliquot of each
of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS conditions.
9.2.6 Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte, surrogate,
and isomer pair for each CAL solution using the internal
standard fluorobenzene. Table 1 contains suggested
quantitation ions for all compounds. This calculation is
supported in acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect.
6.3.4), and many other software programs. RF is a unit! ess
number, but units used to express quantities of analyte and
internal standard must be equivalent.
RF= (AX)(Q,-S)
where: Ax = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the analyte.
integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the internal standard.
quantity of analyte purged in ng or
concentration units.
quantity of internal standard purged in ng or
concentration units.
Ajs =
Qx =
is
9.2.6.1 For each analyte and surrogate, calculate the mean
RF from the analyses of the CAL solutions.
Calculate the standard deviation (SD) and the
relative standard deviation (RSD) from each mean:
RSD = 100 (SD/M). If the RSD of any analyte or
surrogate mean RF exceeds 20%, either analyze
297
-------
additional aliquots of appropriate CAL solutions to
obtain an acceptable RSD of RFs over the entire
concentration range, or take action to improve 6C/MS
performance. See Sect. 9.2.7.
9.2.7 As an alternative to calculating mean response factors and
applying the RSD test, use the GC/MS data system software or
other available software to generate a second or third order
regression calibration curve.
9.3 Continuing calibration check. Verify the MS tune and initial
calibration at the beginning of each 8-hr work shift during which
analyses are performed using the following procedure.
9.3.1 Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
blank or making a syringe injection) 25 ng of BFB and acquire
a mass spectrum that includes data for m/z 35-260. If the
spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 2), the MS must be
retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before proceeding
with the continuing calibration check.
9.3.2 Purge a medium concentration CAL solution and analyze with
the same conditions used during the initial calibration.
9.3.3 Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria shown in
Sect. 9.2.4.
9.3.4 Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation ions of
the internal standard and surrogates have not decreased by
more than 30% from the areas measured in the most recent
continuing calibration check, or by more than 50% from the
areas measured during initial calibration. If these areas
have decreased by more than these amounts, adjustments must
be made to restore system sensitivity. These adjustments may
require cleaning of the MS ion source, or other maintenance
as indicated in Sect. 9.3.6, and recalibration. Control
charts are useful aids in documenting system sensitivity
changes.
9.3.5 Calculate the RF for each analyte and surrogate from the data
measured in the continuing calibration check. The RF for
each analyte and surrogate must be within 30% of the mean
value measured in the initial calibration. Alternatively, if
a second or third order regression is used, the point from
the continuing calibration check for each analyte and
surrogate must fall, within the analyst's judgement, on the
curve from the initial calibration. If these conditions do
not exist, remedial action must be taken which may require
re-initial calibration.
298
-------
9.3.6 Some possible remedial actions. Major maintenance such as
cleaning an ion source, cleaning quadrupole rods, etc.
require returning to the initial calibration step.
9.3.6.1 Check and adjust GC and/or MS operating conditions;
check the MS resolution, and calibrate the mass
scale.
9.3.6.2 Clean or replace the split!ess injection liner;
silanize a new injection liner.
9.3.6.3 Flush the GC column with solvent according to manu-
facturer's instructions.
9.3.6.4 Break off a short portion (about 1 meter) of the
column from the end near the injector; or replace GC
column. This action will cause a change in
retention times.
9.3.6.5 Prepare fresh CAL solutions, and repeat the initial
calibration step.
9.3.6.6 Clean the MS ion source and rods (if a quadrupole).
9.3.6.7 Replace any components that allow analytes to come
into contact with hot metal surfaces.
9.3.6.8 Replace the MS electron multiplier, or any other
faulty components.
9.4 Optional calibration for vinyl chloride using a certified gaseous
mixture of vinyl chloride in nitrogen can be accomplished by the
following steps.
9.4.1 Fill the purging device with 25.0 ml (or 5-mL) of reagent
: water or aqueous calibration standard.
9.4.2 Start to purge the aqueous mixture. Inject a known volume
(between 100 and 2000 /iL) of the calibration gas (at room
temperature) directly into the purging device with a gas
tight syringe. Slowly inject the gaseous sample through a
septum seal at the top of the purging device at 2000 /nL/min.
If the injection of the standard is made through the aqueous
sample inlet port, flush the dead volume with several ml of
room air or carrier gas. Inject the gaseous standard before
5 min of the 11-min purge time have elapsed.
9.4.3 Determine the aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
chloride standard, in vg/L, injected with the equation:
S = 0.102 (C)(V)
299
-------
where
S = Aqueous equivalent concentration
of vinyl chloride standard in jug/L;
C = Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v);
V = Volume of standard injected in milliliters.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
blanks. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality
of the data generated. Additional quality control practices are
recommended.
10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background. Before any samples
are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent blank
(LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
determination of any analyte of concern. Sources of background
contamination are glassware, purge gas, sorbants, and equipment.
Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
before proceeding with the next section. In general, background from
method analytes should be below the method detection limit.
10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision. Analyze
five to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of 0.2-5 /tg/L
(see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for guidance on
appropriate concentrations).
10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
quality control sample to reagent water. If a quality
control sample containing the method analytes is not
available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
standards may be used. Also add the appropriate amounts of
internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
of all replicates over a period of several days.
10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
analyte. Calculate the MDL of ea.ch analyte using the
procedures described in Sect. 13.2 (2).
10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
RSD should be <20%. Some analytes, particularly the early
eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight
300
-------
compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
other analytes. The method detection limits must be
sufficient to detect analytes at the required levels. If
these criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial
action and repeat the measurements for that analyte to
demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
analyzed.
10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
as a function of time. Charting of surrogate recoveries is
an especially valuable activity since these are present in
every sample and the analytical results will form a
significant record of data quality.
10.4 Monitor the integrated areas of the quantitation ions of the internal
standards and surrogates in continuing calibration checks. These
should remain reasonably constant over time. A drift of more than
50% in any area is indicative of a loss in sensitivity, and the
problem must be found and corrected. These integrated areas should
also be reasonably constant in laboratory fortified blanks and
samples.
10.5 Laboratory reagent blanks. With each batch of samples processed as a
group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
determine the background system contamination. A FRB (Sect. 10.7)
may be used in place of a LRB.
10.6 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work shift,
analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3. If more
than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for every 20
samples. Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to evaluate the
accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether the method
detection limits can be obtained. If.acceptable accuracy and method
detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be located and
corrected before further samples are analyzed. Add these results to
the on-going control charts to document data quality.
10.7 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
analyzed. The results of these analyses will help define contamina-
tion resulting from field sampling and transportation activities. If
the FRB shows unacceptable contamination, a LRB must be measured to
define the source of the impurities.
10.8 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory measure-
ments. Add these results to the on-going control charts to document
data quality.
10.9 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
301
-------
acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
and correct the problem source.
10.10 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is used
with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and ground
water. Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
(LFM) is not required. It is recommended that sample matrix effects
be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in 10.9.
10.11 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into other
parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to potential
problems.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING
11.1.1 This method is designed for a 25-mL sample volume, but a
smaller (5 ml) sample volume is recommended if the GC/MS
system has adequate sensitivity to achieve the required
method detection limits. Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or
helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the
purging device and open the syringe valve on the purging
device.
11.1.2 Remove the plungers from two 25-mL (or 5-mL depending on
sample size) syringes and attach a closed syringe valve to
each. Warm the sample to room temperature, open the sample
bottle, and carefully pour the sample into one of the syringe
barrels to just short of overflowing. Replace the syringe
plunger, invert the syringe, and compress the sample. Open
the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting
the sample volume to 25.0-mL (or 5-mL). For samples and
blanks, add 5-#L (or an appropriate volume) of the
fortification solution containing the internal standard and
the surrogates to the sample through the syringe valve. For
calibration standards and laboratory fortified blanks, add
5-#L of the fortification solution containing the internal
standard only. Close the valve. Fill the second syringe in
an identical manner from the same sample bottle. Reserve
this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.
11.1.3 Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the
purging device. Be sure that the trap is cooler than 25°C,
then open the sample syringe valve and inject the sample into
the purging chamber. Close both valves and initiate purging.
Purge the sample for 11.0 min at ambient temperature.
11.2 SAMPLE DESORPTION
11.2.1 Non-cryogenic interface — After the 11-min purge, place the
purge and trap system in the desorb mode and preheat the trap
302
-------
to 180°C without a flow of desorption gas. Then simultan-
eously start the flow of desorption gas at 15-mL/min for
about 4 min, begin the temperature program of the gas
chromatograph, and start data acquisition.
11.2.2 Cryogenic interface — After the 11-min purge, place the
purge and trap system in the desorb mode, make sure the
cryogenic interface is a -150°C or lower, and rapidly heat
the trap to 180°C while backflushing with an inert gas at
4 mL/min for about 5 min. At the end of the 5 min desorption
cycle, rapidly heat the cryogenic trap to 250°C, and
simultaneously begin the temperature program of the gas
chromatograph, and start data acquisition.
11.2.3 While the trapped components are being introduced into the
gas chromatograph (or cryogenic interface), empty the purging
device using the sample syringe and wash the chamber with two
25-mL flushes of reagent water. After the purging device has
been emptied, leave syringe valve open to allow the purge gas
to vent through the sample introduction needle.
11.3 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY — Acquire and store data over
the nominal mass range 35-260 with a total cycle time (including scan
overhead time) of 2 sec or less. If water, methanol, or carbon
dioxide cause a background problem, start at 47 or 48 m/z. Cycle
time must be adjusted to measure five or more spectra during the
elution of each GC peak. Several alternative temperature programs can
be used.
11.3.1 Single, ramp linear temperature program for wide bore columns
1 and 2 with a jet separator. Adjust the helium carrier gas
flow rate to about 15 mL/min. The column temperature is
reduced 10°C and held for 5 min from the beginning of
desorption, then programmed to 160°C at 6°C/min, and held
until all components have eluted.
11.3.2 Multi-ramp linear temperature program for wide bore column 2
with the open split interface. Adjust the helium carrier gas
flow rate to about 4.6 mL/min., The column temperature is
reduced 10°C and held for 6 min from the beginning of
desorption, then heated to 70°C at 10°/min, heated to 120°C
at 5°/min, heated to 180° at 8°/min, and held at 180° until
all compounds have eluted.
11.3.3 Single ramp linear temperature program for narrow bore column
3 with a cryogenic interface. Adjust the helium carrier gas
flow rate to about 4 mL/min. The column temperature is
reduced 10°C and held for 5 min from the beginning of
vaporization from the cryogenic trap, programmed at 6°C/min
for 10 min, then 15°C/nrin for 5 min to 145°C, and held until
all components have eluted.
303
-------
11.4 TRAP RECONDITIONING — After desorbing the sample for 4 min,
recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
purge mode. Wait 15 sec, then close the syringe valve on the purging
device to begin gas flow through the trap. Maintain the trap
temperature at 180°C. After approximately 7 min, turn off the trap
heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the
trap. When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
11.5 TERMINATION OF DATA ACQUISITMN — When all the sample components
have eluted from the GC, terminate MS data acquisition. Use
appropriate data output software to display full range mass spectra
and appropriate plots of ion abundance as a function of time. If any
ion abundance exceeds the system working range, dilute the sample
aliquot in the second syringe with reagent water and analyze the
diluted aliquot.
11.6 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES — Identify a sample component by
comparison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction) to a
reference spectrum in the user-created data base. The GC retention
time of the sample component should be within three standard
deviations of the mean retention time of the compound in the
calibration mixture.
11.6.1 In general, all ions that are present above 10% relative
abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
should agree within absolute 20%. For example, if an ion has
a relative abundance of 30% in the standard spectrum, its
abundance in the sample spectrum should be in the range of 10
to 50%. Some ions, particularly the molecular ion, are of
special importance, and should be evaluated even if they are
below 10% relative abundance.
11.6.2 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically and produce
mass spectra containing ions contributed by more than one
analyte. When GC peaks obviously represent more than one
sample component (i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or
valley between two or more maxima), appropriate analyte
spectra and background spectra can be selected by examining
plo.ts of characteristic ions for tentatively identified
components. When analytes coelute (i.e., only one GC peak is
apparent), the identification criteria can be met but each
analyte spectrum will contain extraneous ions contributed by
the coeluting compound. Because purgeable organic compounds
are relatively small molecules and produce comparatively
simple mass spectra, this is not a significant problem for
most method analytes.
11.6.3 Structural isomers that produce very similar mass spectra can
be explicitly identified only if they have sufficiently
different GC retention times. Acceptable resolution is
304
-------
achieved if the height of the valley between two peaks is
less than 25% of the average height of the two peaks.
Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric
pairs. Two of the three isomeric xylenes and two of the
three dichlorobenzenes are examples of structural isomers
that may not be resolved on the capillary columns. If
unresolved, these groups of isomers must be reported as
isomeric pairs.
11.6.4 Methylene chloride and other background components appear in
variable quantities in laboratory and field reagent blanks,
and generally cannot be accurately measured. Subtraction of
the concentration in the blank from the concentration in the
sample is not acceptable because the concentration of the
background in the blank is highly variable.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Complete chromatographic resolution is not necessary for accurate and
precise measurements of analyte concentrations if unique ions with
adequate intensities are available for quantitation.
12.1.1 Calculate analyte and surrogate concentrations.
c = (Ax)(Qis) 1000
(A,.) RF V
where: Cx = concentration of analyte or surrogate in fig/L
in the water sample.
Ax = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the analyte in the sample.
Ais = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
of the internal standard in the sample.
Q1s = total quantity (in micrograms) of internal
standard added to the water sample.
V = original water sample volume in ml.
RF = mean response factor of analyte from the
initial calibration.
12.1.2 Alternatively, use the GC/MS system software or other
available proven software to compute the concentrations of
the analytes and surrogates from the second or third order
regression curves.
12.1.3 Calculations should utilize all available digits of precis-
ion, but final reported concentrations should be rounded to
an appropriate number of significant figures (one digit of
uncertainty). Experience indicates that three significant
figures may be used for concentrations above 99 /tg/L, two
significant figures for concentrations between 1- 99 /zg/L,
and one significant figure for lower concentrations.
305
-------
12.1.4 Calculate the total trihalomethane concentration by summing
the four individual trihalomethane concentrations in
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION
13.1 Single laboratory accuracy and precision data were obtained for the
method analytes using laboratory fortified blanks with analytes at
concentrations between 1 and 5 ng/L. Four sets of results were
obtained using the three columns specified (Sect. 6.3.2) and the open
split, cryogenic, and jet separator interfaces (Sect. 6.3.3). These
data are shown in Tables 4-6.
13.2 With these data, method detection limits were calculated using the
formula (2):
MDL - S t(n.1f1.alpha = 0_99)
where:
tovi.t-aipha = 0.99) = Student's t val ue for the 99% confidence
level with n-1 degrees of freedom,
n = number of replicates
S = the standard deviation of the
replicate analyses.
14. REFERENCES
1. A. Al ford-Stevens, J.W. Eichelberger, W.L. Budde, "Purgeable Organic
Compounds in Water by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry, Method
524." Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio, February 1983.
2. Madding, C., "Volatile Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap
Capillary Column GC/MS", Proceedings of the Water Quality Technology
Conference, American Water Works Association, Denver, CO, December,
1984.
3. Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
"Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, "Environ. Sci. Techno! . . 15, 1426,
1981. ~
4. "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.
5. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
306
-------
6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
1979.
7. Arrendale, R.F., R.F. Severson, and O.T. Chortyk, "Open Split
Interface for Capillary Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry", Anal.
Chem. 1984, 56, 1533.
8. Flesch, J.J., P.S. Fair, "The Analysis of Cyanogen Chloride in
Drinking Water," Proceedings of Water Quality Technology Conference,
American Water Works Association, St. Louis, MO., November 14-16,
1988.
307
-------
TABLE 1. MOLECULAR WEIGHTS AND QUANTITATION IONS FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Compound
MWa
Primary
Quantitation
Ion
Secondary
Quantitation
Ions
Internal standard
Fluorobenzene 96
Surrogates
4-Bromofl uorobenzene 174
l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4 150
Target Analvtes
Benzene 78
Bromobenzene 156
Bromochloromethane 128
Bromodichloromethane 162
Bromoform 250
Bromomethane 94
n-Butylbenzene 134
sec-Butyl benzene 134
tert-Butylbenzene 134
Carbon tetrachloride 152
Chlorobenzene 112
Chloroethane 64
Chloroform 118
Chloromethane 50
2-Chlorotoluene 126
4-Chlorotoluene 126
Dibromochloromethane 206
1,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane 234
1,2-Dibromoethane 186
Dibromomethane 172
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 146
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 146
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 146
Dichlorodifluoromethane 120
1,1-Dichloroethane 98
1,2-Dichloroethane 98
1,1-Dichloroethene 96
cis-l,2-Dichloroethene 96
trans-l,2-Dichloroethene 96
1,2-Dichloropropane 112
1,3-Dichloropropane 112
2,2-Dichloropropane 112
96
95
152
78
156
128
83
173
94
91
105
119
117
112
64
83
50
91
91
129
75
107
93
146
146
146
85
63
62
96
96
96
63
76
77
77
174,176
115,150
77
77,158
49,130
85,127
175,252
96
134
134
91
119
77,114
66
85
52
126
126
127
155,157
109,188
95,174
111,148
111,148
111,148
87
65,83
98
61,63
61,98
61,98
112
78
97
308
-------
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Compound
ci s-1 ,3-di chl oropropene
trans- 1 , 3-di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
I sopropyl benzene
4- I sopropyl to! uene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1,2, 3-Tri chl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Trichl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr imethyl benzene
Vinyl Chloride
o-Xylene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
110
TABLE 1.
MWa
110
110
106
258
120
134
84
128
120
104
166
166
164
92
180
180
132
132
130
136
146
120
120
62
106
106
106
75
(continued)
Primary
Quantitation
Ion
75
75
91
225
105
119
84
128
91
104
131
83
166
92
180
180
97
83
95
101
75
105
105
62
106
106
106
110,77
Secondary
Quantitation
Ions
110
110
106
260
120
134,91
86,49
120
78
133,119
131,85
168,129
91
182
182
99,61
97,85
130,132
103
77
120
120
64
91
91
91
aMonoisotopic molecular weight calculated from the atomic masses of the
isotopes with the smallest masses.
309
-------
TABLE 2.
CHROMATOGRAPHIC RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
ON THREE COLUMNS WITH FOUR SETS OF CONDITIONS0
Retention
Time (min:sec)
Compound
Internal standard
Fluorobenzene
Surrogates
4-Bromof 1 uorobenzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene-d4
Target Analvtes
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chl orof orm
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Cyanogen chloride
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-Chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Column lb
8:49
18:38
22:16
8:14
18:57
6:44
10:35
17:56
2:01
22:13
20:47
20:17
7:37
15:46
2:05
6:24
1:38
19:20
19:30
14:23
24:32
14:44
10:39
22:31
21:13
21:33
1:33
4:51
8:24
2:53
6:11
3:59
10:05
14:02
6:01
7:49
Column 2b
6:27
15:43
19:08
5:40
15:52
4:23
8:29
14:53
0:58
•19:29
18:05
17:34
5:16
13:01
1:01
4:48
0:44
16:25
16:43
11:51
21:05
11:50
7:56
19:10
18:08
18:23
0:42
2:56
5:50
1:34
3:54
2:22
7:40
11:19
3:48
5:17
Column 2V
14:06
23:38
27:25
13:30
24:00
12:22
15:48
22:46
4:48
27:32
26:08
25:36
13:10
20:40
12:36
3:24
24:32
24:46
19:12
19:24
15:26
27:26
26:22
26:36
3:08
10:48
13:38
7:50
11:56
9:54
15:12
18:42
11:52
13:06
Column 3d
8:03
• • .••",»•-•
7:25
16:25
5:38
9:20
15:42
1:17
17:57
17:28
17:19
7:25
14:20
1:27
5:33
0:58
16:44
16:49
1:03
12:48
18:02
13:36
9:05
17:47
17:28
17:38
0:53
4:02
7:00
2:20
5:04
3:32
8:56
12:29
5:19
7:10
310
-------
TABLE 2. (continued)
Compound
Retention
Time
(min:sec)
Column lb Column 2b Column 2b Column 3d
ci s-1 , 3-di chl oropropene
trans-1 , 3-di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Isopropyl benzene
4- I sopropy 1 tol uene
Methyl ene Chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1 , 2 , 3-Tr i chl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
11.58
13.46
15:59
26:59
18:04
21:12
3:36
27:10
19:04
17:19
15:56
18:43
13:44
12:26
27:47
26:33
7:16
13:25
9:35
2:16
19:01
20:20
19:28
1:43
17:07
16:10
16:07
13:23
23:41
15:28
18:31
2:04
23:31
16:25
14:36
13:20
16:21
11:09
10:00
24:11
23:05
4:50
11:03
7:16
1:11
16:14
17:42
16:54
0:47
14:31
13:41
13:41
16:42
17:54
21:00
32:04
23:18
26:30
9:16
32:12
24:20
22:24
20:52
24:04
18:36
17:24
32:58
31:30
12:50
18:18
14:48
6:12
24:08
31:30
24:50
3:56
22:16
21:22
21:18
14:44
19:14
16:25
17:38
2:40
19:04
16:49
15:47
14:44
15:47
13:12
11:31
19:14
18:50
6:46
11:59
9:01
1:46
16:16
17:19
16:59
1:02
15:47
15:18
15:18
8Columns 1-3 are those given in Sect. 6.3.2.1; retention times were measured
from the beginning of thermal desorption from the trap (columns 1-2) or from
the beginning of thermal release from the cryogenic interface (column 3).
bdC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.1.
^GC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.2.
GC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.3.
311
-------
TABLE 3. ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR 4-BROHOFLUOROBENZENE (BFB)
Mass
(H/z)
50
75
95
96
173
174
175
176
177
Relative Abundance Criteria
15 to 40% of mass 95
30 to 80% of mass 95
Base Peak, 100% Relative Abundance
5 to 9% of mass 95
< 2% of mass 174
> 50% of mass 95
5 to 9% of mass 174
> 95% but < 101% of mass 174
5 to 9% of mass 176
312
-------
TABLE 4. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM 16-31 DETERMINATIONS OF THE METHOD
ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING WIDE BORE CAPILLARY COLUMN la
Comoound
Benzene
Brotnobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chi orof orm
Chi oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
cis-1,2 Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oropropene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
I sopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl toluene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
True
Cone.
Range
(uafl}
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.2-20
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-100
0.1-10
0.1-100
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Valued
97
100
90
95
101
95
100
100
102
84
98
89
90
93
90
99
92
83
102
100
93
99
103
90
96
95
94
101
93
97
96
86
98
99
100
101
99
95
104
100
102
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
m
5.7
5.5
6.4
6.1
6.3
8.2
7.6
7.6
7.3
8.8
5.9
9.0
6.1
8.9
6.2
8.3
7.0
19.9
3.9
5.6
6.2
6.9
6.4
7.7
5.3
5.4
6.7
6.7
5.6
6.1
6.0
16.9
8.9
8.6
6.8
7.6
6.7
5.3
8.2
5.8
7.2
Method
Det.
Limit
(UQ/l}
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.08
0.12
0.11
0.11
0.13
0.14
0.21
0.04
0.10
0.03
0.13
0.04
0.06
0.05
0.26
0.06
0.24
0.03
0.12
0.03
0.10
0.04
0.06
0.12
0.12
0.06
0.04
0.04
0.35
0.10
0.06
0.11
0.15
0.12
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
313
-------
TABLE 4. (Continued)
Compound
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
To! uene
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
1,2, 4-Tr i chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2,3-Trichloropropane
1 , 2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
1,3, 5-Trimethyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
True
Cone.
Range
rua/L)
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-31
0.1-10
0.5-10
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
90
91
89
102
109
108
98
104
90
89
108
99
92
98
103
97
104
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.8
6.3
6.8
8.0
8.6
8.3
8.1
7.3
7.3
8.1
14.4
8.1
7.4
6.7
7.2
6.5
7.7
Method
Det.
Limit
(UQ/L)
0.05
0.04
0.14
0.11
0.03
0.04
0.08
0.10
0.19
0.08
0.32
0.13
0.05
0.17
0.11
0.05
0.13
"Data obtained by Robert W. Slater using column 1 with a jet separator
interface and a quadrupole mass spectrometer (Sect. 11.3.1) with analytes
divided among three solutions.
314
-------
TABLE 5. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS OF THE
METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING THE CRYOGENIC TRAPPING
OPTION AND A NARROW BORE CAPILLARY COLUMN 3°
Compound
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butylbenzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chl orobenzene
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Cyanogen chloride13
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
cis-1, 2 Di chl oroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,3-Dichloropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
cis-1, 3-Di chl oropropene
trans-1, 3-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Isopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl toluene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
True
Cone.
(UQ/L)
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0,1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
99
97
97
100
99
99
94
90
90
92
91
100
95
99
99
96
92
99
92
97
93
97
99
93
99
98
100
95
100
98
96
99
99
98
99 ,
100
98
87
97
98
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
6.2
7.4
5.8
4.6
5.4
7.1
6.0
7.1
2.5
6.8
5.8
5.8
3.2
4.7
4.6
7.0
10.6
5.6
10.0
5.6
6.9
3.5
6.0
5.7
8.8
6.2
6.3
9.0
3.7
7.2
6.0
5.8
4.9
7.4
5.2
6.7
6.4
13.0
13.0
7.2
Method
Dect.
Limit
(ua/L)
0.03
0.11
0.07
0.03
0.20
0.06
0.03
0.12
0.33
0.08
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.05
0.05
0,05
0.30
0.07
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.11
0.03
0.02
0.05
0.06
0.03
0.02
0.04
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.10
0.26
0.09
0.04
315
-------
TABLE 5. (Continued)
Compound
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1 , 2,3-Trichl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xyl ene
True
Cone.
(U.Q/L)
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
99
96
100
100
96
100
98
91
100
98
96
97
96
96
99
96
94
94
97
Rel . Method
Std. Dect.
Dev. Limit
m (ua/U
6.6
19.0
4.7
12.0
5.0
5.9
8.9
16.0
4.0
4.9
2.0
4.6
6.5
6.5
4.2
0.2
7.5
4.6
6.1
0.06
0.06
0.04
0.20
0.05
0.08
0.04
0.20
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.07
0.03
0.04
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.03
0.06
8Data obtained by Caroline A. Madding using column 3 with a cryogenic
interface and a quadrupole mass spectrometer (Sect 11.3.3).
Reference 8.
316
-------
TABLE 6. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
OF THE METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING WIDE BORE
CAPILLARY COLUMN 2a
Compound
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value,
No.b 2 ua/l Cone.}
RSD
M
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value,
0.2 ua/l Conc.^
RSD
'(*)
Internal Standard
Fluorobenzene 1
Surrogates
4-BromofI uorobenzene 2 98
l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4 3 97
Target Analvtes
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochloromethane
Bromodi chloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane0
Chloroform
Chloromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochloromethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropanec
l,2-Dibromoethanec
Dibromomethane 13 99
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 45 93
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 46 100
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 47 98
Dichlorodifluoromethane 14 38
1,1-Dichloroethane 15 97
1,2-Dichloroethane 16 102
1,1-Dichloroethene 17 90
cis-l,2-Dichloroethene 18 100
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene 19 92
37
38
4
5
6
7
39
40
41
8
42
9
10
43
44
11
97
102
99
96
89
55
89
102
101
84
104
97
110
91
89
95
1.8
3.2
4.4
3.0
5.2
1.8
2.4
27.
. 4.8
3.5
4.5
3.2
3.1
2.0
5.0
2.4
2.0
2.7
2.1
2.7
4.0
4.1
25.
2.3
3.8
2.2
3.4
2.1
96
95
113
101
102
100
90
52
87
100
100
92
103
95
d
108
108
100
95
94
87
94
d
85
100
87
89
85
1.3
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.9
1.8
2.2
6.7
2.3
2.8
9
2.6
1.6
2
2.1
3.1
4.4
3.0
2.2
5.1
2.3
2.8
3.6
2.1
3.8
2.9
2.3
317
-------
TABLE 6. (Continued)
Compound
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,3-Dichloropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane0
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene0
ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene0
trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Isopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl to! uene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1 , 1 , 2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
To! uene
1,2, 3-Tr i chl orobenzene
1 , 2 , 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tr i chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Trimethyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xyl ene
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value, RSD
No.b 2 ua/L Cone.1) (%)
20
21
25
48
26
49
50
27
51
52
53
28
29
30
54
55
56
31
32
33
34
35
57
58
36
59
60
61
102
92
96
96
91
103
95
e
93
102
95
99
101
97
105
90
92
94
107
99
81
97
93
88
104
97
f
98
2.2
3.7
1.7
9.1
5.3
3.2
3.6
7.6
4.9
4.4
2.7
4.6
4.5
2.8
5.7
5.2
3.9
3.4
2.9
4.6
3.9
3.1
2.4
3.5
1.8
2.3
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value, RSD
0.2 ua/L Cone.) M
103
93
99
ioo
88
101
95
e
78
97
104
95
84
92
126
78
83
94
109
106
48
91
106
97
115
98
f
103
2.9
3.2
2.1
4.0
2.4
2.1
3.1
8.3
2.1
3.1
3.8
3.6
3.3
1.7
2.9
5.9
2.5
2.8
2.5
13.
2.8
2.2
3.2
14.
1.7
1.4
8Data obtained by James W. Eichelberger using column 2 with the open split
interface and an ion trap mass spectrometer (Sect. 11.3.2) with all method
analytes in the same reagent water solution.
Designation in Figures 1 and 2.
°Not measured; authentic standards were not available.
dNot found at 0.2 ng/l.
cNot measured; methylene chloride was in the laboratory reagent blank.
fm-xylene coelutes with and cannot be distinguished from its isomer p-xylene,
No 61.
318
-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
TRAP
KIN.
0. D. EXIT
0.0.
14MM 0. D.
INLET* IN.
0.0.
SAMPLE INLET
i~*~24IAY SYRINGE VALVE
17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
GMM. 0. 0. RUBBER SffTUM
~10MM. 0. D.
% IN. 0. D.
1/16 IN. O.D.
'STAINLESS STEEL
10MM GLASS FRIT
MEDIUM POROSITY
131 MOLECULAR
SIEVE PURGE
GASnLTER
PURGE GAS
ROW
CONTROL
FIGURE 1. PURGING DEVICE
319
-------
PACKING PROCEDURE
CONSTRUCTION
GLASS em
WOOL ***
ACTIVATED, „
CHARCOAL.7J
GRADE 15
SIUCA
TENAX 7.7 CM
3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL1
5MM
7A/FOOT
RESISTANCE
WIRE WRAPPED
SOLID
(DOUBLE LAYER)
RESISTANCE
•IRE WRAPPED
SOLID
(SINGLE LAYER)
8OH
TRAP INLET
JC)
.COMPRESSION
RHING NUT
AND FERRULES
THERMOCOUPLE/
CONTROLLER
SENSOR
B£CTRONIC
fEMPERATURE
CONTROL
AND
PYROMETER
^ / TUBING 2SCU
0.105 IN. I.D,
;> J 0.12S IN. O.D.
,X STAINLESS STEa
FIGURE 2. TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
DESORB CAPABILITY
320
-------
o o
CVS
CNS
O
M
321
-------
w
cxa
SJO
CSI
CO
CK3
o
322
-------
METHOD 525.1 DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER
BY LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION AND CAPILLARY COLUMN
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
Revision 2.2
May, 1991
J. W. Eichelberger, T. D. Behymer, W. L. Budde - Method 525,
Revision 1.0, 2.0, 2.1 (1988)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
323
-------
METHOD 525.1
DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER
BY LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION AND CAPILLARY COLUMN
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a general purpose method that provides procedures for
determination of organic compounds in finished drinking water, raw
source water, or drinking water in any treatment stage. The method
is applicable to a wide range of organic compounds that are
efficiently partitioned from the water sample onto a C18 organic
phase chemically bonded to a solid silica matrix in a cartridge or
disk, and sufficiently volatile and thermally stable for gas
chromatography. Single-laboratory accuracy and precision data have
been determined at two concentrations with two instrument systems
for the following compounds:
Compound
Acenaphthylene
Alachlor
Aldrin
Anthracene
Atrazine
Benz[a]anthracene
Benzo[b]f1uoranthene
Benzo[k]f1uoranthene
Benzo[a]pyrene
Benzo[g,h,i]perylene
Butyl benzylphthalate
Chlordane components
Alpha-chlordane
Gamma-chlordane
Trans nonachlor
2-Chlorobiphenyl
Chrysene
Dibenz[a,h]anthracene
Di-n-butylphthalate
2,3-Dichlorobiphenyl
Diethylphthalate
Bis(2-ethylhexyl)adipate
Bi s(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
Dimethylphthalate
Endrin
Fluorene
Heptachlor
MW1
152
269
362
178
215
228
252
252
252
276
312
406
406
440
188
228
278
278
222
222
222
390
194
378
166
370
324
Chemical Abstracts Service
Registry Number
208
15972
309
120
1912
56
205
207
50
191-
85-
5103-
5103-
39765-
2051-
218-
53-
84-
16605-
84-
103-
117-
131-
72-
86-
76-
•96-8
-60-8
-00-2
-12-7
•24-9
-55-3
-82-3
•08-9
-32-8
-24-2
-68-7
-71-9
-74-2
-80-5
-60-7
-01-9
-70-3
-72-2
-91-7
-66-2
-23-1
-81-7
-11-3
-20-8
73-7
44-8
-------
Compound
Heptachlor epoxide
2,2',3,3',4,4I,6-Heptachloro-
bi phenyl
Hexachlorobenzene
2,2',4,4',5,6'-Hexachloro-
bi phenyl
Hexachl orocycl opentadi ene
Indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene
Lindane
,, Methoxychlor
2,2', 3,3', 4,5', 6,6' -Qcta-
chlorobi phenyl
2,2',3',4,6-Pentachloro-
biphenyl
Pentachlorophenol
Phenanthrene
. Pyrene
Simazine
2 , 2 ' , 4 , 4 ' -Tetrachl orobi phenyl
Toxaphene mixture
2, 4, 5-Trichl orobi phenyl
MW1
386
392
282
358
270
276
288
344
426
324
264
178
202
201
290
256
Chemical Abstracts Service
Reaistrv Number
1024-57-3
52663-71-5
118-74-1
60145-22-4
77-47-4
193-39-5
58-89-9 :
72-43-5
40186-71-8
60233-25-2
87-86-5
85-01-8
129-00-0
122-34-9
2437-79-8
8001-35-2
15862-07-4
1.2
Monoisotopic molecular weight calculated from the atomic masses of
the isotopes with the smallest masses.
A laboratory may use this method to identify and measure additional
analytes after the laboratory obtains acceptable (defined in Sect.
10) accuracy and precision data for each added analyte.
Method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the statistically calcu-
lated minimum amount that can be measured with 99% confidence that
the reported value is greater than zero (1)., The MDL is compound
dependent and is particularly dependent on extraction efficiency
and sample matrix. For the listed analytes, MDLs vary from 0.01 to
15 fig/I. The concentration calibration range of this method is
0.1 /ig/L to 10
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
Organic compound analytes, internal standards, and surrogates are
extracted from a water sample by passing 1 liter of sample water through
a cartridge or disk containing a solid inorganic matrix coated with a
chemically bonded C18 organic phase (liquid-solid extraction, LSE). The
organic compounds are eluted from the LSE cartridge or disk with a small
quantity of methyl ene chloride, and concentrated further by evaporation
of some of the solvent. The sample components are separated, identified,
and measured by injecting an aliquot of the concentrated methyl ene
325
-------
chloride extract into a high resolution fused silica capillary column of
a gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) system. Compounds eluting
from the GC column are identified by comparing their measured mass
spectra and retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a
data base. Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
conditions used for samples. The concentration of each identified
component is measured by relating the MS response of the quantitation ion
produced by that compound to the MS response of the quantitation ion
produced by a compound that is used as an internal standard. Surrogate
analytes, whose concentrations are known in every sample, are measured
with the same internal standard calibration procedure.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other
method analytes and surrogates that are components of the same
solution. The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a
sample component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot
in known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the
precision associated with laboratory procedures, but not with
sample collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation, and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the
laboratory environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all
respects, including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation, and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the
326
-------
FRB is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
defined set of method criteria.
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) ~ An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte,, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the
laboratory with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard
solutions are used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several
analytes prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions
and diluted as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other
needed analyte solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — a solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Qual.ity control sample (QCS) — a sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
327
-------
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 During analysis, major contaminant sources are reagents and liquid-
solid extraction columns. Analyses of field and laboratory reagent
blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of compounds is analyzed immediately after a sample
containing relatively high concentrations of compounds. Syringes
and splitless injection port liners must be cleaned carefully or
replaced as needed. After analysis of a sample containing high
concentrations of compounds, a laboratory reagent blank should be
analyzed to ensure that accurate values are obtained for the next
sample.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogen!city of chemicals used in this method
has not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as
a potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should
be minimized. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining
awareness of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals
used in this method. Additional references to laboratory safety
are cited (2-4).
5.2 Some method analytes have been tentatively classified as known or
suspected human or mammalian carcinogens. Pure standard materials
and stock standard solutions of these compounds should be handled
with suitable protection to skin, eyes, etc.
6. Apparatus and Equipment
6.1 All glassware must be meticulously cleaned. This may be
accomplished by washing with detergent and water, rinsing with
water, distilled water, or solvents, air-drying, and heating (where
appropriate) in an oven. Volumetric glassware is never heated.
6.2 Sample containers. 1-liter or 1-quart amber glass bottles fitted
with a Teflon-lined screw cap. (Bottles in which high purity
solvents were received can be used as sample containers without
additional cleaning if they have been handled carefully to avoid
contamination during use and after use of original contents.)
6.3 Separatory funnels. 2-liter and 100-mL with a Teflon stopcock.
6.4 Liquid chromatography column reservoirs. Pear-shaped 100- or 125-
mL vessels without a stopcock but with a ground glass outlet joint
sized to fit the liquid-solid extraction column. (Lab Glass, Inc.
part no. ML-700-706S, with a 24/40 top outer joint and a 14/35
bottom inner joint, or equivalent). A 14/35 outlet joint fits some
commercial cartridges.
328
-------
6.5 Syringe needles. No. 18 or 20 stainless steel.
6.6 Vacuum flasks. 1- or 2-liter with solid 'rubber stoppers.
6.7 Volumetric flasks, various sizes.
6.8 Laboratory or aspirator vacuum system. Sufficient capacity to
maintain a slight vacuum of 13 cm (5 in.) of mercury in the vacuum
flask.
6.9 Micro syringes, various sizes.
6.10 Vials. Various sizes of amber vials with Teflon-lined screw caps.
6.11 Drying column. Approximately 1.2 cm x 40 cm with 10 mL graduated
collection vial.
6.12 Analytical balance. Capable of weighing 0.0001 g accurately.
6.13 Fused silica capillary gas chromatography column. Any capillary
column that provides adequate resolution, capacity, accuracy, and
precision (Sect. 10) can be used. A 30 m X 0.25 mm id fused silica
capillary column coated with a 0.25 urn bonded film of polyphenyl-
methylsilicone is recommended (J&W DB-5 or equivalent).
6.14 Gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer/data system (GC/MS/DS)
6.14.1 The GC must be capable of temperature programming and be
equipped for split!ess/split or on-column capillary
injection. The injection tube liner should be quartz and
about 3 mm in diameter. The injection system must not
allow the analytes to contact hot stainless steel or other
metal surfaces that promote decomposition.
6.14.2 The GC/MS interface should allow the capillary column or
transfer line exit to be placed within a few mm of the ion
source. Other interfaces, for example the open split
interface, are acceptable as long as the system has
adequate sensitivity (see Sect. 9 for calibration
requirements).
6.14.3 The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron
ionization at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV. The
spectrometer must be capable of scanning from 45 to 450 amu
with a complete scan cycle time (including scan overhead)
of 1.5 sec or less. (Scan cycle time = Total MS data
acquisition time in sec divided by number of scans in the
chromatogram). The spectrometer must produce a mass
spectrum that meets all criteria in Table 1 when 5 ng or
less of DFTPP is introduced into the GC. An average
spectrum across the DFTPP GC peak may be used to test
instrument performance.
329
-------
6.15
6.14.4 An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store,
reduce, and output mass spectral data. The computer
software must have the capability of processing stored
GC/MS data by recognizing a GC peak within any given
retention time window, comparing the mass spectra from the
GC peak with spectral data in a user-created data base, and
generating a list of tentatively identified compounds with
their retention times and scan numbers. The software must
also allow integration of the ion abundance of an/specific
ion between specified time or scan number limits,
calculation of response factors as defined in Sect. 9.2.6
(or construction of a second or third order regression
calibration curve), calculation of response factor .
statistics (mean and standard deviation), and calculation
of concentrations of analytes using either the calibration
curve or the equation in Sect. 12.
Millipore Standard Filter Apparatus, ALL GLASS. This will be used
if the disks are to be used to carry out the extraction instead of
the cartridges.
7. REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 Helium carrier gas, as contaminant free as possible.
7.2 Liquid-solid extraction (LSE) cartridges. Cartridges are inert
non- leaching plastic, for example polypropylene, or glass, and
must not contain plasticizers, such as phthalate esters or
adipates, that leach into methylene chloride. The cartridges are
packed with about 1 gram of silica, or other inert inorganic
support, whose surface is modified by chemically bonded octadecyl
(cis) groups. The packing must have a narrow size distribution and
must not leach organic compounds into methylene chloride. One
liter of water should pass through the cartridge in about 2 hrs
with the assistance of a slight vacuum of about 13 cm (5 in.) of
mercury. Sect. 10 provides criteria for acceptable LSE cartridges
which are available from several commercial suppliers.
The extraction disks contain approximately 0.5 grams of 8 urn
octadecyl bonded silica uniformly enmeshed in a matrix of inert
PFTE fibrils. The size of the disks is 47mm x 0.5mm. As with
cartridges, the disks should not contain any organic compounds,
either from the PFTE or the bonded silica, which will leach into
the methylene chloride eluant. One liter of reagent water should
pass through the disks in 5-20 minutes using a vacuum of about 66cm
(26 in.) of mercury. Section 10 provides criteria for acceptable
LSE disks which are available commercially.
7.3 Solvents
7.3.1 Methylene chloride, acetone, toluene and methanol
purity pesticide quality or equivalent.
330
High
-------
7.3.2 Reagent water. Water in which an interferent is not
observed at the method detection limit of the compound of
interest. Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
through a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of activated
carbon or by using a water purification system. Store in
clean, narrow-mouth bottles with Teflon-lined septa and
screw caps.
7.4 Hydrochloric acid. 6N.
7.5 Sodium sulfate, anhydrous. (Soxhlet extracted with methylene
chloride for a minimum of 4 hrs.)
7.6 Stock standard solutions. Individual solutions of analytes, surro-
gates, and internal standards may be purchased as certified
solutions or prepared from pure materials. To prepare, add 10 mg
(weighed on an analytical balance to 0.1 mg) of the pure material
to 1.9 mi. of methanol or acetone in a 2-mL .volumetric flask, dilute
to the mark, and transfer the solution to an amber glass vial. If
the analytical standard is available only in quantities smaller
than 10 mg, reduce the volume of solvent accordingly. Some
polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons are not soluble in methanol or
acetone, and their stock standard solutions are prepared in
toluene. Methylene chloride should be avoided as a solvent for
standards because its high vapor pressure leads to rapid
evaporation and concentration changes. Methanol and acetone are
not as volatile as methylene chloride, but their solutions must
also be handled with care to avoid evaporation. Compounds 10, 11,
and 35 in Table 2 are soluble in acetone. Compounds 12, 13, and 20
in Table 2 are soluble in toluene. If compound purity is certified
by the supplier at >96%, the weighed amount can be used without
correction to calculate the concentration of the solution
(5 /ig//iL). Store the amber vials in a dark cool place.
7.7 Primary dilution standard solution. The stock standard solutions
are used to prepare a primary dilution standard.solution that
contains multiple analytes. The recommended solvent for this
dilution is acetone. Aliquots of each of the stock standard
solutions are combined to produce the primary dilution in which the
concentration of the analytes is at least equal to the
concentration of the most concentrated calibration solution, that
is, 10 ng//iL. Store the primary dilution standard solution in an
amber vial in a dark cool place, and check frequently for signs of
deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
calibration solutions.
7.8 Fortification solution of internal standards and surrogates.
Prepare a solution of acenaphthene-D10, phenanthrene-D10,
chrysene-Dt2, and perylene-D12, in methanol or acetone at a
concentration of 500 /jg/mL of each. This solution is used in the
preparation of the calibration solutions. Dilute a portion of this
solution by 10 to 50 /zg/mL and use this solution to fortify the
331
-------
7.9
actual water samples (see Sect. 11.2). Other surrogates, for
example, caffeine- N2 and pyrene-D1Q may be included in this
solution as needed (a 100-/zl_ aliquot of this 50 fig/ml solution
added to 1 liter of water gives a concentration of 5 /zg/L of each
internal standard or surrogate). Store this solution in an amber
vial in a dark cool place.
MS performance check solution. Prepare a 5 ng//iL solution of DFTPP
in methylene chloride. Store this solution in an amber vial in a
dark cool place.
7.10 Calibration solutions (CAL1 through CAL6). Prepare a series of six
concentration calibration solutions in acetone which contain all
analytes except pentachlorophenol and toxaphene at concentrations
of 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5, and 0.1 ng//*L, with a constant concentration
of 5 ng/nl of each internal standard and surrogate in each CAL
solution. CAL1 through CAL6 are prepared by combining appropriate
aliquots of the primary dilution standard solution (7.7) and the
fortification solution (500 /zg/mL) of internal standards and
surrogates (7.8). Pentachlorophenol is included in this solution at
a concentration four times the other analytes. Toxaphene CAL
solutions should be prepared as separate solutions at
concentrations of 250, 200, 100, 50, 25, and 10 ng//zL. Store these
solutions in amber vials in a dark cool place. Check these
solutions regularly for signs of deterioration, for example, the
appearance of anthraquinone from the oxidation of anthracene.
7.11 Reducing agents. Sodium sulfite or sodium arsenite. Sodium thio-
sulfate is not recommended as it may produce a residue of elemental
sulfur that can interfere with some analytes.
7.12 Fortification solution for optional recovery standard. Prepare a
solution of terphenyl-D14 in methylene chloride at a concentration
of 500 fig/ml. An aliquot of this solution may be added (optional)
to the extract of the LSE cartridge to check on the recovery of the
internal standards in the extraction process.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND HANDLING
8.1 Sample collection. When sampling from a water tap, open the tap
and allow the system to flush until the water temperature has
stabilized (usually about 2-5 min). Adjust the flow to about 500
mL/min and collect samples from the flowing stream. Keep samples
sealed from collection time until analysis. When sampling from an
open body of water, fill the sample container with water from a
representative area. Sampling equipment, including automatic
samplers, must be free of plastic tubing, gaskets, and other parts
that may leach analytes into water. Automatic samplers that
composite samples over time must use refrigerated glass sample
containers.
332
-------
8.2 Sample dechlorination and preservation. All samples should be iced
or refrigerated at 4°C from the time of collection until
extraction. Residual chlorine should be reduced at the sampling
site by addition of a reducing agent. Add 40-50 mg of sodium
sulfite or sodium arsehite (these may be added as solids with
stirring until dissolved) to each liter of water. Hydrochloric
acid should be used at the sampling site to retard the
microbiological degradation of some analytes in unchlorinated
water. The sample pH is adjusted to <2 with 6 N hydrochloric acid.
This is the same pH used in the extraction, and is required to
support the recovery of pentachlorophenol.
8.3 Holding time. Samples must be extracted within 7 days and the
extracts analyzed within 30 days of sample collection.
8.4 Field blanks.
8.4.1 Processing of a field reagent blank (FRB) is recommended
along with each sample set, which is composed of the
samples collected from the same general sample site at
approximately the same time. At the laboratory, fill a
sample container with reagent water, seal, and ship to the
sampling site along with the empty sample containers.
Return the FRB to the laboratory with filled sample
bottles.
8.4.2 When hydrochloric acid is added to samples, use the same
procedures to add the same amount to the FRB.
9. CALIBRATION
9.1 Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration
is required before any samples are analyzed and is required
intermittently throughout sample analysis as dictated by results of
continuing calibration checks. After initial calibration is
successful, a continuing calibration check is required at the
beginning of each 8 hr. period during which analyses are performed.
Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory
practice.
9.2 INITIAL CALIBRATION
9.2.1 Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
calibration compounds and procedures prescribed by the
manufacturer with any modifications necessary to meet the
requirements in Sect. 9.2.2.
9.2.2 Inject into the GC a 1-/JL aliquot of the 5 ng/#L DFTPP
solution and acquire a mass spectrum that includes data for
m/z 45-450. Use GC conditions that produce a narrow (at
least five scans per peak) symmetrical peak. If the
spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 1), the MS must
be retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before
proceeding with calibration. An average spectrum across
the GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
system.
333
-------
9.2.3 Inject a 1-/JL aliquot of a medium concentration calibration
solution, for example 0.5-2 pg/L, and acquire and store
data from m/z 45-450 with a total cycle time (including
scan overhead time) of 1.5 sec or less. Cycle time should
be adjusted to measure at least five or more spectra during
the elution of each GC peak.
9.2.3.1 Multi-ramp temperature program GC conditions.
Adjust the helium carrier gas flow rate to about
33 cm/sec. Inject at 45°C and hold in split!ess
mode for 1 min. Heat rapidly to 130°C. At 3 min
start the temperature program: 130-180°C at
12°/min; 180-240°C at 7°/min; 240-320°C at 12°/min.
Start data acquisition at 5 min.
9.2.3.2 Single ramp linear temperature program. Adjust
the helium carrier gas flow rate to about 33
cm/sec. Inject at 40°C and hold in splitless mode
for 1 min. Heat rapidly to 160°C. At 3 min start
the temperature program: 160-320°C at 6°/nrin;
hold at 320° for 2 min. Start data acquisition at
3 min.
9.2.4 Performance criteria for the medium calibration. Examine
the stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
Figure 1 shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.
9.2.4.1 GC performance. Anthracene and phenanthrene
should be separated by baseline.
Benzfa]anthracene and chrysene should be separated
by a valley whose height is less than 25% of the
average peak height of these two compounds. If
the valley between benz[a]anthracene and chrysene
exceeds 25%, the GC column requires maintenance.
See Sect. 9.3.6.
9.2.4.2 MS sensitivity. The GC/MS/DS peak identification
software should be able to recognize a GC peak in
the appropriate retention time window for each of
the compounds in calibration solution, and make
correct tentative identifications. If fewer than
99% of the compounds are recognized, system
maintenance is required. See Sect. 9.3.6.
9.2.4.3 Lack of degradation of endrin. Examine a plot of
the abundance of m/z 67 in the region of 1.05-1.3
of the retention time of endrin. This is the
region of elution of endrin aldehyde, a product of
the thermal isomerization of endrin. Confirm that
the abundance of m/z 67 at the retention time of
endrin aldehyde is <10% of the abundance of m/z 67
produced by endrin. If more than 10% endrin
aldehyde is observed, system maintenance is
required to correct the problem. See Sect. 9.3.6.
334
-------
9.2*5 If all performance criteria are met, inject a 1-/JL aliquot
of each of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS
conditions.
9.2.6 Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte and
surrogate for each CAL solution using the internal standard
whose retention time is nearest the retention time of the
analyte or surrogate. Table 2 contains suggested internal
standards for each analyte and surrogate, and quantitation
ions for all compounds. This calculation is supported in
acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect. 6.14.4), and
many other software programs. RF is a unit!ess number, but
units used to express quantities of analyte and internal
standard must be equivalent.
(Ax)(Qis)
RF =
(A1s)(Qx)
where:
Ax = integrated abundance of the
quantitation ion of the analyte.
Ais =? integrated abundance of the
quantitation ion internal standard.
Qx = quantity of analyte injected in ng or
concentration units.
Qjs .= . quantity of internal standard injected
in ng or concentration units.
9.2.6.1 For each analyte and surrogate, calculate the
mean RF from the analyses of the six CAL
solutions. Calculate the standard deviation
(SD) and the relative standard deviation (RSD)
from each mean: RSD = 100 (SD/M). If the RSD
of any analyte or surrogate mean RF exceeds
30%, either analyze additional aliquots of
appropriate CAL solutions to obtain an
acceptable RSD of RFs over the entire
concentration range, or take action to improve
GC/MS performance. See Sect. 9.2.7.
9.2.7 As an alternative to calculating mean response factors
and applying the RSD test, use the GC/MS data system
software or other available software to generate a
linear, second, or third order regression calibration
curve.
9.3 Continuing calibration check. Verify the MS tune and initial
calibration at the beginning of each 8 hr. work shift during
which analyses are performed using the following procedure.
9.3.1 Inject a l-fil aliquot of the 5ng//zL DFTPP solution and
acquire a mass spectrum that includes data for m/z
45-450. If the spectrum does not meet all criteria
335
-------
(Table 1), the MS must be retuned and adjusted to meet
all criteria before proceeding with the continuing
calibration check.
9.3.2 Inject a l-/iL aliquot of a medium concentration
calibration solution and analyze with the same
conditions used during the initial calibration.
9.3.3 Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria
shown in Sect. 9.2.4.
9.3.4 Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation
ions of the internal standards and surrogate(s) have not
decreased by more than 30% from the areas measured in
the most recent continuing calibration check, or by more
than 50% from the areas measured during initial
calibration. If these areas have decreased by more than
these amounts, adjustments must be made to restore
system sensitivity. These adjustments may require
cleaning of the MS ion source, or other maintenance as
indicated in Sect. 9.3.6, and recalibration. Control
charts are useful aids in documenting system sensitivity
changes.
9.3.5 Calculate the RF for each analyte and surrogate from the
data measured in the continuing calibration check. The
RF for each analyte and surrogate must be within 30% of
the mean value measured in the initial calibration.
Alternatively, if a second or third order regression is
used, the point from the continuing calibration check
for each analyte and surrogate must fall, within the
analyst's judgement, on the curve from the initial
calibration. If these conditions do not exist, remedial
action must be taken which may require reinitial
calibration.
9.3.6 Some possible remedial actions. Major maintenance such
as cleaning an ion source, cleaning quadrupole rods,
etc. require returning to the initial calibration step.
9.3.6.1 Check and adjust GC and/or MS operating
conditions; check the MS resolution, and
calibrate the mass scale.
9.3.6.2 Clean or replace the splitless injection
liner; silanize a new injection liner.
9.3.6.3 Flush the GC column with solvent according to
manufacturer's instructions.
9.3.6.4 Break off a short portion (about 1 meter) of
the column from the end near the injector; or
replace GC column. This action will cause a
change in retention times.
336
-------
9.3.6.5 Prepare fresh CAL solutions, and repeat the
initial calibration step.
9.3.6.6 Clean the MS ion source and rods (if a
quadrupole).
9.3.6.7 Replace any components that allow analytes to
come into contact with hot metal surfaces.
9.3.6.8 Replace the MS electron multiplier, or any
other faulty components.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration
of laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of
laboratory reagent blanks, laboratory fortified blanks, and
laboratory fortified matrix samples. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of the data generated.
Additional quality control practices are recommended.
10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background and acceptable
particle size and packing. Before any samples are analyzed, or
any time a new supply of cartridges or disks is received from a
supplier, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would
prevent the determination of any analyte of concern. In this
same experiment, it must be demonstrated that the particle size
and packing of the LSE cartridge or disk are acceptable.
Consistent flow rate is an indication of acceptable particle
size distribution and packing.
10.2.1 A major source of potential contamination is the
liquid-solid extraction (LSE) cartridge which could
contain phthalate esters, silicon compounds, and other
contaminants that could prevent the determination of
method analytes (5). Although disks are made of a
teflon matrix, they may still contain phthalate
materials. Generally, phthalate esters will be leached
from the cartridges into methylene chloride and produce
a variable background that is equivalent to <2 /zg/L in
the water sample. If the background contamination is
sufficient to prevent accurate and precise analyses, the
condition must be corrected before proceeding with the
initial demonstration. Figure 2 shows unacceptable
background contamination from a poor quality commercial
LSE cartridge. The background contamination is the
large broad peak, and the small peaks are method
. analytes present at a concentration equivalent to 2
/zg/L. Several sources of LSE cartridges may be
evaluated before an acceptable supply is identified.
10.2.2 Other sources of background contamination are solvents,
reagents, and glassware. Background contamination must
be reduced to an acceptable level before proceeding with
337
-------
the next section. In general, background from method
analytes should be below the method detection limit.
10.2.3 One liter of water should pass through a cartridge in
about 2 hrs with a partial vacuum of about 13 cm (5 in.)
of mercury. The flow rate through a disk should be
about 5-20 minutes for a liter of drinking water, using
full aspirator or pump vacuum. The extraction time
should not vary unreasonably among a set of LSE
cartridges or disks.
10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision.
Analyze four to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank
containing each analyte of concern at a concentration in the
range of 2-5 /zg/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant
levels for guidance on appropriate concentrations).
10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot
of the primary dilution standard solution, or another
certified quality control sample, to reagent water.
Analyze each replicate according to the procedures
described in Sect. 11 and on a schedule that results in
the analyses of all replicates over a period of several
days.
10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in
each replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte
in all replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage
of true value) for each analyte, and the precision (as
relative standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements
for each analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte
using the procedures described in Sect. 13.112 (1).
10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy,
expressed as a percentage of the true value, should be
70-130% and the RSD should be <30%. Some analytes,
particularly the polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons with
molecular weights >250, are measured at concentrations
below 2 #g/L, with a mean accuracy of 35-130% of true
value. The MDLs should be sufficient to detect analytes
at the regulatory levels. If these criteria are not met
for an analyte, take remedial action and repeat the
measurements for that analyte to demonstrate acceptable
performance before samples are analyzed.
10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot
the precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate
measurements as a function of time. Charting of
surrogate recoveries is an especially valuable activity
since these are present in every sample and the
analytical results will form a significant record of
data quality.
10.4 Monitor the integrated areas of the quantisation ions of the
internal standards and surrogates in continuing calibration
checks (see Sect. 9.3.4). In laboratory fortified blanks or
338
-------
samples, the integrated areas of internal standards and
surrogates will not be constant because the volume of the
extract will vary (and is difficult to keep constant). But the
ratios of the areas should be reasonably constant in laboratory
fortified blanks and samples. The addition of 10 /iL of the
recovery standard, terphenyl-D14 (500 fig/ml), to the extract is
optional, and may be used to monitor the recovery of internal
standards and surrogates in laboratory fortified blanks and
samples. Internal standard recovery should be in excess of 70%.
10.5 Laboratory reagent blanks. With each batch of samples processed
as a group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent
blank to determine the background system contamination. Any
time a new batch of LSE cartridges or disks is received, or new
supplies of other reagents are used, repeat the demonstration of
low background described in 10.2.
10.6 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work
shift, analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB)
containing each analyte of concern at a concentration as
determined in 10.3. If more than 20 samples are included in a
batch, analyze a LFB for every 20 samples. Use the procedures
described in 10.3.3 to evaluate the accuracy of the
measurements, and to estimate whether the method detection
limits can be obtained. If acceptable accuracy and method
detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be located
and corrected before further samples are analyzed. Add these
results to the on-going control charts to document data quality.
10.7 Determine that the sample matrix does not contain materials that
adversely affect method performance. This is accomplished by
analyzing replicates of laboratory fortified matrix samples and
ascertaining that the precision, accuracy, and method detection
limits of analytes are in the same range as obtained with
laboratory fortified blanks. If a variety of different sample
matrices are analyzed regularly, for example, drinking water
from groundwater and surface water sources, matrix independence
should be established for each. A laboratory fortified sample
matrix should be analyzed for every 20 samples processed in the
same batch.
10.8 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB)
should be analyzed. The results of these analyses will help
define contamination resulting from field sampling and
transportation activities.
10.9 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks
should be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory
measurements. Add these results to the on-going control charts
to document data quality (as in Sect. 10.3).
10.10 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample from an
external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
acceptable accuracy (Sect. 10.3.3), check the entire analytical
procedure to locate and correct the problem source.
339
-------
10.11 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into
other parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to
potential problems.
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 CARTRIDGE EXTRACTION
11.1.1 Setup the extraction apparatus shown' in Figure 3A. The
reservoir is not required, but recommended for
convenient operation. Water drains from the reservoir
through the LSE cartridge and into a syringe needle
which is inserted through a rubber stopper into the
suction flask. A slight vacuum of 13 cm (5 in.) of
mercury is used during all operations with the
apparatus. The pressure used is critical as a vacuum >
than 13 cm may result in poor precision. About 2 hrs is
required to draw a liter of water through the system.
11.1.2 Pour the water sample into the 2-L separatory funnel
with the stopcock closed, add 5 ml methanol, and mix
well. Residual chlorine should not be present as a
reducing agent should have been added at the time of
sampling. Also the pH of the sample should be about 2.
If residual chlorine is present and/or the pH is >2, the
sample may be invalid. Add a 100-juL aliquot of the
fortification solution (50 fig/ml) for internal standards
and surrogates, and mix immediately until homogeneous.
The concentration of these compounds in the water should
be 5 fig/I.
11.1.3 Flush each cartridge with two 10 ml aliquots of
methylene chloride, followed by two 10 ml aliquots of
methanol, letting the cartridge drain dry after each
flush. These solvent flushes may be accomplished by
adding the solvents directly to the solvent reservoir in
Figure 3A. Add 10 ml of reagent water to the solvent
reservoir, but before the reagent water level drops
below the top edge of the packing in the LSE cartridge,
open the stopcock of the separatory funnel and begin
adding sample water to the solvent reservoir. Close the
stopcock when an adequate amount of sample is in the
reservoir.
11.1.4 Periodically open the stopcock and drain a portion of
the sample water into the solvent reservoir. The water
sample will drain into the cartridge, and from the exit
into the suction flask. Maintain the packing material
in the cartridge immersed in water at all times. After
all of the sample has passed through the LSE cartridge,
wash the separatory funnel and cartridge with 10 mL of
reagent water, and draw air through the cartridge for 10
min.
11.1.5 Transfer the 125-mL solvent reservoir and LSE cartridge
(from Figure 3A) to the elution apparatus (Figure 3B).
340
-------
r\
The same 125-mL solvent reservoir is used for both
apparatus. Wash the 2-liter separatory funnel with 5 ml
of methylene chloride and collect the washings. Close
the stopcock on the 100-mL separatory funnel of the
elution apparatus, add the washings to the reservoir and
enough additional methylene chloride to bring the volume
back up to 5 ml and elute the LSE cartridge. Elute the
LSE cartridge with an additional 5 ml of methylene
chloride (10-mL total). A small amount of nitrogen
positive pressure may be used to elute the cartridge.
Small amounts of residual water from the LSE cartridge
will form an immiscible layer with the methylene
chloride in the 100-mL separatory funnel. Open the
stopcock and allow the methylene chloride to pass
through the drying column packed with anhydrous sodium
sulfate (1-in) and into the collection vial. Do not
allow the water layer to enter the drying column.
Remove the 100 mL separatory funnel and wash the drying
column with 2 mL of methylene chloride. Add this to the
extract. Concentrate the extract to 1 mL under a gentle
stream of nitrogen. If desired, gently warm the extract
in a water bath to evaporate to between 0.5 - 1.0 mL
(without gas flow). Do not concentrate the extract to
less than 0.5 mL (or dryness) as this will result in
losses of analytes. If desired, add an aliquot of the
recovery standard to the concentrated extract to check
the recovery of the internal standards (see Sect. 10.4).
11.2 DISK EXTRACTION (This may be manual or automatic)
11.2.1 Preparation of Disks
11.2.1.1 Insert the disk into the 47mm filter apparatus
as shown in Figure 4. Wash the disk with 5mL
methylene chloride (MeC12) by adding the MeC12
to the disk, drawing about half through the
disk, allowing it to soak the disk for about a
minute, then drawing the remaining MeC12
through the disk.
11.2.1.2 Pre-wet the disk with 5 mL methanol (MeOH) by
adding the MeOH to the disk and allowing it to
soak for about a minute, then drawing most of
the remaining MeOH through. A layer of MeOH
must be left on the surface of the disk, which
should not be allowed to go dry from this
point until the end of the sample extraction.
THIS IS A CRITICAL STEP FOR A UNIFORM FLOW AND
GOOD RECOVERY.
11.2.1.3 Rinse the disk with 5 mL reagent water by
adding the water to the disk and drawing most
through, again leaving a layer on the surface
of the disk.
11.2.2 Add 5 mL MeOH per liter of water sample. Mix well.
341
-------
11.2.3 Add the water sample to the reservoir and turn on the
vacuum to begin the extraction. Full aspirator vacuum
may be used. Particulate-free water may pass through
the disk in as little as ten minutes or less. Extract
the entire sample, draining as much water from the
sample container as possible.
11.2.4 Remove the filtration top from the vacuum flask, but do
.not disassemble the reservoir and fritted base. Empty
the water from the flask, and insert a suitable sample
tube to contain the eluant. The only constraint on the
sample tube is that it fit around the drip tip of the
fritted base. Reassemble the apparatus.
11.2.5 Add 5 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle, and
rinse the inside walls thoroughly. Allow the methylene
chloride to settle to the bottom of the bottle, and
transfer to the disk with a pipet or syringe, rinsing
the sides of the glass filtration reservoir in the
process. Draw about half of the methylene chloride
through the disk, release the vacuum, and allow the disk
to soak for a minute. Draw the remaining methylene
chloride through the disk.
11.2.6 Repeat the above step twice. Pour the combined eluates
through a small funnel with filter paper containing
three grams of anhydrous sulfate. Rinse the test tube
and sodium sulfate with two 5 ml portions of methylene
chloride. Collect all the extract and washings in a
concentrator tube.
11.2.7 Concentrate the extract to 1 ml under a gentle stream of
nitrogen. If desired, gently warm the extract in a
water bath or heating block to concentrate to between
05. and 1 ml. Do not concentrate the extract to less
than 0.5 ml, since this will result in losses of
analytes.
11.3 Analyze a 1-2 /tL aliquot with the GC/MS system under the same
conditions used for the initial and continuing calibrations
(Sect. 9.2.3).
11.4 At the conclusion of data acquisition, use the same software
that was used in the calibration procedure to tentatively
identify peaks in retention time windows of interest. Use the
data system software to examine the ion abundances of components
of the chromatogram. If any ion abundance exceeds the system
working range, dilute the sample aliquot and analyze the diluted
aliquot.
11.5 Identification of analytes. Identify a sample component by
comparison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction)
to a reference spectrum in the user-created data base. The GC
retention time of the sample component should be within 10 sec
of the time observed for that same compound when a calibration
solution was analyzed.
342
-------
11.5.1 In general, all ions that are present above 10% relative
abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
should agree within absolute 20%. For example, if an
ion has a relative abundance of 30% in the standard
spectrum, its abundance in the sample spectrum should be
in the range of 10 to 50%. Some ions, particularly the
molecular ion, are of special importance, and should be
evaluated even if they are below 10% relative abundance.
11.5.2 Identification is hampered when sample components are
not resolved chromatographically and produce mass
spectra containing ions contributed by more than one
analyte. When GC peaks obviously represent more than
one sample component (i.e., broadened peak with
shoulder(s) or valley between two or more maxima),
appropriate analyte spectra and background spectra can
be selected by examining plots of characteristic ions
for tentatively identified components. When analytes
coelute (i.e., only one GC peak is apparent), the
identification criteria can be met but each analyte
spectrum will contain extraneous ions contributed by the
coeluting compound.
11.5.3 Structural isomers that produce very similar mass
spectra can be explicitly identified only if they have
sufficiently different GC retention times. See Sect.
9.2.4.1. Acceptable resolution is achieved if the
height of the valley between two isomer peaks is less
than 25% of the average height of the two peak heights.
Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric
pairs. Benzo[b] and benzo[k]fluoranthene are measured
as an isomeric pair.
11.5.4 Phthalate esters and other background components appear
in variable quantities in laboratory and field reagent
blanks, and generally cannot be accurately measured at
levels below about 2 jig/L. Subtraction of the
concentration in the blank from the concentration in the
sample at or below the 2 jag/L level is not recommended
because the concentration of the background in the blank
is highly variable.
12. CALCULATIONS
12.1 Complete chromatographic resolution is not necessary for
accurate and precise measurements of analyte concentrations if
unique ions with adequate intensities are available for
quantitation. For example, although two listed analytes,
dibenz[a,h]anthracene and indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene, were not
resolved with the GC conditions used, and produced mass spectra
containing common ions, concentrations (Tables 3-6) were
calculated by measuring appropriate characteristic ions.
i
12.1.1 Calculate analyte and surrogate concentrations.
343
-------
(A,.) RF V
where:
Cx = concentration of analyte or surrogate
in pg/L in the water sample.
Ax = integrated abundance of the
quantitation ion of the analyte in
the sample.
Ais = integrated abundance of the
quantitation ion of the internal
standard in the sample.
Qis = total quantity (in micrograms) of
internal standard added to the water
sample.
V = original water sample volume in liters.
RF = mean response factor of analyte from
the initial calibration.
12.1.2 Alternatively, use the GC/MS system software or other
available proven software to compute the concentrations
of the analytes and surrogates from the second or third
order regression curves.
12.1.3 Calculations should utilize all available digits of
precision, but final reported concentrations should be
rounded to an appropriate number of significant figures
(one digit of uncertainity). Experience indicates that
three significant figures may be used for concentrations
above 99 /Kj/L, two significant figures for
concentrations between 1-99 /tg/L, and one significant
figure for lower concentrations.
13. METHOD PERFORMANCE
13.1 Single laboratory accuracy and precision data (Tables 3-7) for
each listed analyte was obtained at two concentrations with the
same extracts analyzed on more than two different instrument
systems. Seven 1-liter aliquots of reagent water containing 2
/ig/L of each analyte, and five to seven 1-liter aliquots of
reagent water containing 0.2 /ig/L of each analyte were analyzed
with this procedure. Tables 8-10 list data gathered using C-18
disks. These data were results from different extracts
generated by a volunteer laboratory, Environmental Health
Laboratories.
13.1.2 With these data, method detection limits (MDL) were
calculated using the formula:
MDL - S t(n.1j1.alpha = 0-99)
where:
Student's t value for the 99%
t(n-i i-aipha = o 99i, = Student's t value for the
confidence level with n-1 degrees of freedom
344
-------
n = number of replicates
S = standard deviation of replicate analyses.
13.2 PROBLEM COMPOUNDS
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
The common phthalate and adipate esters (compounds 14,
21, and 23-26), which are widely used commercially,
appear in variable quantities in laboratory and field
reagent' blanks, and generally cannot be accurately or
precisely measured at levels below about 2 /zg/L.
Subtraction of the concentration in the blank from the
concentration in the sample at or below the 2 fig/I level
is not recommended because the concentrations of the
background in blanks is highly variable.
Some polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons are rapidly
oxidized and/or chlorinated in water containing
residual chlorine. Therefore residual chlorine must be
reduced before analysis.
In water free of residual chlorine, some polycyclic
aromatic hydrocarbons (for example, compounds 9, 12, 13,
20, and 35) are not accurately measured because of low
recoveries in the extraction process.
Pentachlorophenol No. 40 and hexachlorocyclopentadiene
No. 34 may not be accurately measured.
Pentachlorophenol is a strong acid and elutes as a broad
weak peak. Hexachlorocyclopentadiene is susceptible to
photochemical and thermal decomposition.
14. REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Glaser, J. A., D. L. Foerst, G. D. McKee, S. A. Quave, and W. L.
Budde, "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci. Techno!. 1981
15, 1426-1435.
"Carcinogens - Working With Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.
"OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
"Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
1979.
Junk, G.A., M. J. Ayery, J. J. Richard, "Interferences in Solid-
Phase Extraction Using C-18 Bonded Porous Silica Cartridges," Anal.
Chem. 1988, 60, 1347.
345
-------
TABLE 1. ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR BIS(PERFLUOROPHENYL)PHENYL
PHOSPHINE (DECAFLUOROTRIPHENYLPHOSPHINE, DFTPP)
Mass
Relative Abundance
Criteria _
Purpose of Checkpoint1
51 10-80% of the base peak
68 <2% of mass 69
70 <2% of mass 69
127 10-80% of the base peak
197 <2% of mass 198
198 base peak or >50% of 442
199 5-9% of mass 198
275 10-60% of the base peak
365 >1% of the base peak
441 Present and < mass 443
442 base peak or >50% of 198
443 15-24% of mass 442
low mass sensitivity
low mass resolution
low mass resolution
low-mid mass sensitivity
mid-mass resolution
mid-mass resolution and sensitivity
mid-mass resolution and isotope ratio
mid-high mass sensitivity
baseline threshold
high mass resolution
high mass resolution and sensitivity
high mass resolution and isotope ratio
1A11 ions are used primarily to check the mass measuring accuracy of the mass
spectrometer and data system, and this is the most important part of the
performance test. The three resolution checks, which include natural
abundance isotope ratios, constitute the next most important part of the
performance test. The correct setting of the baseline threshold, as indicated
by the presence of low intensity ions, is the next most important part of the
performance test. Finally, the ion abundance ranges are designed to encourage
some standardization to fragmentation patterns.
346
-------
TABLE 2. RETENTION TIME DATA, QUANTITATION IONS, AND INTERNAL
STANDARD REFERENCES FOR METHOD ANALYTES.
Compound
Compound
Number
Retention
Time(min:sec)
Aa Bb
Quantitation
Ion fm/z)
Internal
Standard
Reference
Internal standards
acenaphthene-D10
phenanthrene-D10
chrysene-D12
1
2
3
4:49
8:26
18:14
7:45
11:08
19:20
164
188
240
Surrogate
perylene-D12
23:37 22:55
264
Target analvtes
acenaphthylene
aldrin
anthracene
atrazine
benz[a]anthracene
benzo[b]fluoranthene
benzo[k]fluoranthene
benzo[a]pyrene
benzo[g,h,i]perylene
butyl benzylphthalate
chlordane components
alpha-chlordane
gamma-chlordane
trans nonachlor
2-chlorobiphenyl
chrysene
dibenz[a,h]anthracene
di-n-butylphthalate
2,3-di chlorobi phenyl
diethylphthalate
di(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate
di(2~ethylhexyl)adi pate
dimethylphthalate
endrin
fluorene
heptachlor
heptachlor epoxide
4:37
7:25
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
11:21
8:44
7:56
18:06
22:23
22:28
23:28
27:56
16:40
13:44
13:16
13:54
4:56
18:24
27:15
10:58
7:20
5:52
19:19
17:17
4:26
15:52
6:00
10:20
12:33
13:36
11:20
10:42
19:14
22:07
22:07
22:47
26:44
18:09
15:42
15:18
15:50
7:55
19:23
25:57
13:20
10:12
8:50
20:01
18:33
7:21
16:53
8:53
12:45
14:40
152
66
178
200/215
228
252
252
252
276
149
375
375
409
188
228
278
149
222
149
149
129
163
81
166
100/160
81/353
1
2
2
1/2
3
3
3
3
3
2/3
2/3
2/3
2/3
1
3
3
2
1
1
2/3
2/3
2/3
1
2
2
347
-------
TABLE"2. (Continued)
Compound Retention Internal
Number Time(min:sec) Quantitation Standard
Comoound Aa Bb Ion (m/z) Reference
2,2l,3,3I,4,4',6-hepta-
chl orobi phenyl
hexachlorobenzene
2,2',4,4l,5,6'-hexa-
chl orobi phenyl
hexachl orocycl o-
pentadiene
indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene
lindane
methoxychl or
2, 2', 3, 3', 4, 5', 6,6'-
octachl orobi phenyl
2,2',3',4,6-penta
chl orobi phenyl
pentachlorophenol
phenanthrene
pyrene
simazine
2 , 2 ' , 4 , 4 ' -t etrachl oro-
bi phenyl
toxaphene
2,4, 5-tri chl orobi phenyl
alachlor
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
18:25
7:37
14:34
3:36
27:09
8:17
18:34
18:38
12:50
8:11
8:35
13:30
7:47
11:01
11:30-23:30
9:23
""
19:25
10:20
16:30
6:15
25:50
10:57
19:30
19:33
15:00
10:51
11:13
15:29
10:35
13:25
13:00-21:30
11:59
13:19
394/396
284/286
360
237
276
181/183
227
430
326
266
178
202
201
292
159
256
160
3
1/2
2
1
3
1/2
3
3
2
2
2
.2/3
1/2
2
2
2
2
aSingle ramp linear temperature program conditions (Sect. 9.2.3.2).
''Multi-ramp linear temperature program conditions (Sect. 9.2.3.1).
348
-------
TABLE 3. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS OF
THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
AND THE ION TRAP MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
(Table 2)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Mean"
aSee Table
True
Cone.
(ua/U
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
25
2
2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(ua/U
5.0
1.9
1.6
1.7
2.2
1.8
Std.
Dev.
(UQ/L)
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.2
not separated from
4.2
0.8
0.7
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.7
1.9
2.2
0.3
2.2
2.3
2.0
1.9
1.6
1.9
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.3
1.4
1.7
1.6
1.1
0.4
2.1
1.8
1.8
1.9
8.2
2.4
1.9
2.1
1.5
28.
1.7
1.8
4. Compounds 4, 40,
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.3
1.0
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
1.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
4.7
0.1
0.2
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.0
11.
13.
5.9
14.
11.
No. 11;
7.1
25.
14.
15.
10.
14.
37.
5.2
4.5
100.
14.
4.3
15.
11.
19.
11.
5.5
9.1
14.
8.7
14.
12.
25.
9.1
50.
9.5
11.
11.
5.3
15.
4.2
5.3
9.5
6.7
17.
5.9
15.
and 45 excluded
Mean Method Method
Accuracy Detection
(% of True Limit (MDL)
Conc.^ (nan \
100
95
80
85
110
90
measured
105
40
35
100
100
110
135
95
110
15
110
115
100
95
80
95
90
110
110
115
70
85
80
55
20
105
90
90
95
102
120
95
105
75
112
85
91
from the
a
a
a
a
a
a
with No. 11
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
u
a
a
a
a
15.
0.6
means.
349
-------
TABLE 4. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM FIVE TO SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 0.2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
AND THE ION TRAP MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound True
Number Cone.
( Table 2^ (ua/L)
4 0.5
~
5
6
7
8
g
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J. v
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
£i*W
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
M&an°
"Compounds
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
4, 40,
Mean
Observed Std.
Cone'. Dev.
(ua/L) (ua/L)
0.45 0.6
0.13 0.03
0.13 0.03
0.13 0.01
0.24 0.03
0.14 0.01
not separated from No
0.25 0.04
0.03 0.01
0.03 0.02
0.32 0.07
0.17 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.17 0.08
0.19 0.03
0.21 0.01
0.03 0.02
0.48 0.09
0.20 0.03
0.45 0.21
0.39 0.16
0.31 0.16
0.21 0.01
0.12 0.12
0.21 0.05
0.22 0.01
0.19 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.16 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.04 0.01
0.04 0.03
0.22 0.02
0.11 0.01
0.19 0.05
0.13 0.02
0.78 0.08
0.20 0.004
0.18 0.005
0.25 0.04
0.14 0.04
not measured at thi
0.13 0.02
0.18 0.04
Rel . Mean Method
Std. Accuracy
Dev. (% of True
(%) Cone.}
13.
23.
23.
7.7
13.
7.1
90
65
65
65
120
70
. 11; measured with
16.
33.
67.
22.
24.
16.
47.
16.
4.8
67.
19.
15.
47.
41.
52.
4.8
100.
24.
4.5
21.
16.
25.
16.
25.
75.
9.1
9.1
26.
15.
10.
2.0
2.8
16.
29.
s level
15.
25.
bZ
15
15
160
85
95
85
95
105
150
240
100
225
195
155
105
60
105
110
95
95
80
95
20
20
110
55
95
65
97
100
90
125
70
65
95
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/L}
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.04
0.1
0.04
No. 11
Of*
.2
0.04
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.04
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.04
0.5
0.2
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.03
0.1
0.1
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.01
0.02
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.16
and 45 excluded from the means.
350
-------
TABLE 5. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 2 nG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
AND A MAGNETIC SECTOR MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound True
Number Cone.
(Table 2} fua/L>
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46h
Meanb
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
25
2
2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(m!L\
5.7
1.9
1.6
2.2
2.4
2.2
Std.
Dev.
(ua/l)
0.34
0.22
0.18
0.67
0.46
0.87
not separated from
4.0
0.85
0.69
2.0
2.2
2.1
1.9
2.0
2.1
0.75
2.5
2.0
3.5
2.0
1.4
2.9
1.7
2.6
1.2
2.6
1.5
1.5
1.9
0.89
0.83
2.2
2.0
1.5
1.6
12.
2.3
2.0
2.5
1.6
28.
1.9
1.8
0.37
0.15
0.12
0.20
0.41
0.38
0.10
0.29
0.32
0.18
0.32
0.23
1.8
0.28
0.16
0.70
0.45
1.0
0.10
0.42
0.19
0.35
0.17
0.11
0.072
0.10
0.88
0.11
0.14
2.6
0.18
0.26
0.34
0.17
2.7
0.073
0.32
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.0
12.
11.
30.
19.
40
No. 11;
9.3
18.
17.
10.
19.
18.
5.2
14.
15.
24.
13.
12.
51.
14.
11.
24.
26.
38.
8.3
16.
13.
23.
8.9
12.
8.7
4.5
44.
7.3
8.8
22.
7.8
13.
14.
11.
10.
3.8
16.
Mean Method
Accuracy
(% of True
Cone.)
114
95
80
110
120
110
measured with
100
43
35
100
110
105
95
100
105
38
125
100
175
100
70
145
85
130
60
130
75
75
95
45
42
110
100
75
80
150
115
100
125
80
112
95
88
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/L)
a
a
a
a
a
a
No. 11
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a *
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
9.
1.
aSee Table 6. Compounds 4, 40, and 45 excluded from the means.
351
-------
TABLE 6. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SIX OR SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 0.2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
AND A MAGNETIC SECTOR MASS SPECTROMETER.
Compound
Number
( Table 2)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 ,
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Mean8
True
Cone.
rua/L)
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(U.Q/L)
0.67
0.11
0.11
0.14
0.26
0.24
Std.
Dev.
(UQ/L)
0.07
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.08
0.06
not separated from
0.40
0.08
0.07
0.33
0.19
0.17
0.19
0.17
0.27
0.09
1.1
0.18
0.29
0.42
0.32
0.20
0.53
0.18
0.11
0.33
0.17
0.11
0.17
0.05
0.08
0.27
0.24
0.15
0.13
1.8
0.21
0.19
0.27
0.13
0.10
0.02
0.01
0.16
0.02
0.08
0.04
0.02
0.08
0.01
1.2
0.05
0.17
0.23
0.16
0.09
0.30
0.03
0.05
0.08
0.01
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.06
0.03
0.09
0.02
0.02
0.82
0.07
0.04
0.07
0.03
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
m
9.4
24.
21.-
17.
31.
26.
No. 11;
25.
27.
22.
48.
13.
45.
18.
13.
28.
15.
109.
30.
59.
55.
50.
47.
57.
15.
42.
26.
7.1
40.
15.
35.
8.1
11.
39.
12.
13.
46.
33.
23.
27.
22.
Mean Method
Accuracy
(% of True
Cone.)
134
55
56
70
130
120
measured with
100
38
33
160
95
85
95
85
135
46
550
90
145
210
160
100
265
90
55
165
85
55
85
24
40
135
120
75
65
225
105
95
135
65
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/U
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.2
No. 11
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.1
4.
0.2
0.6
0.8
0.5
0.3
1.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.02
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.1
3,
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
not measured at this level
0.2
0.2
0.16
0.21
0.04
0.09
23.
28.
80
102
0.12
0.3
Compounds 4, 40, and 45 excluded from the means.
352
-------
TABLE 7. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN
DETERMINATIONS AT 2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
AND A QUADRUPOLE MASS SPECTROMETER
Mean Rel . Mean Method Method
Compound True Observed Std. Std. Accuracy Detection
Number Cone. Cone. Dev. Dev. (% of True Limit (MDL)
(Table 2) (pg/L) _ (uQ/l) (ua/l) (%) Cone.)
47 2 2.4 0.4 16. 122 1.0
353
-------
TABLE 8. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN REPLICATES AT 0.2 /tG/L
WITH LIQUID-SOLID C-18 DISK EXTRACTION AND AN ION TRAP MASS
SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
(Table 2}
1
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Target
Concentration
(ua/l)
0.2
5.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
2.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
20.0
0.2
0.2
Standard
Deviation
(ua/l)
0.01
0.37
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.07
0.16
0.03
0.04
0.03
0.07
0.12
0.06
0.18
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.08
0.02
0.02
0.50
0.04
0.02
0.05
0.01
0.05
0.08
0.08
0.04
0.06
0.01
0.05
0.01
0.03
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.04
0.06
2.47
0.04
0.03
Relative
Deviation
m
5.3
7.4
13.2
13.7
22.4
33.2
77.6
13.7
21.7
14.9
32.5
61.1
31.9
91.3
7.2
10.9
22.9
40.3
9.7
11.9
252.0
20.8
7.6
25.4
7.3
22.9
38.9
38.0
17.7
31.9
5.2
27.0
6.5
13.4
21.1
15.1
12.2
10.2
18.8
28.1
12.3
21.4
14.7
Mean
(aa/LV
0.22
5.55
0.26
0.22
0.21
0.29
0.40
0.21
0.26
0.23
0.37
0.19
0.19
0.55
0.16
0.27
0.18
0.47
0.17
0.27
1.54
0.36
0.23
0.23
0.20
0.28
0.36
0.28
0.22
0.19
0.34
0.29
0.22
0.20
0.20
0.17
0.20
0.24
0.19
0.21
24.80
0.19
0.11
Accuracy
(% of tarqet)
110
111
130
108
105
147
199
107
128
115
183
95
93
276
78
136
90
233
87
133
771
180
117
117
101
139
181
141
109
96
170
143
110
100
99
84
102
121
94
107
123
95
55
354
-------
TABLE 9. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN REPLICATES AT 2.0 flG/L
WITH LIQUID-SOLID C-18 DISK EXTRACTION AND AN ION TRAP MASS
SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
( Table 2)
I
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
. 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Target
Concentration
riia/L)
2
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
2
2
2
2
100
2
2
Standard
Deviation
rua/n
0.18
0.45
0.30
0.17
0.47
0.21
0.62
0.57
0.31
0.28
0.33
0.62
1.02
1.39
0.22
0.23
0.27
0.23
0.38
0.22
0.38
0.26
0.69
0.12
0.19
0.30
0.15
0.64
0.85
0.52
0.22
0.37
0.42
0.34
0.77
0.29
15.16
0.20
0.17
0.27
0.15
3.36
0.58
0.07
Relative
Deviation
(%)
9.2
9.1
14.8
8.6
23.5
10.4
30.9
28.7
15.6
13.9
16.7
31.1
51.2
69.3
11.2
11.6
13.4
11.3
18.9
11.1
19.1
12.8
34.6
6.1
9.7
15.0
7.4
32.2
42.3
25.9
11.0
18.3
21.2
16.8
38.5
14.7
75.8
9.9
8.3
13.3
7.4
3.4
28.8
3.5
Mean
(UQ/L)
2.00
5.22
2.14
2.25
2.78
2.21
2.84
2.30
2.61
2.28
2.92
1.21
1.92
3.29
2.52
1.99
2.25
2.45
2.35
2.23
3.25
2.49
1.80
1.97
2.15
2.10
2.41
2.46
1.96
2.05
1.42
2.31
2.69
2.34
0.97
2.11
19.51
2.20
2.34
2.37
2.11
98.33
1.65
1.55
Accuracy
(% of taraet}
100
104
107
112
139
111
142
115
130
114
146
61
96
164
126
100
113
123
117
111
163
124
90
98
108
105
121
123
98
102
71
115
134
117
49
106
98
110
117
119
106
98
82
77
355
-------
TABLE 10. MINIMUM DETECTION LIMITS FROM SEVEN REPLICATES USING
LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION C-18 DISKS AND AN ION TRAP MASS
SPECTROMETER
Chemical Name Minimum Detection Limits
Acenaphtyiene 0.033
Alachlor 0.092
Aldrin 0.083
Anthracene 0.086
Atrazine 0.140
Benz[a]anthracene 0.224
Benzo[b]fluoranthene 0.488
Benzo[k]fluoranthene 0.086
Benzo[a]pyrene 0.137
Benzo[ghi]perylene 0.094
Butyl benzylphthalate 0.204
Chlordane-alpha 0.384
Chiordane-gamma 0.200
Chlordane (transnonachlor) 0.574
Chrysene 0.068
Dibenz[ah]anthracene 0.144
Di-n-butylphthalate 0.253
Diethylphthalate 0.075
Di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate 1.584
Di(2-ethlyhexyl)adipate 0.131
Dimethylphthalate 0.048
Endrin 0.160
Fluorene 0.046
Heptachlor 0.144
Heptachlorepoxide 0.244
Hexachlorobenzene 0.111
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 0.039
Indeno[123cd]pyrene 0.170
Lindane 0.041
Methoxychlor 0.084
PCB-mono-Cl-isomer 0.045
PCB-di-Cl-isomer 0.061
PCB-tri-Cl-ISOMER 0.135
PCB-tetra-Cl-isomer 0.177
PCB-penta-Cl-isomer 0.095
PCB-hexa-Cl-isomer 0.200
PCB-hepta-Cl-isomer 0.239
PCB-octa-Cl-isomer 0.133
Pentachlorophenol 47.648
Phenanthrene 0.076
Pyrene 0.064
Simazine 0.118
Toxaphene 7.763
356
-------
s
00
357
-------
s
M
8
EJ
e>
cxa
•cvi
358
-------
2 Liter
separetory
funnel
125ml
solvent
reservoir
ground glass 1 14/35
LSE cartridge
rubber stopper
No. 18-2O luer-lok
syringe needle
V1 liter
acuum flask
1 25 ml
solvent
reservoir
ground glass
114/35
LSE cartridge
10Oml
separator/
funnel
drying
column
1.2cmx4Ocm
1O ml
graduated
vial
A. Extraction apparatus
FIGURE 3
B. Elution apparatus
359
-------
S4
Si
8
I
§
M
-------
METHOD 531.1. MEASUREMENT OF N-METHYLCARBAMOYLOXIMES
AND N-METHYLCARBAMATES IN WATER BY DIRECT AQUEOUS INJECTION HPLC
WITH POST COLUMN DERIVATIZATION
Revision 3.0
D. L. Foerst - Method 531, Revision 1.0 (1985)
T. Engels (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
Method 5, Revision 2.0 (1987)
R. L. Graves - Method 531.1, Revision 3.0 (1989)
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
• CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
361
-------
METHOD 531.1
MEASUREMENT OF N-METHYLCARBAMOYLOXIMES
AND N-HETHYLCARBAHATES IN WATER BY DIRECT AQUEOUS INJECTION HPLC
WITH POST COLUMN DERIVATIZATION
1. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This is a high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC) method
applicable to the determinations of certain N-methylcarbamoyloximes
and N-methylcarbamates in ground water and finished drinking
water(l). The following compounds can be determined using this
method:
Chemical Abstract Services
Analvte Registry Number
Aldicarb 116-06-3
Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4
Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3
Baygon 114-26-1
Carbaryl 63-25-2
Carbofuran 1563-66-2
3-Hydroxycarbofuran 16655-82-6
Methiocarb 2032-65-7
Methomyl 16752-77-5
Oxamyl 23135-22-0
1.2 This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
(Sect.12). Observed detection limits may vary between ground
waters, depending upon the nature of interferences in the sample
matrix and the specific instrumentation used.
1.3 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of liquid chromatography and in the
interpretation of liquid chromatograms. Each analyst must demon-
strate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method
using the procedure described in Sect. 10.3.
1.4 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
all of the analytes above, analyte identifications should be
confirmed by at least one additional qualitative technique.
2. SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 The water sample is filtered and a 400-ftL aliquot is injected into a
reverse phase HPLC column. Separation of the analytes is achieved
using gradient elution chromatography. After elution from the HPLC
column, the analytes are hydrolyzed with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide
(NaOH) at 95°C. The methyl amine formed during hydrolysis is
362
-------
reacted with o-phthalaldehyde (OPA) and 2-mercaptoethanol to form a
highly fluorescent derivative which is detected by a fluorescence
detector (2).
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
component.
3.2 Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
procedures used to measure other sample components. The purpose of
a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
sample.
3.3 Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.4 Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
laboratory procedures.
3.5 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
3.6 Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
present in the field environment.
3.7 Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
.defined set of method criteria.
363
-------
3.8 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
measurements at the required method detection limit.
3.9 Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly
like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background
concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
corrected for background concentrations.
3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
with an assayed reference compound. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare primary dilution standards.
3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several
analytes prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions
and diluted as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other
needed analyte solutions.
3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
internal standards and surrogate analytes. The CAL solutions are
used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
concentration.
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
samples. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
externally prepared test materials.
4. INTERFERENCES
4.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in liquid chromatograms.
Specific sources of contamination have not been identified. All
reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.
4.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.(2) Clean all
glassware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly
364
-------
rinsing with the last solvent used in it. Follow by washing
with hot water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap
and reagent water. Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle
furnace at 450°C for 1 hour. Do not heat volumetric ware.
Thermally stable materials might not be eliminated by this
treatment. Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted
for the heating. After drying and cooling, seal and store
glassware in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation
of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted or capped
with aluminum foil.
4.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by
distillation in all-glass systems may be required. WARNING:
When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the
solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is purified,
preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
4.2 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a
sample containing relatively high concentrations of analytes. A
preventive technique is between-sample rinsing of the sample syringe
and filter holder with two portions of reagent water. After
analysis of a sample containing high concentrations of analytes, one
or more laboratory method blanks should be analyzed.
4.3 Matrix interference may be caused by contaminants that are present
in the sample. The extent of matrix interference will -vary consid-
erably from source to source, depending upon the water sampled.
Positive identifications must be confirmed.
5. SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
be treated as a potential health hazard. Accordingly, exposure to
these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level. The
laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data
sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified (4-6) for the information of
the analyst.
5.2 WARNING: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the solvent
hazardous.
365
-------
6. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All specifications are suggested. Catalog
numbers are included for illustration only.)
6.1 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
6.1.1 Grab sample bottle — 60-mL screw cap vials (Pierce No.
13075 or equivalent) and caps equipped with a PTFE-faced
silicone septa (Pierce No. 12722 or equivalent). Prior to
use, wash vials and septa as described in Sect. 3.1.1.
6.2 BALANCE — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.3 FILTRATION APPARATUS
6.3.1 Macrofiltration -- To filter derivatization solutions and
mobile phases used in HPLC. Recommend using 47 mm filters
(Millipore Type HA, 0.45 /on for water and Millipore Type FH,
0.5 ion for organics or equivalent).
6.3.2 Microfiltration — To filter samples prior to HPLC analysis.
Use 13 mm filter holder (Millipore stainless steel XX300/200
or equivalent), and 13 mm diameter 0.2 urn polyester filters
(Nuclepore 180406 or equivalent).
6.4 SYRINGES AND SYRINGE VALVES
6.4.1 Hypodermic syringe — 10-mL glass, with Luer-Lok tip.
6.4.2 Syringe valve — 3-way (Hamilton HV3-3 or equivalent).
6.4.3 Syringe needle — 7 to 10-cm long, 17-gauge, blunt tip.
6.4.4 Micro syringes -- various sizes.
6.5 MISCELLANEOUS
6.5.1 Solution storage bottles — Amber glass, 10- to 15-mL
capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon-lined screw cap.
6.5.2 Helium, for degassing solutions and solvents.
6.6 HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPH (HPLC)
6.6.1 HPLC system capable of injecting 200- to 400-#L aliquots,
and performing binary linear gradients at a constant flow
rate. A data system is recommended for measuring peak
areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for method
analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
described below.
366
-------
6.6.2 Column 1 (Primary column) — 150 mm long ,x 3.9 mm I.D.
stainless steel packed with 4 fan NovaPak CIS. Mobil Phase
is established at 10:90 methanol: water, hold 2 min., then
program as a linear gradient to 80:20 methanol: water in 25
min. Alternative columns may be used in accordance with the
provisions described in Sect. 10.4.
6.6.3 Column 2 (Alternative column)* -- 250 mm long x 4.6 mm I.D.
stainless steel packed with 5 /an Beckman Ultrasphere ODS.
Mobile phase is established at 1.0 mL/min as a linear
gradient from 15:85 methanol: water to methanol in 32 min.
Data presented in this method were obtained using this
column. * Newer manufactured columns have not been able to
resolve aldicarb sulfone from oxamyl. '"""<•;.
6.6.4 Column 3 (Alternative column) -- 250 mm long x 4.6 mm I.D.
stainless steel packed with 5 fim Supelco LC-1. Mobile phase
is established at 1.0 mL/min as a linear gradient from 15:85
methanol: water to methanol in 32 min.
6.6.5 Post column reactor — Capable of mixing reagents into the
mobile phase. Reactor should be constructed using PTFE
tubing and equipped with pumps to deliver 0.1 to 1.0 mL/min
of each reagent; mixing tees; and two 1.0-mL delay coils,
one thermostated at 95°C (ABI URS 051 and URA 100 or equiva-
lent).
6.6.6 Fluorescence detector — Capable of excitation at 330 nm
(nominal) and detection of emission energies greater than
418 nm. A Schoffel Model 970 fluorescence detector was used
to generate the validation data presented in this method.
REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS — WARNING: When a solvent is
purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.
7.1 REAGENT WATER — Reagent water is defined as water that is
reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
determination of any analyte of interest. Reagent water used to
generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., 1801 Lone Eaqle St.,
Columbus, Ohio 43228.
7.2 METHANOL — Distilled-in-glass quality or equivalent.
7.3 HPLC MOBILE PHASE
7.3.1 Water -- HPLC grade (available from Burdick and Jackson).
367
-------
7.3.2 Methanol -- HPLC grade. Filter and degas with helium before
use.
7.4 POST COLUMN DERIVATIZATION SOLUTIONS
7.4.1 Sodium hydroxide, 0.05 N — Dissolve 2.0 g of sodium
hydroxide (NaOH) in reagent water. Dilute to 1.0 L with
reagent water. Filter and degas with helium just before
use.
7.4.2 2-Hercaptoethanol (1+1) — Mix 10.0 mL of 2-mercapto-ethanol
and 10.0 mL of acetonitrile. Cap. Store in hood (CAUTION
— stench).
7*.4.3 Sodium borate (0.05 N) — Dissolve 19.1 g of sodium borate
(Na2B407 ' 10H20) in reagent water. Dilute to 1.0 L with
reagent water. The sodium borate will completely dissolve
at room temperature if prepared a day before use,
7.4.4 OPA reaction solution — Dissolve 100 ± 10 mg of o-phthal-
aldehyde (mp 55-58°C) in 10 mL of methanol. Add to 1.0 L of
0.05 N sodium borate. Mix, filter, and degas with helium.
Add 100 (il of 2-mercaptoethanol (1+1) and mix. Make up
fresh solution daily.
7.5 MONOCHLOROACETIC ACID BUFFER (pH3) — Prepare by mixing 156 mL of
2.5 M monochloroacetic acid and 100 mL 2.5 M potassium acetate.
7.6 4-BROMO-3,5-DIMETHYLPHENYL N-METHYLCARBAMATE (BDMC) — 98% purity,
for use as internal standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).
7.7 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 jig/M-) — Stock standard solutions
may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
standard materials using the following procedure:
7.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
approximately 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the
material in HPLC quality methanol and dilute to volume in a
10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes may be used at the
convenience of the analyst. If compound purity is certified
at 96% or greater, the weight may be used without correction
to calculate the concentration of the stock standard.
Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any
concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or
by an independent source.
7.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
carbon-sealed screw cap vials. Store at room temperature
and protect from light.
368
-------
7.7.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
QC samples indicate a problem.
7.8 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare an internal standard
fortification solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g
of pure BDMC. Dissolve the BDMC in pesticide-quality methanol and
dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Transfer the internal
standard fortification solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw
cap bottle and store at room temperature. Addition of 5 /aL of the
internal standard fortification solution to 50 mL of sample results
in a final internal standard concentration of 10 /zg/L. Solution
should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.
Note: BDMC has been shown to be an effective internal standard for
the method analytes (1), but other compounds may be used, if the
quality control requirements in Sect. 9 are met.
7.9 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare concentrate by
adding 20 juL of the 3-hydroxycarbofuran stock standard solution,
1.0 mL of the aldicarb sulfoxide stock standard solution, 200 /tL of
the methiocarb stock standard solution, and 1 mL of the internal
standard fortification solution to a 10-mL volumetric flask. Dilute
to volume with methanol. Thoroughly mix concentrate. Prepare check
solution by placing 100 fil of the concentrate solution into a 100-mL
volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with buffered reagent water.
Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at
room temperature. Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC
(Sect. 10) indicates a problem.
8. SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION AND HANDLING
8.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional
sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the bottle must
not be prerinsed with sample before collection.
8,2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION/PH ADJUSTMENT ~ Oxamyl, 3-hydroxycarbofuran,
aldicarb sulfoxide, and carbaryl can all degrade quickly in neutral
and basic waters held at room temperature. (6,7) This short term
degradation is of concern during the time samples are being shipped
and the time processed samples are held at room temperature in
autosampler trays. Samples targeted for the analysis of these three
analytes must be preserved at pH 3. The pH adjustment also
minimizes analyte biodegradation.
8.2.1 Add 1.8 mL of monochloroacetic acid buffer to the 60-mL
sample bottle. Add buffer to the sample bottle at the
sampling site or in the laboratory before shipping to the
sampling site.
8.2.2 If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thio-
sulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
collecting the sample.
369
-------
8.2.3 After sample is collected in bottle containing buffer, seal
the sample bottle and shake vigorously for 1 min.
8.2.4 Samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C from the time of
collection until storage. Samples must be stored at -10°C
until analyzed. Preservation study results indicate that
method analytes are stable in water samples for at least 28
days when adjusted to pH 3 and stored at -10°C. However,
analyte stability may be effected by the matrix; therefore,
the analyst should verify that the preservation technique is
applicable to the samples under study.
9. CALIBRATION
9.1 Establish HPLC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.6. The HPLC system may be calibrated using either the
internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
technique (Sect. 9.3).
9.2 INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PR9CEDURE. The analyst must select
one or more internal standards similar in analytical behavior to the
analytes of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the
measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or
matrix interferences. BDMC has been identified as a suitable
internal standard.
9.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest by adding volumes of one or of the more stock
standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration
standard, add a known constant amount of one or more
internal standards, and dilute to volume with buffered
reagent water. To prepare buffered reagent water, add 10 mL
of 1.0 M monochloroacetic acid buffer to 1 L of reagent
water. The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs. The
remaining standards should bracket the analyte concen-
trations expected in the sample extracts, or should define
the working range of the detector.
9.2.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
(Sect. 11.2). Tabulate peak height or area responses
against concentration for each compound and internal
standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each analyte,
surrogate and internal standard using Equation 1.
RF = (As)(cis) Equation 1
(A
where:
370
-------
As = Response for the analyte to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Cjs = Concentration of the internal standard wg/L).
C = Concentration of the analyte to be measured
W/L).
9.2.3 If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
or less) the average RF can be used for calculations.
Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios (AsxAis) vs. Cs.
9.2.4 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
standards. If the response for any analyte varies from the
predicted response by more than ±20%, the test must be
repeated using a fresh calibration standard. If the
repetition also fails, a new calibration curve must be
generated for that analyte using freshly'prepared standards.
9.2.5 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards. The single point standards
should be prepared at a concentration that deviates from the
sample extract response by no more than 20%.
9.2.6 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at
least quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from
reference material obtained from an independent source.
Results from these analyses must be within the limits used
to routinely check calibration.
9.3 EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
9.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
(recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
a volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with buffered reagent
water. The lowest standard should represent analyte
concentrations near, but above, the respective EDLs. The
remaining standards should bracket the analyte
concentrations expected in the sample extracts, or should
define the working range of the detector.
9.3.2 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.2 and
tabulate responses (peak height or area) versus the
concentration in the standard. The results can be used to
prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
<20% relative standard deviation), linearity through the
371
-------
origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration
factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
9.3.3 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
one at the end of the analysis day. These check standards
should be at two different concentration levels to verify
the concentration curve. For extended periods of analysis
(greater than 8 hr), it is strongly recommended that check
standards be interspersed with samples at regular intervals
during the course of the analyses. If the response for any
analyte varies from the predicted response by more than
±20%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration
standard. If the results still do not agree, generate a new
calibration curve or use a single point calibration standard
as described in Sect. 9.3.3.
9.S-.4 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
calibration curve. Prepare single point standards from the
secondary dilution standards. The single point standard's
should be prepared at a concentration that deviates from the
sample extract response by no more than 20%.
9.3.5 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at
least quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from
reference material obtained from an independent source.
Results from these analyses must be within the limits used
to routinely check calibration.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
of laboratory capability, monitoring internal standard peak area or
height in each sample and blank (when internal standard calibration
procedures are being employed), analysis of laboratory reagent
blanks, laboratory fortified samples, laboratory fortified blanks
and QC samples.
10.2 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS. Before processing any samples, the
analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent
interferences are under control. Each time a set of samples is
extracted or reagents are changed, a laboratory reagent blank (LRB)
must be analyzed. If within the retention time window of any
analyte of interest the LRB produces a peak that would prevent the
determination of that analyte, determine the source of
contamination and eliminate the interference before processing
samples.
372
-------
10.3 INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF CAPABILITY.
10.3.1 Select a representative concentration (about 10 times EDL)
for each analyte. Prepare a sample concentrate (in
methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times selected
concentration. With a syringe, add 50 /iL of the
concentrate to each of at least four 50-mL aliquots of
reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to
procedures beginning in Sect. 11.
10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ±
3SR if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent
water in Table 2. For those compounds that meet the
acceptance criteria, performance is judged acceptable and
sample analysis may begin. For those compounds that fail
these criteria, this procedure must be repeated using four
fresh samples until satisfactory performance has been
demonstrated.
10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily
to preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via
a new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
with it. It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
experience with this method the quality of data will
improve beyond those required here.
10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify HPLC columns, HPLC conditions,
internal standards or detectors to improve separations or lower
analytical costs. Each time such method modifications are made,
the analyst must repeat the procedures in Sect. 10.3.
10.5 ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD
10.5.1 When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
peak height) of all samples during each analysis day. The
IS response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate
from the daily calibration check standard's IS response by
more than 30%.
10.5.2 If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract,
optimize instrument performance and inject a second aliquot.
10.5.2.1 If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
internal standard response, report results for
that aliquot.
10.5.2.2 If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
the reinjected extract, analysis of the sample
should be repeated beginning with Sect. 11,
373
-------
provided the samples is still available.
Otherwise, report results obtained from the
reinjected extract, but annotate as suspect.
10.5.3 If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.
10.5.3.1 If the check standard provides a response factor
(RF) within 20% of the predicted value, then
follow procedures itemized in Sect. 10.5.2 for
each sample failing the IS response criterion.
10.5.3.2 If the check standard provides a response factor
which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
value, then the analyst must recalibrate, as
specified in Sect. 9.
10.6 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANKS
10.6.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory
fortified blank (LFB) sample with every 20 samples or one
per sample set (all samples analyzed within a 24-h period)
whichever is greater. The fortification concentration of
each analyte in the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL,
whichever is less. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery
(X,-). If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the
control limits (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged
out of control, and the source of the problem must be
identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
10.6.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their
own laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory
performance against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that
are derived from the data in Table 2. When sufficient
internal performance data becomes available, develop
control limits from the mean percent recovery (X) and
standard deviation (S) of the percent recovery. These data
are used to establish upper and lower control limits as
fol1ows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = X + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT = X - 3S
After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new
control limits should be calculated using only the most
recent 20-30 data points. These calculated control limits
should never exceed those established in Sect. 10.3.2.
10.6.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically
determine and document its detection limit capabilities for
analytes of interest.
374
-------
10.6.4 At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
source.
10.6.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
certification programs offered by many states or the
studies conducted by U.S. EPA. Performance evaluation
studies serve as independent checks on the analyst's
performance.
10.7 ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX
10.7.1 The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum
of 5% of the routine samples or one sample concentration
per set, whichever is greater. The concentration should
not be less then the background concentration of the sample
selected for fortification. Ideally, the concentration
should be the same as that used for the laboratory
fortified blank (Sect. 10.6). Over time, samples from all
routine sample sources should be fortified.
10.7.2 Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X,
from the fortified sample for the background concentration,
b, measured in the unfortified sample, i.e.,:
P = 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,
and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
reagent water data collected in the same fashion. If the
analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO
background concentrations, and the added concentrations are
those specified in Sect. 10.7, then the appropriate control
limits would be the acceptance limits in Sect. 10.7. If,
on the other hand, the analyzed unfortified sample is found
to contain background concentration, b, estimate the
standard deviation at the background concentration, sb,
using regressions or comparable background data and,
similarly, estimate the mean, Xa and standard deviation,
sa, of analytical results at the'total concentration after
fortifying. Then the appropriate percentage control limits
would be P ± 3sp, where:
P = 100 X / (b + fortifying concentration)
1/2
2 2
and s = 100 (s + s ) /fortifying concentration
P a b
375
-------
would be (1.6 /ig/L minus 1.0 /ig/L)/l /ig/L or 60%. This
calculated P is compared to control limits derived from
prior reagent water data. Assume it is known that analysis
of an interference free sample at 1 /ig/L yields an_s of
0.12 /zg/L and similar analysis at 2.0 /ig/L yields X and s
of 2.01 /ig/L and 0.20 /ig/L, respectively. The appropriate
limits to judge the reasonableness of the percent recovery,
60%, obtained on the fortified matrix sample is computed as
fol1ows:
[100 (2.01 /ig/L) / 2.0 /ig/L]
1/2
± 3 (100) [(0.12 "/ig/L)2 + (0.20 /ig/L)2] / 1.0 /ig/L =
100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =
100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.
10.7.3 If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.6), the
recovery problem encountered with the dosed sample is
judged to be matrix related, not system related. The
result for that analyte in the unfortified sample is
labeled suspect/matrix to inform the data user that the
results are suspect due to matrix effects.
10.8 ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SAMPLE -
Instrument performance should be monitored on a daily basis by
analysis of the LPC sample. The LPC sample contains compounds
designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance. LPC
sample components and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
Inability to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance
indicates the need for revaluation of the instrument system. The
sensitivity requirements are set based on the EDLs published in
this method. If laboratory EDLs differ from those listed in this
method, concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must
be adjusted to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.
10.9 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
use with this method. The specific practices that are most
productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature
of the samples. For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements
or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.
376
-------
11. PROCEDURE
11.1 PH ADJUSTMENT AND FILTRATION
11.1.1 Add preservative to any samples not previously preserved
(Sect. 8). Adjust the pH of the sample or standard to pH 3
± 0.2 by adding 1.5 ml of 2.5 M monochloroacetic acid
buffer to each 50 ml of sample. This step should not be
necessary if sample pH was adjusted during sample
collection as a preservation precaution. Fill a 50-mL
volumetric flask to the mark with the sample. Add 5 nl of
the internal standard fortification solution (if the
internal standard calibration procedure is being employed)
and mix by inverting the flask several times.
11.1.2 Affix the three-way valve to a 10-mL syringe. Place a
clean filter in the filter holder and affix the filter
holder and the 7- to 10-cm syringe needle to the syringe
valve. Rinse the needle and syringe with reagent water.
Prewet the filter by passing 5 ml of reagent water through
the filter. Empty the syringe and check for leaks. Draw
10 ml of sample into the syringe and expel through the
filter. Draw another 10 ml of sample into the syringe
expel through the filter, and collect the last 5 mL for
analysis. Rinse the syringe with reagent water. Discard
the filter.
11.2 LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
11.2.1 Sect. 6.6 summarizes the recommended operating conditions
for the liquid chromatograph. Table 1 lists retention
times observed using this method. Other HPLC columns,
chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
requirements of Sect. 10.4 are met.
11.2.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 10. The
standards and samples must be in pH 3 buffered water.
11.2.3 Inject 400 fil of the sample. Record the volume injected
and the resulting peak size in area units.
11.2.4 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of
the system, dilute the sample with pH 3 buffered reagent
water and reanalyze.
11.3 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES
11.3.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram. If
the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,
within limits, to the retention time of a standard
compound, then identification is considered positive.
377
-------
11.3.2 The width of the retention time window used to make
identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
retention time variations of standards over the course of a
day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention
time can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
compound. However, the experience of the analyst should
weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.3.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically. When
peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
(i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between
two or more maxima), or any time doubt exists over the
identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate
alternate techniques, to help confirm peak identification,
need to be employed. For example, more positive
identification may be made by the use of an alternative
detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
different from that originally used; e.g., mass
spectrometry, or the use of a second chromatography column.
A suggested alternative column is described in Sect. 6.6.3.
12. CALCULATIONS
Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample using
the following equation:
Cx - Ax - 's
A. . RF
s
where: Cx = analyte concentration in micrograms per liter;
Ax = response of the sample analyte;
A. - response of the standard (either internal or
external), in units consistent with those used
for the analyte response;
RF = response factor (with an external standard, RF = 1,
because the standard is the same compound as the
measured analyte);
Qs = concentration of internal standard present or
concentration of external standard that produced As,
in micrograms per liter.
13. PRECISION AND ACCURACY
13.1 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
determined at five concentration levels. Results were used to
determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range.(1) Analyte
378
-------
recoveries and standard deviation about the percent recoveries at
one concentration are given in Table 2.
13.2 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level
Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
different ground water matrices.(1) Analyte recoveries from the
two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.
14. REFERENCES
1. National Pesticide Survey Method No. 5., "Measurement of N-
Methylcarbamoyloximes and N-Methylcarbamates in Groundwater by HPL
with Post Column Derivatization,"
2. Moye, H.A., S.J. Sherrer, and P. A. St. John, "Dynamic Labeling of
Pesticides for High Performance Liquid Chromatography: Detection
of N-Methylcarbamates and o-Phthalaldehyde," Anal. Lett. 10_, 1049,
A J / / • '
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
"Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, PA, p. 86, 1986.
4. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.
5. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry/ (29 CFR
1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.
(Revised, January 1976).
6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
* «* / 5* »
7. Foerst, D. L. and H. A. Moye, "Aldicarb in Drinking Water via
Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Post Column Derivatization,"
Proceedings of the 12th annual AWWA Water Quality Technology
Conference, 1984.
8. Hill, K. M., R.H. Hollowell, and L. A. DalCortevo, "Determination
of N-Methylcarbamate Pesticides in Well Water by Liquid
Chromatography and Post Column Fluorescence Derivatization,"
Anal. Chem. £6, 2465 (1984).
9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
"Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for
Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, p. 130, 1986.
379
-------
TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Retention Time(a)
PHmarv<1) Alternative*2* Alternative0"
Aldicarb sulfoxide
Aldicarb sirtfone
Oxamyl
Methomyl
3-Hydroxycarbofuran
Aldicarb
Baygon
Carbofuran
Carbaryl
Methiocarb
BDMC
6.80
7.77
8.20
8.94
13.65
16.35
18.86
19.17
20.29
24.74
25.28
15.0
15.2
17.4
18.4
23.3
27.0
29.3
29.6
30.8
34.9
35.5
17.5
12.2
14.6
14.8
19
21.4
24.4
23.4
25.4
28.6
-------An error occurred while trying to OCR this image.
-------
CO
A
z
0>
A
O
O
(A
o>
o
o
O)
co
Ul
CD
0)
4-
to
c
O>
o o
•e ±
a -a
U V»
I -e
S- A
0)
s- ro o
rt I i—
r— «
Q)
O
«
CO
o>
o
s-
(U
o.
o
o
g-
O)
Q)
u>
•a
0)
ftf
o
j§
CD
CO
CO
CJ
nj
a>
0)
^ O
O £
i" ^
a»
.? -g
« c
o.
.
at
•CJ
e:
w
(9
&
a.
I
i
«^-
«j
o
•i—
3
"3
s.
CO
oo
* i
s.
0,
r—
S- O)
01 U>
382
•U.S. Government Printing Office: 1991 — 548-187/40538
-------
-------
-------
-------
-------